H94GB

Confocal Displacement Sensor 1 Installing

the CL-3000 Series

2 Basic Operations

CL-3000 Series 3 Measurement

Settings

User’s Manual 4 Common Settings

and Functions

Read this manual before use.

Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time. 5 Display Panel

6 I/O Terminal

7 Communication
Control

8 Specifications

A Appendix
 Introduction
This document describes information on the hardware and its basic operation. Read this manual thoroughly in order to understand how the CL-3000
Series works and to maximize performance of the CL-3000 Series.
Always keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Please ensure that the manual is passed to the end user of the software.

Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these messages carefully.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.

Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

Indicates additional information on proper operation.

Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Indicates the reference pages and items in this manual.

Precautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If there are any mistakes or questions, please
contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.

Trademarks
Other proper nouns such as product names used in this manual are registered trademarks or the trademarks of their respective companies.
This manual does not use ™ or ® mark for the trademarks or registered trademarks in the text.
EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
 Safety Information for CL-3000 Series

Safety Information for CL-3000 Series

General Cautions
• Do not use this product to protect a human body or part of a human body.
• This product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in a hazardous location and/or
potentially explosive atmosphere.
• Do not use this product in an application that may cause death, serious injury or serious property damage should a failure
with this product occur, such as nuclear power plants, on aircraft, trains, ships, or vehicles, used within medical equipment,
playground equipment, roller coasters and other rides, etc.

• If the product is used in a manner not specified by this manual, the protection provided by the product may be impaired.
• You must perform a sufficient risk assessment for the machine where this product is to be installed prior to installing this
product. Provide appropriate protective fail-safe measures on the machine independent from this product in case a failure
with this product should occur.

• Before starting or operating the system, check to make sure all system functions are working properly.
• If any Keyence product fails, take all safety precautions to prevent damage before using the system again.

• If the system is operated beyond its published specifications or if the system is modified, its functions and performance
cannot be guaranteed.
• Please note that when the system is used in combination with other instruments, its functions and performance may be
degraded.
• Do not subject the controller or connected devices to a sudden change in temperature. There is the risk of condensation
occurring.

Precautions for use

Ensuring safe operation
• Use the specified voltage. Failure to do so may cause fire, electric shock or malfunction.
• Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Failure to do so may cause fire or electric shock.

Handling abnormal conditions

• Turn the power off immediately in the following cases. Using the unit in an abnormal condition could cause fire, electric
shock, or accident. Contact your local KEYENCE office for repair for the following situations:
• If liquid, including water or chemicals, or debris enters the unit.
• If the system is dropped or the case is damaged.
• If smoke or an abnormal odor is emitted from the controller.
Ensuring safe operation
• The power of this instrument and units connected to it must be turned off if plugging or unplugging each unit or extension
cable. Failure to do so may cause product damage.
• Do not turn off this instrument when settings are being modified. Part or all of the settings may be lost.
• You are advised to back up the settings in the PC to prevent data loss in the event of system trouble or failure.
• Do not block the vent holes on the instrument. Increase of internal temperature could cause failure.
Installation environment
• To use this instrument correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Installation in such locations may
cause malfunction.
• Locations that contain moisture or dust, or that are poorly ventilated.
• Locations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight.
• Locations where there are flammable or corrosive gases.
• Locations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact.
• Locations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the instrument.
• Locations that are prone to static electricity.
Handling
• Do not wipe the instrument with a wet wipe, benzene, or thinner. Doing so could change the color or shape of the instrument. If the
instrument has a large amount of dirt on it, wipe it off with a cloth moistened with a mild detergent, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Handling of head (extension) cables
• Tip of cable where the fiber cable is exposed:
• Be careful not to apply excessive bending stress.
• Do not pull the cable with a strength greater than 200 gf.
• Do not place heavy objects or stomp on the cable.
• When not using the fiber connector, be sure to keep the included connector cap attached to prevent debris and dust from
collecting on the fiber connector surface.
• When using the cable in a cable carrier, ensure that the bending radius of the cable carrier is 60 mm or greater for increased
bending durability. In the case of head extension cables, allow a bending radius of 80 mm or greater, as they have larger
diameters.
(For CL-P/CL-L heads)
• Do not wipe off the grease from the fiber connector surface. Doing so may trigger a warning.
• Be careful not to lose the connector cap as it is used for replenishing grease on the fiber connector surface.
• If the [Head (No.) reflection light quantity error] warning appears, fix the error by following the procedure below.
1. Check that the fiber connector is inserted all the way.
2. If the warning persists, perform a light quantity calibration.
3. If the warning still persists, replenish grease on the fiber connector by inserting into the included connector cap, and
then re-insert it into the adapter. If you have lost the connector cap, contact your local KEYENCE office.
(For CL-V/CL-S heads)
• If the fiber connector is installed with dust or debris adhering to the adapter or plug on the fiber connector, light may not be
emitted and a warning may be displayed.
• If the [Head (No.) reflection light quantity error] warning appears, fix the error by following the procedure below.
1. Check that the fiber connector is inserted all the way.
2. If the warning persists, perform a light quantity calibration.
3. If the warning still persists, wipe off the dirt with commercially-available dedicated optical connector cleaner or a soft,
dry cloth.

H94GB 1
Safety Information for CL-3000 Series

Handling of the optical unit

• When the fiber connector is not connected, be sure to attach the adapter connector cap on the side to prevent debris and dust
from collecting on the adapter section of the fiber connector.
• The received light waveform peak height can vary by a factor of two depending on the light in the optical unit or due to
transmission loss. However, it does not influence the measurement.
Noise control
• When the controller and/or optical unit is installed near a noise source such as a power source or high-voltage lines, noise
may cause a malfunction or failure of the unit. Take corrective actions against noise by using noise filters, laying cables in a
separate conduit, and/or shielding with grounded metal.
Warming up
• After turning on the power, leave this product for about 30 minutes before using. Since the circuit is not stable immediately
after turning on the power, the measured value may drift gradually.
Influence of ambient temperature
• Changes in the ambient temperature may cause the measurement to fluctuate. Be sure to keep the temperature constant at all times.
When the ambient temperature changes by 10˚C, it takes about 60 minutes until the temperature inside the unit is uniformly distributed.
Influence of dust or dirt
• In the following cases, foreign matter such as dust and debris or water and oil could cause differences in the measurement values.
• Adhesion on the front glass of the head: Blow off the dirt on the cover glass with clean air. If dirt persists, wipe the glass
surface gently using a soft cloth moistened with alcohol. (Ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, etc.)
• Adhesion on the surface of the measurement target: Blow the dirt off with clean air or wipe it off.
• Intrusion of floating or sprinkled dust or dirt into the light-axis range: In this case, take corrective action with a protective
cover or air purge.
Influence of vibration
• When the target is vibrating, the measured value may fluctuate. In this case, increase the number of averaging measurements
to ensure more accurate measurement.
Effect of atmospheric motions
• Slow atmospheric motions may affect the measurement and result in fluctuation of the measured value. In such a case, take
the following countermeasures:
• Enclose the sensor head in an appropriate enclosure.
• Using a fan, blow strong air between the sensor head and target.
Measurement target
• The shape or surface condition of the target may cause error in measurement value.
Operations outside the measurement range
• When measuring a target with high reflectivity such as a metallic mirror surface, incorrect measurement values may be output
outside the measurement range on the short distance side(*1).
(*1: In the cases of 15 mm head (Quad type) or compact 8 mm (Spot type) diameter head, incorrect measured values may
occur outside the measurement range on both short and long distance sides.)
In such cases, incorrect measured values can be avoided either by reducing the sampling cycle or setting the detection
threshold to MANUAL and setting a higher value.
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4) and “Threshold setting” (Page 3-14).
• When measuring a target with high reflectivity such as a metallic mirror surface using a compact head with 8 mm diameter (Quad
type), incorrect measurement values may be output outside the measurement range on both the short and long distance sides.
This problem can be solved by running a light intensity tuning. Refer to “Light intensity tuning” (Page 3-14).

2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Safety Information for CL-3000 Series

Precautions on wiring
Part of the input/output circuit of the CL-3000 Series is internally common. Be careful that no potential difference is generated
between the internally common terminals due to the potential difference between the cables/external devices. Failure to follow
this caution may result in a fire.

Insulated condition between each I/O circuit

Input terminal (IN1 to 13) Input circuit

COM_IN
Poly Switch
Output terminal (OUT1 to 11) Output circuit

COM_OUT
RS-232C signal line RS-232C driver circuit

RS-232C’s SG
SG of Ethernet connector
USB connector FG and signal GND
Poly Switch
0V DC
Earth terminal

Insulation resistance: 10 MΩ
Analog voltage output Analog voltage
output circuit
Analog voltage output 0 V
Internal GND

0V DC, USB connector’s FG and signal GND, and RS-232C’s SG are all common via a choke coil. Ensure that no potential difference occurs with the PC,
PLC, etc. If a potential difference occurs, insulate the power supply of the controller (CL-3000) from the external device side.

Cautions to take in an positive ground environment

When using CL-NavigatorN with a PC connected via USB or connecting a PC and external device (PLC, etc.) via RS-232C in a positive ground environment,
ensure that the USB terminal or RS-232C terminal is not positive ground via the external device.

External devices Ground

such as PC CL-3000
(1) (2)
Earth RS-232C/ RS-232C/ RS-232C/
terminal USB GND USB cable USB GND

24V DC

24V DC

0V DC

External devices such as a PC (1) or the power supply of CL-3000 (2) should be insulated from the positive ground terminal

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

CE and UKCA Marking

Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EU Directive(s) and UK regulations,
based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member States of the European
Union and in the United Kingdom.

z EMC Directive (CE) and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations (UKCA)

• Applicable standard: (BS)EN61326-1, Class A
• All of the cables used to connect the controller and external device should not exceed 30 m.
• Use shielded cable with the category 5 or above for the Ethernet cable.
• This product is designed for use in industrial environments.

Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end product with this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC
Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product
itself according to EMC Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations.

CSA Certificate
This product complies with the following CSA and UL standards and has been certified by CSA.
• Applicable Standard CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1
UL61010-1
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a product certified by CSA.
Overvoltage category I
• Use this product under pollution degree 2.
• Use this product at an altitude of 2000 m or lower.
• Indoor use only.

Safety Precautions on Laser Product

This product uses the light source with a semiconductor laser and fluorescent substance.
The laser class and risk group of CL-3000 series are classified as follows:
• Class 1 laser product (IEC60825-1:2014, FDA (CDRH) Part 1040.10*, JIS C 6802:2018)
* The classification is conducted by following Laser Notice No.50 of FDA (CDRH) with the standard of IEC60825-1.
• Risk group : Exempt group

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.

Precautions on Class 1 Laser Product

Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual. Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may result.
• Do not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam.
• Do not disassemble this product. Laser emission from this product is not automatically stopped when it is disassembled.

4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Software License Agreement

Software License Agreement

NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION
OF THE CL-NavigatorN (THIS “SOFTWARE”), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. Definition
1.1 “use” or “using” means to access, install, download, copy or otherwise benefit from using the functionality of this Software.
1.2 “This Software” means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.

2. Grant of License.
Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable
license to install this Software on all computers used by your entity in order to use the KEYENCE product. You may make one copy of this Software
for backup or archive purposes only.

3. Restrictions.
3.1 Except for installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify or add any function to this Software.
3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble this Software.
3.3 You may not create derivative works based on this Software.
3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise redistribute this Software to any third parties.

4. Intellectual Property Rights.

Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software, and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and
other intellectual property rights therein.

5. Disclaimer.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you “AS IS” and without any warranty of any kind. In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for
any damages, claims, costs or any lost profits caused by using this Software.

6. Termination.
6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and the copy of this Software in your possession or
voluntarily return this Software to us.
6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Promptly upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of this
Software in your possession or control.
6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach of any term of this Agreement.

7. Governing Law.
7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of Japan without regards to the principles of
conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the balance of this Agreement, which shall remain
valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 5

Precautions about Specifications

Precautions about Specifications

The following functions are available with the version shown below.
The version information can be seen in CL-Navigator > [Help] > [Version].
* The encoder unit’s and the optical unit’s versions are shown when you double-click in the display where the controller’s version is shown.

Version
Function Ref.
Controller Optical unit Encoder unit CL-NavigatorN

Copy OUT settings 1.01.** 1.00.** 1.01.** 1.1.*.* -

[Return to factory default settings] of the [Communication]

1.01.** 1.00.** 1.01.** 1.1.*.* 2-6
menu

Tilt correction 1.02.** 1.00.** 1.01.** 1.2.*.* 2-7

Communication monitor 1.01.** 1.00.** 1.01.** 1.1.*.* 4-11

Count value (trigger count / pulse count value) can be

output with the current “Measurement value output” and 1.01.** 1.00.** 1.01.** - 7-7
“Automatic transmission” commands

Pulse count get / clear command

1.01.** 1.00.** 1.01.** - 7-17
(ASCII command)

Data storage related command

1.01.** 1.00.** 1.01.** - 7-17
(ASCII command)

Measurement value output command

1.01.** 1.00.** 1.01.** - 7-19
(Binary command)

Fast measurement value output (ALL) command

1.01.** 1.00.** 1.01.** - 7-20
(Binary command)

Data storage data output command

1.01.** 1.00.** 1.01.** - 7-22
(Binary command)

PROFINET 1.02.** 1.00.** 1.01.** 1.3.*.* 7-40

PLC-Link 1.02.** 1.00.** 1.01.** 1.3.*.* 7-50

EtherCAT (*1) 1.03.** 1.01.** (*2) 1.4.*.* 7-58

High sensitivity 1.04.** 1.02.** 1.01.** 1.5.*.* 3-15

Analog output 1.04.** 1.02.** 1.01.** 1.5.*.* 4-3

Moving average (excluding alarm) 1.05.** 1.03.** 1.01.** 1.6.*.* 3-16

CL-S head alignment guide function 1.05.** 1.03.** 1.01.** 1.6.*.* 4-16

Light axis match acquisition command 1.05.** 1.03.** 1.01.** - 7-18

2 heads thickness measurement check command 1.06.** 1.03.** 1.01.** 1.7.*.* 7-18

Transparent object peak specification of thickness

1.06.** 1.03.** 1.01.** 1.7.*.* 3-10
(2 heads)

*1 The Explicit Device Identification function cannot be used with version 1.01.** and later EtherCAT units.
*2 Encoder unit is not available with EtherCAT unit.

• If CL-NavigatorN version is old and the device’s version is new, they cannot communicate and an error is displayed.
• If the version of CL-NavigatorN is new while the version of the device is old, a warning message will appear. Although
communication is possible between such devices, you cannot use functions in newer versions than that of the connected
device.
• You can update your device by using the update file. You can download the update file from the KEYENCE website.
Download URL
CL-3000 Series Web Site
URL: www.keyence.com/cl-3000_non-ecp_support

6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Contents

Contents Chapter 2 Basic Operations

Programming Flow...........................................................2-2
Start-up and Shut-down...................................................2-3
Introduction Start-up............................................................................. 2-3
Symbols Starting up the controller............................................................2-3
Precautions Starting up CL-NavigatorN.........................................................2-3
Trademarks Connecting to CL-NavigatorN................................................ 2-3
Safety Information for CL-3000 Series................................ 1 Starting up in offline mode...................................................... 2-3
General Cautions................................................................. 1 Shutting down................................................................... 2-4
Shutting down CL-NavigatorN....................................................2-4
Precautions for use.............................................................. 1 Shutting down the controller.......................................................2-4
Precautions on wiring.......................................................... 3
Insulated condition between each I/O circuit.................................3
Names and Functions of the Main Screen.......................2-5
Cautions to take in an positive ground environment......................3 Menu bar........................................................................... 2-6
[File] menu..................................................................................2-6
Precautions on Regulations and Standards........................ 4 [Monitor/display] menu...............................................................2-6
CE and UKCA Marking........................................................ 4 [Connection] menu.....................................................................2-6
CSA Certificate.................................................................... 4 [Tool] menu.................................................................................2-6
Safety Precautions on Laser Product.................................. 4 [Help] menu................................................................................2-6
Precautions on Class 1 Laser Product................................ 4 Measured value display area............................................ 2-6
Software License Agreement.............................................. 5 Waveform display change buttons.................................... 2-7
Precautions about Specifications........................................ 6 Graph display area........................................................... 2-7
Measurement processing input buttons............................ 2-7
[Save] button..................................................................... 2-7
Chapter 1 Installing the CL-3000 Series [Set Prog.] button.............................................................. 2-8
System Configuration.......................................................1-2 Data display area.............................................................. 2-8
Checking the Package Contents......................................1-3 Program functions............................................................. 2-9
Standard Package............................................................ 1-3 Auto zero function............................................................. 2-9
Optional Product List........................................................ 1-4
Part Names and Functions...............................................1-5 Chapter 3 Measurement Settings
Controller (CL-3000)......................................................... 1-5 Measurement Data Processing Flow...............................3-2
Optical unit........................................................................ 1-5
Measurement Settings Flow.............................................3-3
Head................................................................................. 1-6
Display panel (CL-D500).................................................. 1-6 STEP 1: System settings..................................................3-4
Encoder unit (CL-E100).................................................... 1-7 Head configuration............................................................ 3-4
EtherCAT Unit (CL-EC100)............................................... 1-7 Sampling setting............................................................... 3-4
Expansion analog unit (CL-H150)..................................... 1-7 STEP 2: Measurement method........................................3-5
Expansion unit (CL-H100)................................................ 1-8 Displacement.................................................................... 3-5
Relay unit (CL-H200)........................................................ 1-8 Displacement (transparent object).................................... 3-6
Software Installation.........................................................1-9 Thickness (transparent object)......................................... 3-8
System Requirements...................................................... 1-9 Thickness (2 heads)....................................................... 3-10
Preparation for the Installation.......................................... 1-9 Height difference (2 heads)............................................ 3-12
Hard drive free space............................................................. 1-9 Calculation...................................................................... 3-13
Windows environment and installation destination................ 1-9 Common settings............................................................ 3-14
Help file.................................................................................. 1-9 Head settings............................................................................3-14
Installing CL-NavigatorN................................................... 1-9 Waveform display area......................................................... 3-14
Uninstalling CL-NavigatorN............................................ 1-10 [Basic] tab............................................................................ 3-14
[Signal processing] tab......................................................... 3-15
Mounting and Connecting.............................................. 1-11 [Transparent object] tab....................................................... 3-15
Mounting the Head......................................................... 1-11 Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance..................................................3-16
Measurement range.................................................................1-11 Scaling................................................................................. 3-16
15 mm/30 mm/70 mm/150 mm heads......................................1-12 Offset.................................................................................... 3-16
8 mm diameter compact head..................................................1-12 Tolerance settings................................................................ 3-16
Mounting the head using head fixture A Option settings..........................................................................3-16
(OP-88353, sold separately)................................................ 1-12 Filter..................................................................................... 3-16
Mounting the head using head fixture C Hold processing................................................................... 3-17
(OP-88355, sold separately)................................................ 1-13 Invalid data processing........................................................ 3-19
Mounting on the side of a rack, etc...................................... 1-13 Minimum display unit............................................................ 3-19
High precision head (CL-S015)................................................1-14 Analog output scaling........................................................... 3-19
Vacuum and high temperature head (CL-V020/CL-V050)........1-14 STEP 3: Judgment output..............................................3-20
Side view fixture (For 8 mm diameter compact head)
(OP‑88860)...............................................................................1-14
Judgment output............................................................. 3-20
Side view fixture (For 30mm head) (OP‑88861).......................1-15 Terminal allocation.......................................................... 3-20
Side view fixture Analog OUT allocation.................................................... 3-20
(For vacuum and high temperature heads CL-V020/ CL-V050)
(OP‑88862)...............................................................................1-15
Profile measuring head.............................................................1-16
Mounting the Optical Unit............................................... 1-16
Mounting the Controller/Optical Unit............................... 1-17
Installation cautions..................................................................1-17
Fixing the Controller/Optical Unit..............................................1-17
Mounting the Display Panel............................................ 1-17
Connecting...................................................................... 1-18
Connecting the Head................................................................1-18
Connecting the Head Extension Cable.....................................1-18
Connecting the Display Panel..................................................1-18
Connecting to the pass through fixture.....................................1-18
Connecting the Power..............................................................1-19
How to use the terminal block..................................................1-19
Connecting Additional Heads.......................................... 1-20
Mounting the Expansion Unit....................................................1-21
Mounting the Relay Unit on the Optical Unit.............................1-21
Connecting the Expansion Cable.............................................1-21

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7

Contents

Chapter 4 Common Settings and Functions Chapter 6 I/O Terminal

Environment Settings.......................................................4-2 Names and Functions of the I/O Terminals......................6-2
Communication................................................................. 4-2 Functions of the I/O Terminals.......................................... 6-2
RS-232C settings.......................................................................4-2 Controller....................................................................................6-2
Ethernet settings.........................................................................4-2 Input Terminal Block................................................................6-2
Field network.................................................................... 4-2 Output terminal block..............................................................6-2
I/O terminal settings.......................................................... 4-3 Expansion analog unit (CL-H150)..............................................6-3
Input/Output Terminal Allocation.................................................4-3 Encoder unit...............................................................................6-3
Judgment output method............................................................4-3 Functions of the Input/Output Signals............................... 6-4
Analog output settings...................................................... 4-3 Input/Output Circuit........................................................... 6-5
Encoder settings............................................................... 4-4 Controller....................................................................................6-5
Input mode..................................................................................4-4 Input circuit............................................................................. 6-5
Minimum Input Time...................................................................4-5 Output circuit.......................................................................... 6-5
Pulse Count Preset Function......................................................4-5 Expansion analog unit (CL-H150)..............................................6-5
Other................................................................................. 4-5 Output circuit.......................................................................... 6-5
Display panel settings.................................................................4-5 Encoder unit...............................................................................6-6
Fan setting..................................................................................4-5 Input circuit..............................................................................6-6
Saving and Reading Settings...........................................4-6 Timing Charts...................................................................6-7
Save Settings to File......................................................... 4-6 Representative terminal operation at startup.................... 6-7
Read Settings File............................................................ 4-6 N.O./N.C. setting reflection timing at startup.................... 6-7
Displaying the Setting Contents........................................ 4-7 Response delay time........................................................ 6-7
Terminal operation when the hold mode is “Normal”........ 6-8
Monitor Functions and Operations...................................4-8
Terminal operation when the hold mode is
Measurement Value Monitor............................................. 4-8
“Peak hold/Bottom hold/Peak-to-peak hold/Average hold”,
I/O Monitor........................................................................ 4-9
and the update condition is “External Timing 1”................ 6-8
Communication Log Monitor........................................... 4-10
Terminal operation when the hold mode is
Communication monitor.................................................. 4-11
“Peak hold/Bottom hold/Peak-to-peak hold/Average hold”,
PC Communication Settings..........................................4-12 and the update condition is “External Timing 2”................ 6-9
Connect with USB........................................................... 4-12 The terminal operation when the hold mode is
Connect with Ethernet.................................................... 4-12 “Sample hold”, and the update condition is
Setting the Controller IP Address.............................................4-13
“External Timing 1”............................................................ 6-9
Tool Function and its Operation.....................................4-14 The terminal operation when the hold mode is
Data Storage................................................................... 4-14 “Sample hold”, and the update condition is
Data storage step.....................................................................4-15
“External Timing 2”.......................................................... 6-10
Head Alignment Guide.................................................... 4-16
The terminal operation when the update condition
Calibration of Light Intensity........................................... 4-16
of the hold processing is “Internal Timing”...................... 6-10
Terminal operation when the hold mode is
Chapter 5 Display Panel “Auto peak hold”............................................................. 6-11
Basic Operation of the Display Panel...............................5-2 Terminal operation of Auto Zero...................................... 6-11
Each mode display by key operation................................ 5-2 Terminal operation of Switch Program............................ 6-12
Character display of the Display Panel............................. 5-2 Terminal operation of Storage......................................... 6-12
Number input of the Display Panel................................... 5-3 Terminal operation of Emission stop............................... 6-13
Switching Program...........................................................5-4 Terminal operation of Stop Measurement....................... 6-13
Switching the Measurement Value Display......................5-4 In the case of Encoder Trigger (Skipping point 2)........... 6-13
Switching the top display and bottom display................... 5-4 Output Logic with Different Judgment Output Modes..... 6-14
Changing the display settings........................................... 5-4
Changing Tolerance Settings...........................................5-5
Restore the Device Setting to Factory Defaults...............5-5
Each Function Setting......................................................5-6
Hierarchical list of the menu in the settings mode............ 5-6
Display panel operation.................................................... 5-7
Setting item selection.................................................................5-7
Selecting the Head Settings Menu.............................................5-7
Search Threshold setting........................................................5-8
Median Filter Settings.............................................................5-8
Calibration of Light Intensity....................................................5-9
Selecting the OUT Settings Menu............................................5-10
Setting Invalid Data Processing............................................5-11
Scaling Settings....................................................................5-11
Offset Settings.......................................................................5-11
Selecting the Communication Settings Menu...........................5-12
RS-232C Settings
(Baud Rate Settings and Parity Settings)..............................5-13
Setting of IP Address at the Next Power On.........................5-14
Setting of IP Address.............................................................5-14
Setting of the Subnet Mask...................................................5-15
Setting of the Gateway..........................................................5-15
Setting of the Port Number....................................................5-15

8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Contents

Example Telnet Software to Controller TCP/IP

Chapter 7 Communication Control Communication............................................................... 7-27
USB Interface...................................................................7-2 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP..........................7-28
Standard Specifications, Connector Specifications.......... 7-2 Cyclic and Message Communications............................ 7-28
Connecting to a PC........................................................... 7-2 Cyclic communication...............................................................7-28
System requirements..................................................................7-2 Message communication..........................................................7-28
Installing the USB driver.............................................................7-2 Communication Specifications.................................................7-28
RS-232C Interface...........................................................7-3 Cyclic Communication.................................................... 7-29
Communication Specifications.......................................... 7-3 Configuring the PLC.................................................................7-29
Memory map.............................................................................7-30
Connector Specifications.................................................. 7-3 Monitor data list (Controller -> PLC)......................................7-30
Ethernet Interface.............................................................7-3 Control data list (PLC → Controller)......................................7-32
Standard Specifications, Connector Specifications.......... 7-3 Monitor data details..................................................................7-33
Control/Data Output via Commands................................7-4 Parameter details (This controller → PLC).......................... 7-33
Control data details...................................................................7-34
Notes on Command Input/Output..................................... 7-4
Parameter details (PLC → This controller)............................7-34
When using non-procedural commands.....................................7-4
Operation example...................................................................7-35
When using number-specified commands
Example 1:
(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)..........................................7-4
Read the measurement value of the controller.....................7-35
Response time............................................................................7-4
Example 2: Handshake processing of a timing request........7-35
Command List................................................................... 7-4 Example 3:
Command Details............................................................. 7-6 Handshake processing of a program switching request.......7-35
Command parameter example...................................................7-6 Example 4: Change the Tolerance judgment value...............7-36
Measurement value format.........................................................7-7 Message Communication............................................... 7-37
Mode change..............................................................................7-8 Message communication..........................................................7-37
Go to setting mode................................................................. 7-8 Objects and services............................................................ 7-37
Go to measurement mode..................................................... 7-8 Basic format for message communication........................... 7-37
Measurement value output.........................................................7-8 Message communications operation.................................... 7-37
Timing input................................................................................7-9 Service object...........................................................................7-37
Auto zero input...........................................................................7-9 Object configuration............................................................. 7-37
Reset measurement value........................................................7-10 Measurement Object............................................................ 7-37
Panel control (Lock/unlock panel operation)............................7-10 Communication command execution service...........................7-38
Switch program No...................................................................7-10 Parameter description.......................................................... 7-38
Switch program No............................................................... 7-10 Example of data................................................................... 7-38
Read program No................................................................. 7-10 Identity Object...........................................................................7-39
Measurement control................................................................7-11
Emission control.......................................................................7-11 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET..........................7-40
Automatic transmission............................................................7-11 Overview of PROFINET Connection.............................. 7-40
Start automatic transmission.................................................7-11 Communication Specifications........................................ 7-40
Stop automatic transmission.................................................7-11 Cyclic communication specification................................ 7-40
Mask setting.............................................................................7-12 Cyclic Communication Function...............................................7-40
Specify mask setting range...................................................7-12 What Can be Done by Cyclic Communication..........................7-40
Read mask setting range......................................................7-12 Module which Can be Used......................................................7-40
Invalid data processing.............................................................7-13 Memory map.............................................................................7-41
Specify invalid data processing............................................ 7-13 Monitor data list (This unit -> PLC)........................................7-41
Read invalid data processing............................................... 7-13 Control data list (PLC ->This unit).........................................7-43
Scaling......................................................................................7-14 Monitor data details..................................................................7-44
Specify scaling setting...........................................................7-14 Parameter Details (This Unit -> PLC)................................... 7-44
Read scaling value................................................................7-14 Control Data Details.................................................................7-45
Offset........................................................................................7-15 Parameter Details (PLC -> This Unit)....................................7-45
Specify offset........................................................................ 7-15 Changing PROFINET Settings....................................... 7-46
Read offset........................................................................... 7-15 Ethernet settings for PROFINET communication........... 7-46
Specify tolerance......................................................................7-16 IP Address Setting....................................................................7-46
Specify tolerance...................................................................7-16 Detection Function of IP Address Conflict................................7-46
Read tolerance......................................................................7-16 Operation example...................................................................7-47
Encoder....................................................................................7-17 Example 1:
Clear pulse count................................................................. 7-17 Read the measurement value of the controller.....................7-47
Get pulse count.................................................................... 7-17 Example 2: Handshake processing of a timing request........7-47
Data Storage............................................................................7-17 Example 3:
Start data storage................................................................. 7-17 Handshake processing of a program switching request.......7-47
Stop data storage................................................................. 7-17 Example 4: Change the tolerance comparator value............7-48
Clear data storage................................................................ 7-17
Alarm communication..................................................... 7-49
Get storage status................................................................ 7-17
Light axis match acquisition......................................................7-18 Control/Data Output via PLC Link..................................7-50
Light axis match acquisition................................................. 7-18 Overview of PLC Link Function...................................... 7-50
2 heads thickness measurement check...................................7-18 Models Supported for PLC Link Connection................... 7-50
2 heads thickness measurement check............................... 7-18 PLC produced by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation....................7-50
Binary Command Detail.................................................. 7-19 Preparing the PLC.......................................................... 7-51
Command format......................................................................7-19 1. Overview of wiring...............................................................7-51
Each command parameter.......................................................7-19 2. Settings of this unit..............................................................7-51
Measurement value output : command code 0x01...............7-19 3. Wire connection at PLC link and settings
Fast measurement value output ...........................................7-20 on the PLC side........................................................................7-51
Get index for fast measurement value output : Connecting with MELSEC (link unit).................................... 7-51
Command Code 0x04...........................................................7-20 Connecting with MELSEC (built-in Ethernet port)................ 7-52
Fast measurement value output : Command Code 0x05......7-21 Memory map.............................................................................7-53
Get storage data...................................................................7-22 Monitor data list (This unit -> PLC)........................................7-53
Get storage data index : command code 0x02.....................7-22 Control data list (PLC ->This unit).........................................7-54
Get storage data : Command Code 0x03.............................7-23 Monitor data details..................................................................7-55
Non-procedural Communication via RS-232C...............7-25 Parameter Details (This Unit -> PLC)................................... 7-55
Getting Started................................................................ 7-25 Control Data Details.................................................................7-55
Changing the RS-232C communication settings............ 7-25 Parameter details (PLC -> This Unit)....................................7-55
To change the settings using CL-NavigatorN...........................7-25 Outputting the Measurement Data with PLC Link........... 7-56
To change the settings on the Display Panel............................7-25 Operation example...................................................................7-56
Connection with a Personal Computer........................... 7-25 Example 1: when the handshake is [Disabled].....................7-56
Example 2: when the handshake is [Enabled]......................7-56
Non-procedural Communication via Ethernet................7-26 Example 3: Change the tolerance judgment value...............7-57
Getting Started................................................................ 7-26
Changing the Ethernet communication settings............. 7-26
To change the settings using CL-NavigatorN...........................7-26
To change the settings on the Display Panel............................7-26
One-to-one Connection with a PC.................................. 7-26
Connecting the controller to a PC.............................................7-26

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 9

Contents

Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT.............................7-58

Overview of EtherCAT.................................................... 7-58 Appendix
Process data object communications............................. 7-58 How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness
What process data object communications can do..................7-58 Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head)
Memory map.............................................................................7-59
(OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)................................... A-2
Monitor data list (Controller -> PLC)......................................7-59
Control data list (PLC ->This unit)........................................ 7-60 Overall Flow......................................................................A-2
Changing EtherCAT Settings.......................................... 7-61 Installation Restrictions.....................................................A-3
Mailbox Communications................................................ 7-61 Return Fixture to Original Orientation...............................A-3
1. Rough originating in XY directions........................................ A-3
Object Dictionary............................................................ 7-62
2. Rough tilt originating.............................................................. A-3
Input Data..............................................................................7-62
3. Rough rotation originating..................................................... A-3
Output Data...........................................................................7-64
4. Rough originating of the reference target angle.................... A-3
Mounting on the Fixture....................................................A-4
Chapter 8 Specifications Mounting Head 1..............................................................A-4
Specifications...................................................................8-2 Angle Adjustment of the Reference Target and
Sensor Head and Optical Unit Specification..................... 8-2 Measurement Target.........................................................A-5
Controller Specifications................................................... 8-4 Adjustment in the vertical direction............................................ A-5
Expansion Cable Specification......................................... 8-4 Adjustment in the horizontal direction........................................ A-5
Head Extension Cable Specification................................. 8-4 Mounting Head 2..............................................................A-5
Expansion Unit/Relay Unit Specifications......................... 8-4 Adjusting the Position of the Head Relative to the
Display Panel Specification.............................................. 8-4 Reference Target (STEP 1)..............................................A-6
Encoder Input Specification.............................................. 8-4 Adjusting the Angle of the Head Relative to the
EtherCAT Unit Specifications............................................ 8-4 Reference Target (STEP 2)..............................................A-6
Rough Head Alignment Between Head 1/2 (STEP 3)......A-7
Status Table......................................................................8-6
Precise Head Alignment Between Head 1/2 (STEP 4).....A-8
Dimensions......................................................................8-8 For quad type............................................................................ A-8
Controller (CL-3000)......................................................... 8-8 For spot type.............................................................................. A-9
Optical unit (CL-P***N/CL-L***N)...................................... 8-8 How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness
Optical unit (CL-S***N/CL-V***N)..................................... 8-8 Measurement (For High Precision Head CL-S015)
Head................................................................................. 8-9 (OP-88864)................................................................... A-10
8 mm diameter compact head (CL-P007/L007).........................8-9
Overall Flow....................................................................A-10
15 mm head (CL-P015/L015).....................................................8-9
30 mm head (CL-P030/L030).....................................................8-9 Installation Restrictions................................................... A-11
70 mm head (CL-P070/L070).....................................................8-9 Mounting head 1............................................................. A-11
150mm head (CL-P150/L150)....................................................8-9 Mounting head 2............................................................. A-11
20 mm vacuum and high temperature head (CL-V020)/ Adjusting the distance between the target and the head
50 mm vacuum and high temperature head (CL-V050)...........8-10 (STEP 1).........................................................................A-12
High precision head (CL-S015)................................................8-10 Rough head alignment between heads 1 and 2
Profile measuring head (CL-PT010).........................................8-10
(STEP 2).........................................................................A-12
Option............................................................................. 8-11
Precise head alignment between heads 1 and 2
Head extension cable
(CL-C5 (5 m)/CL-C10 (10 m)/CL-C30 (30 m))..........................8-11 (STEP 3).........................................................................A-12
Head extension cable Troubleshooting............................................................. A-13
(CL-CV2 (2m)/CL-CV5 (5m)/CL-CV15 (15m))..........................8-11 When the Measurement Value is
Expansion cable (CL-AC1/CL-AC2).........................................8-11 Unstable or Incorrect......................................................A-13
Expansion unit (CL-H100/CL-H150).........................................8-11 Troubleshooting..............................................................A-13
Encoder unit (CL-E100)............................................................8-11
Relay unit (CL-H200)................................................................8-11 Error Messages............................................................. A-16
EtherCAT unit (CL-EC100).......................................................8-11 Error Handling.................................................................A-16
Display Panel (CL-D500)..........................................................8-12 Error Message List..........................................................A-16
Head fixture (For 15 mm/30 mm/70 mm/150 mm heads) Warning................................................................................... A-16
(OP-88283)...............................................................................8-12 Setting error............................................................................. A-16
Head fixture (for high precision head) (OP-88863)...................8-12 System error............................................................................ A-17
Head fixture (For Profile measuring heads) (OP-88289)..........8-12 License Information....................................................... A-18
Head fixture A
(For 8 mm diameter compact head) (OP-88353).....................8-13
Index............................................................................. A-32
Head fixture B
(For 8 mm diameter compact head) (OP-88354).....................8-13
Head fixture C
(For 8 mm diameter compact head) (OP-88355).....................8-13
Side view fixture
(for 8 mm diameter compact head)(OP-88860)........................8-13
Side view fixture (for 30 mm head) (OP-88861).......................8-13
Side view fixture
(For vacuum and high temperature head CL-V020/ CL-V050)
(OP-88862)...............................................................................8-13
Pass through fixture
(for high precision head/vacuum and high temperature head)
(OP-88859)...............................................................................8-13
Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement:
For 15 mm head (OP-88284)...................................................8-14
Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement:
For 30 mm head (OP-88285)...................................................8-14
Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement:
For 70 mm head (OP-88286)...................................................8-14
Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement:
For high precision head (OP-88864)........................................8-15
Characteristics Chart......................................................8-16
Light-Axis Region Diagram............................................. 8-16
Mutual Interference......................................................... 8-17

10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 1
1
Installing

Installing the CL-3000 Series

the CL-3000 Series

System Configuration.............................................. 1-2

Checking the Package Contents............................. 1-3
Standard Package................................................................ 1-3
Optional Product List............................................................ 1-4

Part Names and Functions...................................... 1-5

Controller (CL-3000)............................................................. 1-5
Optical unit........................................................................... 1-5
Head..................................................................................... 1-6
Display panel (CL-D500)...................................................... 1-6
Encoder unit (CL-E100)........................................................ 1-7
EtherCAT Unit (CL-EC100).................................................. 1-7
Expansion analog unit (CL-H150)........................................ 1-7
Expansion unit (CL-H100).................................................... 1-8
Relay unit (CL-H200)............................................................ 1-8

Software Installation................................................ 1-9

System Requirements.......................................................... 1-9
Preparation for the Installation............................................. 1-9
Installing CL-NavigatorN...................................................... 1-9
Uninstalling CL-NavigatorN................................................ 1-10

Mounting and Connecting......................................1-11

Mounting the Head............................................................. 1-11
Mounting the Optical Unit................................................... 1-16
Mounting the Controller/Optical Unit.................................. 1-17
Mounting the Display Panel................................................ 1-17
Connecting......................................................................... 1-18
Connecting Additional Heads............................................. 1-20

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-1

 System Configuration

System Configuration
This product can be used in a wide range of applications by combining it with other off-the-shelf equipment.

Encoder, photoelectronic/ Indicator lamp, buzzer, etc.

proximity sensors, etc. (Off-the-shelf products)
(marketed item) Depending on the output of the
The sensors send a signal at a constant determination result, notification such

1
interval or when they detect any target object. as warning can be generated.
Installing the CL-3000 Series

CL-3000 Series
Optical unit
CL-P***N / CL-L***N / CL-S***N / CL-V***N

Controller
CL-3000

Encoder unit CL-E100/

EtherCAT Unit CL-EC100

24V DC power supply Head

(Sold separately) CL-P***/
CL-L***/
CL-S***/
Display panel CL-V***
CL-D500

Display panel cable

OP-88281 (3 m)
OP-88282 (10m) Ethernet cable
(OP-66843 or commercial product)
USB cable Mini-B type
(OP-51580 or commercial product)

CL-NavigatorN

Personal computer
Programmable controller
You can perform control
(marketed item)
operations and/or import
You can perform control operations and/or
measurement values
import measurement values via Ethernet
via non-procedural
and RS-232C communications.
Ethernet and RS-232C
communication.

1-2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Checking the Package Contents

Checking the Package Contents

The package should contain the following items.
Check the package contents to ensure that no items are missing.

Standard Package

1
• Controller (CL-3000) x 1 • Optical unit
(CL-P***N / CL-L***N /
CL-S***N / CL-V***N) × 1

Installing the CL-3000 Series

• Instruction Manual x1

• Cable tie x 1
• Head x 1
• 8 mm diameter • 15 mm head • 30mm head • 70mm head • 150 mm head
compact head (CL-P015/L015) (CL-P030/L030) (CL-P070/L070) (CL-P150/CL-L150)
(CL-P007/L007)

• Vacuum and high temperature head • High precision head • Profile measuring head
(CL-V020/CL-V050) (CL-S015) (CL-PT010)
(Screw for vacuum and sticker (accessory))

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-3

 Checking the Package Contents

Optional Product List

• Expansion unit • Expansion analog unit • Expansion cable
• Head extension cable (for P type / L type heads)
(CL-H100) (CL-H150) • CL-AC1 (1m)
• CL-C5 (5 m) • CL-AC2 (2m)
• CL-C10 (10m)
• CL-C30 (30m)

1 • Head extension cable (for S type / V type heads)

• CL-CV2 (2m)
• CL-CV5 (5m)
• CL-CV15 (15m)
• Relay unit • Encoder unit (CL- • EtherCAT unit
Installing the CL-3000 Series

(CL-H200) E100) (CL-EC100)

Only one head extension cable can be used for P type and
L type heads, and no more than two for S type and V type
heads.

• Display Panel • Display panel cable

(CL-D500) • OP-88281 (3m)
• OP-88282 (10m)

• USB cable MiniB (2 m) • Ethernet cable (3 m, cross) • RS-232C cable • RS-232C conversion adapter
• OP-51580 • OP-66843 (2.5 m, straight) (D-sub 9 pin, female)
• OP-96368 • OP-26401

01
64
-2
P
O
• Head fixture • Head fixture • Head fixture
(For 15 mm/30 mm/70 mm/150 mm heads) (For profile measuring heads) (For high precision head CL-S015)
• OP-88283 • OP-88289 • OP-88863

• Head fixture A • Head fixture B • Head fixture C

(For 8 mm diameter compact head) (For 8 mm diameter compact head) (For 8 mm diameter compact head)
• OP-88353 (Wrench included) • OP-88354 • OP-88355 (Screws and hex key included)

• Side view fixture • Side view fixture • Side view fixture • Pass through fixture
(For 8 mm diameter compact head) (For 30mm head) (CL-V020/CL-V050) (For CL-V020/CL-V050/CL-S015)
• OP-88860 • OP-88861 • OP-88862 • OP-88859

• Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement • Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement
• OP-88284 (For 15 mm head) • OP-88864
• OP-88285 (For 30mm head) (Exclusively for the high precision head CL-S015)
• OP-88286 (For 70mm head) (Light axis alignment tool, screen, hexagon wrench included)

1-4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Part Names and Functions

Part Names and Functions

Controller (CL-3000)
No Name Function

1
4 1 Input terminal block Input terminal (14-pin)
1
5 2 Output terminal block Output terminal (12-pin)
6 3 Power terminal block Used to connect power (24V DC) and the ground wire to the system.

Installing the CL-3000 Series

2 7 Indicates the operating state of the controller.
• Light on (Green) : Normal operation
• Light off : Power is off
8 4 PWR/ERR LED
• Light on (Orange) : Warning
• Light on (Red) : System error (Refer to “Error Messages”
3 9 (Page A-16) for details.)

10 The status of this unit when the field network is used.

EtherNet/IP PROFINET PLC-Link Status of this unit
Solid (Green) Solid (Green) Solid (Green) It is operating normally.
The connection is not
Off - -
established.
Blinking Blinking The connection has
Off
5 NETWORK LED (Red) (Red) timed out.
The IP address is
Solid (Red) Solid (Red) Solid (Red)
duplicated.
No IP addresses are
Off Off Off
assigned to this unit.
Blinking The flash LED has
- (Orange : for - been requested by the
3 seconds) IO controller.

6 USB Connector Connect the Mini-B type USB cable.

7 ETHERNET connector Connect the Ethernet cable.

8 RS-232C connector Connect the RS-232C communication cable.

Connect the communication cable of the display panel (CL-D500).

9 Display panel connector Do not mistakenly connect the Ethernet cable into
the display panel connector. This can damage the
system connected to the Ethernet cable.

10 MAC address Display the MAC address.

Optical unit
No Name Function

Indicates the operating state of the optical unit.

• Light on (Green) : Normal operation
1
• Light off : Power is off
1 STATUS LED
• Light on (Orange) : Warning
2 • Light on (Red) : System error (Refer to “Error Messages”
(Page A-16) for details.)
3
Connect the fiber connector (Blue) of the head cable.
2 Indicator connector
(For CL-P/CL-L heads only)

3 Measurement connector Connect the fiber connector from the head cable.

4 Pass the included cable tie through the hole and secure the head cable.
4 Cable tie mounting hole
This prevents a load from being applied to the root of the fiber cable.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-5

 Part Names and Functions

Head
No Name Function
1 Indicates the detection state of the head and operating state of the
optical unit.
• Off
Power is off
• Blinking (Green: 0.1 sec ON, 1.9-sec OFF cycle)

1
Immediately after startup/Measured distance is out of range/Invalid data
• Blinking (Green: 1 sec ON, 0.5-sec OFF cycle)
1 HEAD LED
The measurement distance is within 20% of either end of the
measurement range.
• Solid (Green)
Installing the CL-3000 Series

The measurement distance is within 60% of the center of the

measurement range.
• Solid (Red)
A system error has occurred in the optical unit.

There is no HEAD LED Indicator on the vacuum and high temperature heads, or the high
precision head.

Display panel (CL-D500)

1 2
No Name Function

Lights according to the judgment state.

3 • All off
Power is off/Awaiting judgment/System error
1 Judgment output LED • HI, GO or LO on
Lights according to the latest judgment result (HI/GO/LO)
• HI and LO on
When the latest measured value is invalid (+FFFFFF)

4 TIM (synchronous input)

2 Lights when the timing signal is input.
indicator

Displays the measured value, tolerance judgment value, etc.

• Green: within tolerance limits
• Red: out of tolerance limits
Display Contents
Displays the measurement result in
Numerical Value numerical values. The displayed units,
(-99.9999) decimal points and minimum units will
vary depending on the settings.
FFFFFF Displayed when the maximum display
(HI output ON) range is exceeded.
3 Measured value display
Displayed when the minimum display
+FFFFFF range is exceeded.
(LO output ON It is also displayed for invalid data (HI/LO
output ON).

+++++++
(HI, GO, LO Output Displayed for judgment standby state.
OFF)

Displayed when a warning is detected.

WARN□□
Press the ENT key to return to the normal
(□□ : Warning code)
measurement display screen.

PROGRAM Enters the program switching mode when pressed during measurement.
• Enters the tolerance setting mode when pressed during measurement.
Enters the operation setting mode when held for more than one second.
SET
• When pressed during setting changes, the setting contents will be
canceled and return to the last change.
• Enters the display OUT setting mode when pressed during measurement.
ENT
• Use this button to select changes in setting mode.
• Zeros the measurement when pressed during measurement.
Operation Clears auto zero when held for three seconds or longer.
4 ZERO
key • The values and selected items will be initialized when it is pressed
for three seconds or longer during settings.
• Switches the display to the next setting when in setting mode.
• Digit selection will move to the right when pressed. The digit will
rapidly change when held for one second or more.
• Changes the display between upper display only, lower display
only, or both simultaneously when pressed.
• Switches the display to the next setting when in setting mode.
Assigns the “+/-” or numerical value during numerical value input.
Changes rapidly when held for one second or more.

The panel lock setting can be accessed from [Environment setting] of CL-NavigatorN.
“Display panel settings” (Page 4-5)

1-6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Part Names and Functions

Encoder unit (CL-E100)

2 No Name Function

1 Input terminal block Used for pulse signal input from the encoder.
3
1 Indicates the operating state of the encoder unit.
• Light off : Power is off
2 PWR/ERR LED • Light on (Green) : Normal operation

1
• Light on (Red) : System error (Refer to “Error Messages”
(Page A-16) for details.)

Pulse detection LED

Lights (in green) when an encoder pulse input is detected for
3 (A-phase/B-phase/
A-phase/B-phase/Z-phase.

Installing the CL-3000 Series

Z-phase)

EtherCAT Unit (CL-EC100)

1 No Name Function

2 Indicates the operating state of the EtherCAT unit.

3 • OFF: Power is off
4 1 PWR/ERR LED • ON (Green): Normal operation
5 • ON (Red): System error (Refer to “Error Messages” (Page
A-16) for details.)

• ON (Green): Normal operation (Compliant with ETG2200)

2 STATUS indicator light
6 • ON (Red): Error (Compliant with ETG2200)

Link/activity indicator light

3 Normal: Green light on/green blinking light
(IN port)
Link/activity indicator light
4 Normal: Green light on/green blinking light
(OUT port)
RJ-45 connector
5 Used to connect the network cable that connects to the master.
(IN port)
RJ-45 connector
6 Used to connect the network cable that connects to the next slave.
(OUT port)

Expansion analog unit (CL-H150)

No Name Function

Analog output terminal

1 Analog voltage output, 4 channels (8-pin)
1 block

Connect the expansion cable of the relay unit for connecting

2 HEAD3/4 connector
2 HEAD3/4 when increasing the number of heads.

Connect the expansion cable of the relay unit for connecting

3 HEAD5/6 connector
HEAD5/6 when increasing the number of heads.
3

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-7

 Part Names and Functions

Expansion unit (CL-H100)

No Name Function

Connect the expansion cable of the relay unit for connecting

1 HEAD3/4 connector
HEAD3/4 when increasing the number of heads.

Connect the expansion cable of the relay unit for connecting

2 HEAD5/6 connector
1 HEAD5/6 when increasing the number of heads.

1 2
Installing the CL-3000 Series

Relay unit (CL-H200)

No Name Function

1 HEAD connector Connect the expansion cable.

1-8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Software Installation

Software Installation
This section describes the system requirements and installation procedure for installing CL-NavigatorN and the USB driver.

System Requirements Installing CL-NavigatorN

To use CL-NavigatorN, the following system requirements must be met: The PC application “CL- NavigatorN” can be downloaded from the

1
following WEB site.
Item Specification The latest versions of software and firmware can be also downloaded
from this site.
• Windows11 (Pro)
• Windows10 (Home/Pro/ Enterprise) (32 www.keyence.com/cl-3000_non-ecp_support

Installing the CL-3000 Series

Supported bit/64 bit)
operating systems • Windows 7 • Before starting the installation, terminate all other
(HomePremium/Professional/Ultimate) (32 applications running on the personal computer.
bit/64 bit) • Installation must be performed by a user with
Administrator privileges.
CPU Celeron DualCore 1.7GHz

Memory 4GB or more

1 From the support site, download the monitoring/setting
support software for [CL-3000 series], and double-click
Free
hard disk space
1GB or more “Setup.exe” in the downloaded folder.
• If the [User Account Control] screen appears, click
Screen resolution 1024 x 768 or more
[Yes].
.NET Framework • If the items required for the setup (Microsoft Visual
.NET Framework4.0 C ++ 2013 Redistribution Package (x86), .NET
version
Framework 4.0) are not installed, the respective
The PC must be equipped with one of the installation screens will appear. Click [Install] and
following: install the required items.
• USB2.0/1.1
(Connection via a USB hub is not covered by The installation start screen will appear.
Interface
the warranty)
• Ethernet 100BASE-TX
(LAN connection and connection via a router
are not covered by the warranty)

Preparation for the Installation

Please check the following before installing CL-NavigatorN.

„ Hard drive free space

CL-NavigatorN can only be installed on a hard drive. The destination
hard disk requires a free space of 1 GB or more. Make sure to allocate
sufficient free disk space before performing the installation.

„ Windows environment and installation destination

CL-NavigatorN runs on Windows and its installation is also performed
2 Follow the instructions on the screen.
on Windows. When you install CL-NavigatorN, the USB driver will also
Confirm that Windows 11/10 or Windows 7 is installed and running be installed automatically.
correctly on your PC.

„ Help file 3 When the [InstallShield Wizard completed] screen

appears, click [Finish].
The help file for CL-NavigatorN is the PDF file of the User’s Manual
(this document). To use the help file, Adobe Reader, the PDF viewing
software supplied by Adobe System, must be installed on your PC.
You can download it for free from the Adobe System website (www.
adobe.com).

The CL-NavigatorN shortcut will appear on the desktop.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-9

 Software Installation

Uninstalling CL-NavigatorN
The following section describes the procedure to uninstall CL-
NavigatorN from your PC.

• Before starting the uninstallation, terminate all other

applications running on the personal computer.
• Uninstallation must be performed by a user with
Administrator privileges.

1 1 Click [Programs and Features] in the Control Panel.

The “Uninstall or Change Programs” screen will appear.

2 Select CL-NavigatorN and click [Uninstall].

Installing the CL-3000 Series

The “Uninstallation confirmation” screen will appear.

3 Click [Yes].
The uninstallation starts.

4 Click [Finish].
The uninstallation is complete.

1-10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Mounting and Connecting

Mounting and Connecting

• Do not install the controller/optical unit in a location with a lot of dust or water vapor. The controller/optical unit does not have
a mechanism to protect it from dust or water. Dust or water entering the controller can cause damage to the controller.
• Turn off the controller when connecting or disconnecting a cable or terminal block. Connecting or disconnecting a cable or
terminal block while connected to a power source may damage the controller/optical unit or peripheral devices.

Mounting the Head 1

Measurement range

Installing the CL-3000 Series

Install each head by adjusting the distance between the head and the target.

• When the target is a highly reflective material like glass or mirror, it may be difficult to see the measurement reflection light. In
such a case, place a blank sheet of paper to check the measurement spot.
• For CL-V and CL-S heads, adjust the distance while observing the measured values.
• The CL-P and CL-L heads are equipped with an LED light. It can be used as a reference when adjusting the distance.
• Solid (Green) : The target is within 60% of the center of the measurement range.
• Blinking (Green: 1 sec ON, 0.5 sec OFF cycle) : The target is within 20% of either end of the measurement range.
• Blinking (Green: 0.1 sec ON, 1.9 sec OFF cycle) : The target is outside the measurement range or is not detected.

8 mm diameter
compact head 15 mm head 30mm head 70mm head 150mm head
(CL-P007/CL-L007) (CL-P015/CL-L015) (CL-P030/CL-L030) (CL-P070/CL-L070) (CL-P150/CL-L150)

A B
7 mm ± 1.5 mm

A
B A
15 mm
± 1.3mm 30mm B A
± 3.7mm 70 mm

B
A
± 10 mm
150 mm

B
± 35 mm

20 mm vacuum and high 50mm vacuum and high

temperature head temperature head High precision head Profile measuring head
(CL-V020) (CL-V050) (CL-S015) (CL-PT010)

A A
B 15 mm B
20 mm A
± 1.3 mm ± 1.0 mm
50 mm
B
± 4.0 mm

A: Reference distance A
B: Measurement range B
10 mm
± 0.3 mm

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-11

 Mounting and Connecting

15 mm/30 mm/70 mm/150 mm heads 8 mm diameter compact head

1 Mount the head on the head fixture (OP-88283, sold

separately).
„ Mounting the head using head fixture A
(OP-88353, sold separately)

1
Recommended tightening torque: 1.2 to 1.8 N·m
Using the diagram below, prepare a hole to hold the
head fixture A.
0.5 - 1.0 *
45°±1°
Fix to this location

1
A

Clamp
inserting Nut attaching
+0.1.005 side side
φ10
+0
Installing the CL-3000 Series

5.5 - 11.3 *
M4 x L15 screw φ0.025 A
*Processing accuracy should be ±0.05.

2 Mount the head fixture to the mounting location. Unit: mm

Mounting hole: 2 x M4
2 Insert a clamp into the hole prepared in Step 1
(chamfered side) and tighten lightly with a nut.

20 mm Clamp

Chamfering side

Nut

When mounting the head on another fixture, be sure to

fix and mount it in the location specified in the figure
Tightening the nut completely without inserting the
below (shown in gray). If mounted on a location other
head will cause the nut to deform.
than the specified, the head may be damaged.

3
15 mm head 30 mm head
Insert the head into the clamp and tighten the nut with
a wrench. while fixing the clamp in position using the
included wrench.

0
φ15 -0.05
Provided wrench
0
φ15 -0.05

Wrench
0 0
φ26 -0.05 φ29 -0.05
Tightening the nut while fixing the head into
position may lead to damaging the head.
The tightening torque should be 2 to 3 N·m
70 mm head 150 mm head (Recommended tightening torque is 3 N·m).

0
0
φ15 -0.05
φ15 -0.05

φ28.95

φ28.95

0 0
φ46 -0.05 φ47 -0.05

1-12 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Mounting and Connecting

„ Mounting the head using head fixture C „ Mounting on the side of a rack, etc.
(OP-88355, sold separately) When mounting on the side of a rack, etc., head fixture B (OP-88354,
sold separately) should be used.

1 Using the diagram below, prepare a mount for the head

fixture C. 1 Insert the clamp from the grooved side of the mounting
8.5 bracket, and tighten the nut lightly.
M4 Clamp
The head fixture C must be mounted

1
on a stainless steel metal plate
(SUS303 recommended) with
.20
0
+0 .005 a thickness of 5 mm or greater. Mounting
φ8 +
0
bracket

2 Loosen the screw on the side of head fixture C using

Installing the CL-3000 Series

Pay attention to the
the included hex key (2.0 mm). Nut
angle of the clamp.

Set screw M4 x L4 You cannot fix the head if the clamp is inserted from
the opposite side.
Tightening the nut completely without inserting the
head will cause the clamp to deform.

2 Insert the head into the clamp and tighten the nut
3 Mount head fixture C by aligning it with the hole
prepared in Step 1, and tighten the M4 screw using the
using a wrench.
Nut
included hex key.
Recommended tightening torque: 1.2 to 1.8 N·m

Wrench

Tightening the nut while fixing the head in position

may lead to damaging the head. The tightening
torque should be 2 to 3 N·m (Recommended
tightening torque is 3 N·m).

3 Mount the mounting bracket with M4 screws in the

4 Insert the head and secure it by tightening the set
screw loosened in Step 2 using the included hex key.
designated position.
Recommended tightening torque: 1.2 to 1.8 N·m
M4 screw

When mounting the head on another fixture, be sure to

fix and mount it in the location specified in the figure
below (shown in gray). If mounted on a location other
than the specified, the head may be damaged.
Also, regarding the size of the mounting hole, refer to the
The recommended tightening torque for the set dimensions of the head tip in the figure below.
screw is 0.6 to 0.8 N·m.
When tightening a screw using the hex key, be sure φ0.1 A

to insert the longer side of the hex key into the hex
screw and turn the wrench holding its shorter side.
Once you reach a point where you can no longer Head tip detail
turn the hex screw, do not attempt to tighten it
further by force. φ7.94±0.03

φ7.96±0.03 A

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-13

 Mounting and Connecting

High precision head (CL-S015) Vacuum and high temperature head (CL-V020/
CL-V050)
1 Mount the head to the head fixture (OP-88863, sold
separately).
Recommended tightening torque: 1.2 to 1.8 N·m 1 Mount the head to the mounting location.
Mounting hole: 4 x M2
Recommended tightening torque: 0.2 N·m
Fix to this location

1 12mm
Installing the CL-3000 Series

6mm

M4 screw (accessory)

2 Mount the head fixture to the mounting location.

Mounting hole: 2 x M4
Recommended tightening torque: 1.2 to 1.8 N·m

• This head cannot be mounted using holes (4 x

M2) other than the mounting holes. Other holes
on the head body are not used for mounting
because they are for degassing.
20 mm • When installing in a vacuum environment, use the
supplied vacuum screws.

Side view fixture (For 8 mm diameter compact

head) (OP‑88860)

When mounting the head on another fixture, be sure to

1 Insert the 8 mm diameter compact head until it hits the
Side view fixture (OP‑88860).
fix and mount it in the location specified in the figure
below (shown in gray). If mounted on a location other
than the specified area, the head may be damaged.

If the head is inserted too shallow, it may not be

possible to get a sufficient measurement range.

φ21±0.05 2 By tightening the screw of the side view fixture, the

head and fixture are secured.
Recommended tightening torque: 0.2 N·m
Recommended tools: Hexagon wrench (two-sided width dimensions
1.5mm)

Do not tighten the screw without the head inserted.

It may cause deformation.

3 Mount the head with the side view fixture to the

mounting location with the screw holes on both sides
or on the top.
Mounting hole: 6 x M2
Recommended tightening torque: 0.2 N·m
Screw holes on the top

Screw holes
on both sides

1-14 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Mounting and Connecting

Side view fixture (For 30mm head) (OP‑88861) Side view fixture
(For vacuum and high temperature heads
1 Loosen the screw on the side view fixture (For 30mm
head) and remove the holding part.
CL-V020/ CL-V050) (OP‑88862)
Mirror part • For CL-V020, directly mount the side view fixture (mirror
part).
Holding part • For CL-V050, mounting the spacer(s) (1 or 2) enables the
reference distance to be adjusted.

Screw (x4) 1 Mount the spacer(s) (1 or 2) to the vacuum and high

temperature head. 1
2 Insert a 30mm head to the mirror part of the side view Align the notches (4 parts) and insert the spacer(s).

Installing the CL-3000 Series

fixture (OP-88861) so that the head inserts all the way.
Secure the mirror part with the attached M1.6 screw (2 parts).
Recommended tightening torque: 0.09 N·m
Recommended tools: Hexagon wrench (two-sided width dimensions
1.5mm)

Notches

3 Attach the holding part from the head cable side.

M1.6 screw

2 Mount the side view fixture (mirror part).

The side view fixture (mirror part) can be mounted in
any direction (increments of 90 degrees). Align the
notches (4 parts) and insert the spacer.

4 Tighten the four screws in sequence so that they are

evenly tightened.
Secure the mirror part with the attached M1.6 screw (2 parts).
Recommended tightening torque: 0.09 N·m
Recommended tightening torque: 0.2 N·m Recommended tools: Hexagon wrench (two-sided width dimensions
Recommended tools: Hexagon wrench (two-sided width dimensions 1.5mm)
1.5mm)
Notches

M1.6 screw

5 Mount the head with the side view fixture to the

mounting location with the screw holes on both sides
or on the top.
Mounting hole: 12 x M3
Recommended tightening torque: 0.65 N·m
Screw holes
on the top

Screw holes
on both sides

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-15

 Mounting and Connecting

Profile measuring head Mounting the Optical Unit

1 Mount the head on the head fixture (OP-88289, sold
separately).
Mount the optical unit after cutting power supply to the
controller. Device damage or electric shock may occur if
Recommended tightening torque: 2.7 to 3.3 N·m mounted while the power is on.

1 Connect the connector on the right side of the

controller, aligning it with the connector of the optical

1 unit.
Installing the CL-3000 Series

Place the head on

2 Fix the optical unit by tightening the fixing screws (4
locations).
the tab.

M5 x L28 screw

When mounting in the direction shown in the figure,

keep the tab intact to prevent the head from falling
from its own weight.

2 Mount the head fixture on the mounting location.

Mounting hole: 2 x M4
Recommended tightening torque: 1.2 to 1.8 N·m

You can link up to two optical units on the side of the

controller. When connecting a second unit, remove
the seal on the right side of the optical unit before
connection.

70 mm

When mounting the head on another fixture, be sure to

fix and mount it in the location specified in the figure
below (shown in gray). If mounted on a location other
than the specified, the head may be damaged.

0
φ61 -0.05

1-16 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Mounting and Connecting

Mounting the Controller/Optical Unit Fixing the Controller/Optical Unit

The controller/optical unit is designed to be mounted on a DIN rail. Pull
the tab on the bottom in the direction of the arrow to mount or dismount
the controller.
Installation cautions
• The controller should be installed in the direction of the circle symbol
as shown below. Do not install it in any other direction.

Installing the CL-3000 Series

Tab

Mount the controller in a stable location that is free

from vibration.

Mounting the Display Panel

Insert the display panel from the front, and secure it with the display
panel attachment ring from the rear.
When removing the display panel, push the two cutouts of the
attachment ring outward with a flat-head screwdriver and then push out
the display panel to the front.

• Allow a space of 30 mm or more on both sides, 50 mm or more on Display

top, and 30 mm or more on bottom when mounted by DIN rail or panel
similar fixture. Display panel
attachment ring

50 mm
Control
panel wall
Cutouts
(2 locations)

30 mm 30 mm

30 mm

Do not block the ventilation holes located on the

top and bottom panels of the controller/optical unit.
Doing so may cause heat to build up inside the unit,
which may result in malfunction.
When the temperature in the control panel exceeds
the ambient temperature, lower the temperature
near the bottom part of the controller to the ambient
temperature or less by forced-air cooling or allow
more space for better ventilation.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-17

 Mounting and Connecting

Connecting
• Be sure to turn off the controller before connecting/disconnecting cables other than the head (extension) cable. Failure to do
so may result in product damage.
• Plug in the head connector making sure its orientation is correct. Inserting the connector in the wrong orientation may break
the connector pins and result in a malfunction.

Optical unit
CL-P***N / CL-L***N /

1
CL-S***N / CL-V***N
Installing the CL-3000 Series

Controller
CL-3000

Display panel
CL-D500

Head
CL-P*** /CL-L*** /
Display panel cable CL-S*** /CL-V***
OP-88281 (3 m)
24V DC power supply OP-88282 (10 m)
(Sold separately)

Connecting the Head Connecting the Head Extension Cable

Connect the fiber connectors on the head to the connectors on the If you wish to extend the fiber cable, connect the head extension cable
optical unit. between the head and the optical unit.

Check “Handling of head (extension) cables” • Only one head extension cable can be used for P
(Page 1) described in “Precautions for use”. type and L type heads, and no more than two for
S type and V type heads.
Secure the fiber cable to the optical unit using the included cable tie to • Specific head extension cable is prepared for P
prevent a load from being applied to the root of the fiber cable. type / L type head (CL-C5/CL-C10/CL-C30) and V
type / S type (CL-CV2/CL-CV5/CL-CV15).
• Check “Handling of head (extension) cables”
(Page 1) described in “Precautions for use”.

Connecting the Display Panel

Connect the display panel cable between the display panel connector of
the controller and the display panel.
This product can also be operated without the display
panel.
Moreover, you can use the CL-NavigatorN software to
operate the CL-3000 Series or view the measured value
on a PC.
Cable tie

Connecting to the pass through fixture

When using the vacuum and temperature head (CL-V020/CL-V050) or
high precision head (CL-S015) in a vacuum environment, connect the
sensor head cable and the extension cable to the pass through fixture
(OP-88859).
After inserting the fiber connector into the pass through fixture, rotate
Fiber cable the screw and secure it.
Atmosphere side
Vacuum side

Head extension
cable
Sensor head cable

Pass through fixture

Use a copper gasket for CF16 (ICF34) when

attaching the pass through fixture for vacuum with
sealing.

1-18 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Mounting and Connecting

Connecting the Power How to use the terminal block

This section explains how to use the terminal block.
• Use electrical wiring AWG14 to AWG22.
• Use the wiring with the temperature rating of 105°C or • Use a flat head screwdriver to connect the power supply to
more. the input terminals.
• Make sure to connect the frame ground terminal for • Use a wire with AWG between 20 and 28 and temperature
the 24 VDC power source to a type D ground. rating of 105°C or higher (Tip processing length: Approx.
• The solderless terminal sizes are noted in the figure 8 mm) for the input and output terminal blocks of the
below. Terminals that fit M3 screws should be used. controller.

1
• Use a wire with AWG between 16 and 28 and temperature
rating of 105°C or higher (Tip processing length: Approx. 9
mm) for the input terminal block of the encoder unit.
5.8 mm or less 5.8 mm or less • Do not solder (pre-solder) the processed end of the wire.
• Tighten the screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.75 N·m. • The wire should be inserted all the way into the terminal

Installing the CL-3000 Series

block.

1
• Attach the wire to the terminal block directly, without
Connect 24V DC and 0 V to the power terminals. using a solderless terminal.

1 Remove the connector terminal block from the

controller.

2 Use a screwdriver to push in part “a” of the terminal

block and insert a lead wire into part “b” as indicated.
Connecting to 0 V DC Connecting to 24 V DC
Flathead screwdriver
2 Connect the ground wire to the grounding terminal.

Connect ground wire here

• Ground each device separately.

3
• Use a Class D ground.
• Keep ground resistance to 100Ω or less. Remove the screwdriver once the wire is fully inserted.
• Keep the ground wire as short as possible. Pull each lead wire gently to confirm that it is properly
• If it is not possible to ground each device secured.
separately, ground them together. However,
make sure that the electrical cables are the same
length. 4 After connecting all the necessary wires, securely
insert the connector terminal block into the I/O
Other
Main unit device connector as far as it will go.

Ground per Class D

Ground resistance 100Ω

Main unit Other

device

A B

A=B
Ground per Class D
Ground resistance 100Ω

Other
Main unit
device

B
A

A>B
A<B

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-19

 Mounting and Connecting

Connecting Additional Heads

When connecting three or more heads to a controller, connect them as shown in the figure below.

• Be sure to turn off the controller before connecting/disconnecting the cables other than the head (extension) cable. Failure to
do so may result in product damage.
• Plug in the connector making sure its orientation is correct. Inserting the connector in the wrong orientation may break the
connector pins and result in a malfunction.

1
You can connect up to a total of six heads/optical units to a controller.
In such a case, an expansion unit, two relay units, and two expansion cables will be required.

(A) : Controller (CL-3000) (B)

(B) : Optical unit (CL-P***N / CL-L***N /
CL-S***N / CL-V***N)
Installing the CL-3000 Series

(C) : Expansion unit (CL-H100/CL-H150)

(B)
(D) : Relay unit (CL-H200)
(E) : Encoder unit (CL-E100) /
EtherCAT Unit (CL-EC100)
(B)

(B)

(C)
(A)
(E)
Head
CL-P*** /
CL-L*** /
CL-S*** /
Expansion cable CL-V***
CL-AC1 (1m)
CL-AC2 (2m)

Display panel
CL-D500

24V DC power supply Display panel cable

OP-88281 (3m) (B)
(Sold separately)
OP-88282 (10m)

(B)

CL-NavigatorN

1-20 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Mounting and Connecting

Mounting the Expansion Unit Mounting the Relay Unit on the Optical Unit

1 Connect the connector on the right side of the

controller, aligning it with the connector of the
1 Connect the connector on the right side of the relay
unit, aligning it with the connector of the optical unit.
expansion unit.

Installing the CL-3000 Series

If an expansion unit has been mounted, the optical
unit to be connected to the controller is connected by
removing the seal on the right side of the expansion 2 Fix the optical unit by tightening the fixing screws (4
locations).
unit.

2 Fix the expansion unit by tightening the fixing screws (4

locations).

Connecting the Expansion Cable

1 Connect the expansion unit to the relay unit using the

expansion cable.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 1-21

 Mounting and Connecting

MEMO

1
Installing the CL-3000 Series

1-22 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 2
Basic Operations 2

Basic operations
Programming Flow................................................... 2-2
Start-up and Shut-down........................................... 2-3
Start-up................................................................................. 2-3
Shutting down....................................................................... 2-4

Names and Functions of the Main Screen............. 2-5

Menu bar.............................................................................. 2-6
Measured value display area............................................... 2-6
Waveform display change buttons....................................... 2-7
Graph display area............................................................... 2-7
Measurement processing input buttons............................... 2-7
[Save] button........................................................................ 2-7
[Set Prog.] button................................................................. 2-8
Data display area................................................................. 2-8
Program functions................................................................ 2-9
Auto zero function................................................................ 2-9

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 2-1

 Programming Flow

Programming Flow
Preparing for measurement

• The previous section describes the procedure to install CL-NavigatorN onto your PC.
“Software Installation” (Page 1-9)
• Connect the controller, optical unit, and the head. Increase the number of heads and optical
units as necessary.
“Mounting and Connecting” (Page 1-11)

2 Setting the measurement conditions

Follow the [Measurement settings] of CL-NavigatorN to set the system settings, measurement
method, and judgment output logic as necessary.
Basic operations

“STEP 1: System settings” (Page 3-4)

▼
“STEP 2: Measurement method” (Page 3-5)
▼
“STEP 3: Judgment output” (Page 3-20)

Displaying the measurement result

Display the measurement result on CL-NavigatorN or the display panel based on the
measurement settings.
“Names and Functions of the Main Screen” (Page 2-5)
“Measurement Value Monitor” (Page 4-8)
“Basic Operation of the Display Panel” (Page 5-2)
“Data Storage” (Page 4-14)

2-2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Start-up and Shut-down

Start-up and Shut-down

Start-up Starting up CL-NavigatorN

You can only run a single instance of CL-NavigatorN.
This section explains how to switch ON the power and start up the
If you try to start more than one CL-NavigatorN, the
controller and CL-NavigatorN.
message [CL-NavigatorN is already running] will appear.

Starting up the controller „ Connecting to CL-NavigatorN

1 Check that all devices are connected correctly. 1 Connect the PC on which CL-NavigatorN is installed to

2 Switch the power of the controller ON.

When the controller starts up normally, the PWR/ERR LED of the
controller and the STATUS LED of the optical unit will light in green.
the controller using a MiniB USB cable.
Refer to
Ethernet.
“Connect with Ethernet” (Page 4-12) when connecting via 2
2 From the Windows Start menu, select [All Programs] -

Basic operations
PWR/ERR LED STATUS LED [KEYENCE CL-NavigatorN] - [CL-NavigatorN].
Or double-click the “CL-NavigatorN” icon on the
desktop.

CL-NavigatorN will start up, read the controller settings automatically

and start the measurement process.

• When you start up CL-NavigatorN for the first time,

[Connect via USB] is selected automatically in the
PC communication setting.
• If the connection to the controller fails, click [PC
Connection Settings] and check if USB connection
is selected. Also check whether the USB driver is
installed correctly in the [Device Manager] screen.

„ Starting up in offline mode

1 Check that the PC on which CL-NavigatorN is installed
and the controller are not connected.

2 From the Windows Start menu, select [All Programs] -

[KEYENCE CL-NavigatorN] - [CL-NavigatorN].
Or double-click the “CL-NavigatorN” icon on the
desktop.

CL-NavigatorN will start up, and a message will be displayed.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 2-3

 Start-up and Shut-down

3 Click [Program offline].

Shutting down

Shutting down CL-NavigatorN

The [Select settings] screen will appear. 1 If a measurement is in progress, click [Stop] to stop
the operation of CL-NavigatorN.
4 Select the settings to display at startup.
z To read from file
Select [Read from file] and click [OK].

2
2 From the [File] menu, select [Exit].
Basic operations

In the [Open] window, select a CL-NavigatorN settings file (*.cldt), and

then click the [Open] button.

The window will close and CL-NavigatorN will shut down.

Shutting down the controller

The controller will shut down automatically when the power supply
connected to the controller is switched OFF.

Clicking on [Cancel] will perform the same operations as

when starting up using the default settings.

z To start up with the default settings

Select [Start up with the default settings] and click [OK].

If [Start up with the default settings] is selected, the

settings on the PC will be initialized. The controller
settings will not be initialized.

5 Check that CL-NavigatorN starts up in offline mode.

This button will display [Connect] when in offline mode.

2-4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Names and Functions of the Main Screen

Names and Functions of the Main Screen

The current measurement value and the trend graph will appear when connected to the controller.
• The trend graph display retains the display settings from the last time you shut down CL-NavigatorN.
• Only OUT1 is specified by default.
• Refer to “STEP 2: Measurement method” (Page 3-5) for details on OUT No.
• Refer to “Head configuration” (Page 3-4) for details on Head No.

(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

(1)

2
(2)

(12)
(3)

Basic operations
(4)

(13)
(5)

No. Name Function Ref.

(1) Menu bar Select a menu from the menu bar to configure settings. 2-6

Switch between measurement value acquisition start/stop for the trend graph.
(2) [START]/[STOP] button (When the communication is not established, this will be the [Connect] button for starting -
the communication.)

(3) Measured value display area The current measurement value and the judgment result are displayed. 2-6

(4) Waveform display change buttons These buttons changes how waveforms are displayed. 2-7

(5) Graph display area The changes in the measurement value over time are displayed in a trend graph. 2-7

Measurement processing input

(6) The measurement values are processed with “zero”, “timing”, and “reset”. 2-7
buttons

Set the content of the currently used program (system settings, measurement method, and
(7) [Measurement settings] button 3-3
judgment output logic).

(8) [Environment] button Open the [Environment settings] screen. 4-2

(9) [Save] button This button saves the data displayed in the trend graph to a file in CSV format. 2-7

The currently used program is displayed.

(10) Program display area 2-9
You can change the program to be used from the pull-down menu.

(11) [Set Prog.] button Display the [Program settings] screen to initialize the program or change the program name. 2-8

The OUT No. for the trend graph is displayed.

(12) OUT No. display -
You can change the OUT No. using .

• [Basic settings] tab, [Tolerance/offset] tab

Displays the primary setting conditions. Setting changes will take effect immediately.
(13) Data display area 2-8
• [Stats] tab
Displays the statistical information of cursor A/B.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 2-5

 Names and Functions of the Main Screen

Menu bar Measured value display area

Select a menu from the menu bar to configure settings. The current measurement value and the judgment result are displayed.
If the measurement value is within the tolerance range, the measurement
value is displayed in “Green” and [Go] will be lit as the judgment result.
[File] menu
Measurement value
Item Contents

Save settings to file “Save Settings to File” (Page 4-6)

Open settings file “Read Settings File” (Page 4-6)

“Displaying the Setting Contents”

Settings list
(Page 4-7)

2
Hold Judgment
processing result
“Shutting down CL-NavigatorN” (Page
Exit
2-4) z When the measurement value is outside the tolerance limits
The measurement value is displayed in red, and [HI] or [LO] will light up
as the judgment result.
Basic operations

[Monitor/display] menu
Item Contents

Measurement value
“Measurement Value Monitor” (Page 4-8)
monitor

I/O Monitor “I/O Monitor” (Page 4-9) z When the measurement fails
The measurement value display will be “+FFFFFF”, and [HI] and [LO]
Communication log will light up as the judgment result.
“Communication Log Monitor” (Page 4-10)
monitor

Communication monitor “Communication monitor” (Page 4-11)

• Add the trend graph display by splitting

the graph display area into two parts,
one above the other.
Add trend display
• You can specify the OUT No. to be z When the measurement is in standby/waiting data
displayed in the top and bottom areas. The measurement value display becomes “++++++”, and all judgment
• The display setting used at the results turn off.
previous shut down will be used for the
next startup.

[Connection] menu
Item Contents

PC Connection Setting “Communication” (Page 4-2)

Connect/Disconnect Connect to/Disconnect from the controller.

Send settings to Send the settings created on CL-NavigatorN

controller to the controller.

Receive settings from Read the controller settings

controller into CL-NavigatorN.

The settings are returned to factory

Return to factory default default settings.
settings (The environment settings are also
initialized.)

[Tool] menu
Item Contents

Data storage “Data Storage” (Page 4-14)

Head alignment guide “Head Alignment Guide” (Page 4-16)

Calibration of light
“Calibration of Light Intensity” (Page 4-16)
intensity

[Help] menu
Item Contents

The CL-NavigatorN help information (This

Display HELP
document) is displayed.

The version information of CL-NavigatorN

Version
is displayed.

2-6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Names and Functions of the Main Screen

Waveform display change buttons Measurement processing input buttons

Item Contents Item Contents

Vertical zoom in Switch the zero function ON/OFF.

Enlarge/reduce the vertical scale of “Auto zero function” (Page 2-9)
the trend graph.
Vertical zoom out Switch the timing input ON/OFF.
“Hold processing” (Page 3-17)
Horizontal zoom
in A reset will be input.
Enlarge/reduce the horizontal scale of “Hold processing” (Page 3-17)
Horizontal zoom the trend graph.

2
out The measurement processing input button is only enabled
for the OUT displayed in the trend graph.
Automatically adjust the vertical scale
Autoscale of the trend graph according to the
measurement value.
[Save] button

Basic operations
Move up the
graph Move the trend graph in the vertical This button saves the data displayed in the trend graph to a file in CSV
direction. format.
Move down the Clicking on the [Save] button will open the [Save in file] screen.
graph

Undo Reset the trend graph display.

Hide cursor

Select cursor A
Switch between cursor display and
selection on the trend graph.
Select cursor B • You can select [Save inter-cursor data] if a cursor is
set in the trend graph. Specify the range of data to
be saved, and then save the CSV file to your desired
Select cursor AB
location.
• When the tilt correction is ON, the data after the tilt
Correct the trend chart tilt so that the correction will be saved.
Tilt correction ON values on cursor A and B become the • Only the OUT No. Data displayed in the trend graph will
same. be saved. If you also wish to save the other OUT No.
data, switch to the desired OUT No. and click the [Save]
Tilt correction
Clear the tilt correction. button again.
OFF
The following is an example of the saved CSV file:
The tilt correction button can be used when the
measurement value output stops and cursor A and B are set. Number of saved
OUTs
Saved data points
Graph display area
Measurement start
The changes in the measurement value over time are displayed in a trigger count
trend graph.
You can change how trend graphs are displayed from the right-click
context menu.

Saved
measurement data

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 2-7

 Names and Functions of the Main Screen

[Set Prog.] button z [Stats] tab

The [Stats] of the currently used program are displayed.
If you click [Copy to clipboard], the stats data are copied to the clipboard
Clicking on the [Set Prog.] button will open the [Program settings] in text format.
screen. The copied stats data can be pasted into Excel files, etc. ([Ctrl] + [V]).
Refer to “Program functions” (Page 2-9).

2
Basic operations

z Initialize all
Initialize all programs.

z Initialize
Initialize the currently selected program.

z Edit program name

Change the name of the currently selected program.

z Copy
Copy the setting content of the currently selected program.

z Paste
Paste the copied program setting content to the currently selected
program. The following shows an example of stats data pasted into an Excel
spreadsheet.
[Environment settings] and [Display settings] are exempt from
the initialize/copy/paste functions.

Data display area

z [Basic settings] tab

The [OUT settings] and [Filter] of the currently used program are
displayed.
• Changes made to the filter settings will take effect immediately.
• You can also check the waveform data.

z [Tolerance/offset] tab
The [Tolerance] and [Offset] information of the currently used program
are displayed.
Setting changes will take effect immediately.

2-8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Names and Functions of the Main Screen

Program functions Auto zero function

This controller can switch between eight programs (Program No. 00 to This function instantaneously sets the measurement value to 0.
07). • Measurements relative to a zero point can be taken.
You can register various settings for different measurement targets as • Combining the auto zero with the offset can be used to calibrate off of
programs. You can easily change the settings by calling programs as a master target.
necessary. Measurement value Auto zero execution
Program 07

...

Program 01 Zero value

0
Program 00

Measurement settings

System settings
Time

• Auto zero cannot be executed in the following cases

2
(Clearing of auto zero is possible):
• Judgment standby status (------ is displayed)

Basic operations
Measurement method • Display range exceeded (±FFFFFF is displayed)
• Invalid data (-FFFFFF is displayed)
• Auto zero values are saved per program No. and per
Judgment output settings OUT No.
• Auto zero values are retained even if the power is
switched OFF.
• When using a hold mode is other than [Normal], the
Auto zero value controller will be in judgment standby status (“------” will
be displayed) after executing or clearing auto zero.
• When the operation mode of the encoder unit is set to
[TRIGGER], the controller will be in judgment standby
The environment settings are common for all programs. status (“------” will be displayed) after executing or
Environment settings cannot be switched between clearing auto zero, until the next encoder pulse is input.
programs. • Auto zero is executed on the measurement value after
hold mode processing (Page 3-17).
Programs can be switched using the following methods: • Master calibration
• Display panel :  “Switching Program” (Page 5-4) You can assign a known value to the dimension of the
• CL-NavigatorN :  “Names and Functions of the Main Screen” master target by setting the value of the master target as
(Page 2-5) the offset and executing auto zero while measuring the
• Input terminal :  “Functions of the I/O Terminals” (Page 6-2)
master target.
• Communication command :
 “Switch program No.” (Page 7-10)
• EtherNet/IP, PROFINET : z Example
 “Parameter details (PLC → This controller)” To calibrate the master to 10.000, set the offset to 10.000 and then
(Page 7-34) execute an auto zero.
Measurement value Auto zero execution

10.000
(Reference
value)
Time

z Auto zero execution/clear

Auto zero can be executed/cleared using the following methods:
• Button operation on the display panel
• ZERO button (Press once)
Auto zero is executed for the OUT displayed in the display panel.
• ZERO button (Press and hold for more than three seconds)
Auto zero is cleared for the OUT currently displayed in the display
panel.
• Zero input from the I/O terminal
• Zero 1/Zero 2 input is ON
Auto zero is executed for the OUT(s) assigned to Zero 1/Zero 2.
• Zero 1/Zero 2 input is ON for two seconds or more
Auto zero is cleared for the OUT(s) assigned to Zero 1/Zero 2.
• Zero input from a communication command or EtherNet/IP, PLC-
Link, or PROFINET
• Auto zero request is executed after setting the auto zero ON/
OFF specification to “ON”
Auto zero is executed for the specified OUT.
• Auto zero request is executed after setting the auto zero ON/
OFF specification to “OFF”
Auto zero is cleared for the specified OUT.
• Button operation on CL-NavigatorN
• Zero 1/Zero 2 button in the “Measurement value monitor”
screen is clicked
Auto zero execution/clear is switched for the OUT(s) assigned to
Zero 1/Zero 2.
• [Zero] button in each OUT display area is clicked
Auto zero execution/clear is switched for the displayed OUT.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 2-9

 Names and Functions of the Main Screen

MEMO

2
Basic operations

2-10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 3
Measurement Settings

Measurement Data Processing Flow...................... 3-2

3

Measurement settings
Measurement Settings Flow.................................... 3-3
STEP 1: System settings......................................... 3-4
Head configuration............................................................... 3-4
Sampling setting................................................................... 3-4

STEP 2: Measurement method................................ 3-5

Displacement........................................................................ 3-5
Displacement (transparent object)....................................... 3-6
Thickness (transparent object)............................................. 3-8
Thickness (2 heads)........................................................... 3-10
Height difference (2 heads)................................................ 3-12
Calculation.......................................................................... 3-13
Common settings............................................................... 3-14

STEP 3: Judgment output...................................... 3-20

Judgment output................................................................. 3-20
Terminal allocation.............................................................. 3-20
Analog OUT allocation....................................................... 3-20

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-1

 Measurement Data Processing Flow

Measurement Data Processing Flow

A maximum 6 heads are available for synchronized measurement. A maximum of 8 measurements can be taken simultaneously.
Each head can measure by itself, or calculations between heads are possible.

Processing by head

Head 01 Head 02 Head 06

Sampling Sampling Sampling

Refractive index correction *1 Refractive index correction *1 Refractive index correction *1

3 Median filter Median filter Median filter

Head measurement value *2 Head measurement value *2 Head measurement value *2

Measurement settings

...
(by target peak) (by target peak) (by target peak)

Processing by OUT

OUT01 OUT02 OUT06

Selection and calculation of the Selection and calculation of the Selection and calculation of the
Calculation between OUTs *3
head measurement value head measurement value head measurement value

Invalid data processing Invalid data processing Invalid data processing Invalid data processing

Filter Filter Filter Filter

Scaling Scaling Scaling Scaling

Internal measurement value Internal measurement value ... Internal measurement value Internal measurement value

Hold mode Hold mode Hold mode Hold mode

Zero function Zero function Zero function Zero function

Offset Offset Offset Offset

Tolerance judgment Tolerance judgment Tolerance judgment Tolerance judgment

OUT01, measurement value OUT02, measurement value OUT06, measurement value OUT08, measurement value

*1 The refractive index correction is enabled for the head used by OUT where the displacement (transparent object) or thickness (transparent object) is
selected.
*2 If the measurement method is not displacement (transparent object) or thickness (transparent object), the measurement target peak is only one.
*3 The output value of OUT (OUT 01 to OUT08) can be used in calculations up to three times.

3-2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Measurement Settings Flow

Measurement Settings Flow

By clicking the [Measurement settings] button on the main screen, the setting screen by STEP appears.

1 Click [Measurement settings] on the main screen. 6 Perform [STEP 3: Judgment output].

2 Perform [STEP 1: System settings].

Measurement settings
“STEP 3: Judgment output” (Page 3-20)

7 When the settings are completed, click [Complete].

“STEP 1: System settings” (Page 3-4)

3 When the settings are completed, click [Next].

4 Perform [STEP 2: Measurement method].

The measurement is made in accordance with the setting contents.

“STEP 2: Measurement method” (Page 3-5)

5 When the settings are completed, click [Next].

When clicking [Exit] during settings, the confirmation screen

appears. To send settings to the controller, click the [Yes] button.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-3

 STEP 1: System settings

STEP 1: System settings

Head configuration Sampling setting

Check if the settings match with the head configuration connected to The sampling cycle includes the time to acquire the received light
the controller. waveform and measure the distance to the measurement target.

3 z Sampling cycle
Select the sampling cycle (100µs/200µs/500µs/1000µs).
If the operation mode of the encoder unit is set to
[TRIGGER], the sampling is performed by synchronizing
Measurement settings

the encoder pulse.

z Mutual interference prevention

• The head number allocation is determined as follows: The mutual interference prevention function assigns the sensor heads
to two groups A and B, to allow these groups to emit light alternately.
• Optical unit connected on the side of the controller:
This prevents interference with the sensor heads in the other group.
Head 01 (unit closest to controller), Head 02
• OFF : Sample by emitting simultaneously.
• Optical unit connected on the side of the relay unit 1:
• ON : Move the emission timing for sampling in the order of group A,
Head 03 (unit closest to relay unit), Head 04
then group B.
• Optical unit connected on the side of the relay unit 2:
Head 05 (unit closest to relay unit), Head 06
• If editing in the offline mode, you can change the
configuration of the head.
If adding a connected head, check the checkbox of
the head.

The sampling cycle is doubled when turning ON the mutual

interference prevention.

z Ambient light filter

When ON, two samples are taken, one with emission on and one with
emission off. The function then removes ambient light from the first
sample (emission on) using the second (emission off) to determine the
measurement value. This function should be used when the ambient
light is strong and the measurement value is unstable.
• If the ambient light filter is turned ON, the sampling
speed doubles. The maximum emission time is half the
sampling cycle.
• Ambient light filter turns OFF if sampling cycle is 100 μs,
regardless of the settings.
Example in the case of turning ON
[Head 1], [Head 3], and [Head 5]

3-4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 STEP 2: Measurement method

STEP 2: Measurement method

Up to 8 measurement methods can be used. (OUT 01 to 08)
There are six types of measurement methods.
“Displacement” (Page 3-5) “Thickness (2 heads)” (Page 3-10)
“Displacement (transparent object)” (Page 3-6) “Height difference (2 heads)” (Page 3-12)
“Thickness (transparent object)” (Page 3-8) “Calculation” (Page 3-13)

Displacement 4 Check that the “white line” is displayed on the peak of

the waveform.
If the target is detected, the “white line” is displayed on the peak of the
This is selected if measuring an object’s position (other than a
waveform.
transparent object). For example, height, stroke, positioning, vibration,
warping, and profile.

1 Click [Edit] or [Add OUT].

Measurement settings
2 Select [Displacement] and click [OK].
Refer to “Head settings” (Page 3-14) for more details.

If the “white line” is not displayed, the followings are

potential causes:

Cause Fix

The object is out of Check the position of

measurement range. the object.

The reflection light intensity Make the sampling

from the object is too low. cycle longer.

Refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-13) for

additional causes.

5 Click [OK] and close the [Head Settings] screen.

6 If needed, click [Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance].

3 Click [Head Settings].

Refer to “Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance” (Page 3-16) for more details.

7 If needed, click [Option].

Refer to “Option settings” (Page 3-16) for more details.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-5

 STEP 2: Measurement method

Displacement (transparent object) 5 Check that the “white lines” are displayed on the two
peaks of the waveform.
If the target is detected, the “white line” is displayed on the peak of each
This is selected if measuring a transparent object’s height, for example,
waveform. These are “reflection from the top surface” and “reflection
stroke, positioning, vibration, warping, and profile.
from back surface”.

1 Click [Edit] or [Add OUT].

2 Select [Displacement (transparent object)] and click [OK].

3 Refer to “Head settings” (Page 3-14) for more details.

If the “white line” is not displayed, the followings are

potential causes:
Measurement settings

Cause Fix

The object is out of Check the position of

measurement range. the object.

The reflection light intensity Make the sampling

from the object is too low. cycle longer.

Refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-13) for

additional causes.

6 Click [OK] and close the [Head Settings] screen.

3 Set the surface to be measured. 7 Click [Settings] of the [Refractive index correction].
These settings are used to compensate for the shift amount of the
• If measuring the displacement of the top surface of the transparent measurement height due to the influence of the refractive index of the
object, select the [+1P] for the measurement object peak as follows: transparent object. This setting can be used when the target peak is
• If measuring the displacement of the back surface of the transparent anything but [+1P].
object, select the [+2P] for the measurement object peak.
The refractive index or material of the transparent
object needs to be known. Refer to “How to find Nc,
Nd, and Nf values” (Page 3-9) for how to calculate
the refractive index when it is unknown.

4 Click [Head Settings].

3-6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 STEP 2: Measurement method

8 Turn ON [Refractive index correction], and select the

transparent material.
10 If needed, click [Option].

Refer to “Option settings” (Page 3-16) for more details.

Example) If measuring the displacement of the back surface of Acrylic,
select “Acrylic” for the first layer of the material.
If the appropriate material is not found, the material can be added.
Click [Edit master] and add the new material.

Measurement settings
9 If needed, click [Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance].

Refer to “Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance” (Page 3-16) for more details.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-7

 STEP 2: Measurement method

Thickness (transparent object) 5 Check that the “white lines” are displayed on the two
peaks of the waveform.
If the target is detected, the “white lines” are displayed on the peak of
This is selected if measuring a transparent object thickness, or the gap
each waveform.
between a transparent object and an object underneath.

1 Click [Edit] or [Add OUT].

2 Select [Thickness (transparent object)] and click [OK].

3
Refer to “Head settings” (Page 3-14) for more details.

If the “white line” is not displayed, the followings are

potential causes:

Cause Fix
Measurement settings

The object surface is out Check the position or tilt of

of measurement range. the object.

The head may not be

The object thickness is appropriate.
too thin. Contact your local
KEYENCE office.

Refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-13) for

additional causes.

6 Click [OK] and close the [Head Settings] screen.

3 Set 2 surfaces to be measured.
• If measuring the thickness of a single layer transparent object, select 7 Click [Setting] of the [Refractive index correction].
the [+1P] and [+2P] for the measurement object peaks as shown
below.
• If measuring the gap between a transparent object and an object
underneath select the [+2P] and [+3P] for the measurement object
peaks.

4 Click [Head Settings].

3-8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 STEP 2: Measurement method

8 Turn ON [Refractive index correction], and select the

transparent material.
z How to find Nc, Nd, and Nf values
Prepare a transparent object of known thickness. With the refractive
index correction [OFF], measure the thickness at three locations. (A:
around NEAR side B: around reference distance, C: around FAR side)
of the measurement range.
A B C
Around NEAR Around reference Around FAR
side distance side

Example) If measuring the thickness of the single layer of the quartz

glass, select “Quartz” for the first layer of the material.
If the appropriate material is not found, the material can be added.
Click [Edit master] and add the new material, and apply the

3
corresponding layer material.
If you do not know the material refractive index, leave the refractive Reference
distance Measurement
index correction to OFF, and measure an object of which thickness is range
known, and set the scaling.
“Scaling” (Page 3-16)

Measurement settings
Thickness Thickness Thickness
measurement measurement measurement
(A) (B) (C)
Find the Nc, Nd, and Nf values by using the following calculation based
on each measurement value:
(T: known thickness)
• Nc = T ÷ Thickness measurement (A)
• Nd = T ÷ Thickness measurement (B)
• Nf = T ÷ Thickness measurement (C)

To find Nc, Nd, and Nf values correctly, check the

following when measuring the thickness of the
transparent object:
• The zero function is [OFF].
• The scaling and offset are the initial values.
• The target should be perpendicular to the sensor
head.

9 If needed, click [Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance].

The meaning of Nc, Nd, and Nf are as follows:

• Nc : Refractive index with 656 nm
• Nd : Refractive index with 589 nm
• Nf : Refractive index with 486 nm
If the refractive index of Nc, Nd, and Nf are unknown,
the approximate correct value can be found by
measuring a transparent object with the same material
of which thickness is known.

Refer to “Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance” (Page 3-16) for more details.

10 If needed, click [Option].

Refer to “Option settings” (Page 3-16) for more details.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-9

 STEP 2: Measurement method

Thickness (2 heads) 6 Check that the “white line” is displayed on the peak of the
waveform.
If the target is detected, the “white line” is displayed on the peak of the
Select this if measuring thickness by placing an object between two heads. waveform.

1 Click [Edit] or [Add OUT].

2 Select [Thickness (2 heads)] and click [OK].

Refer to “Head settings” (Page 3-14) for more details.

3 If the “white line” is not displayed, the following are

potential causes:
Cause Fix
Measurement settings

The object is out of Check the position of the

measurement range. object.
The reflection light intensity Make the sampling cycle
from the object is too low. longer.
Refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-13) for
additional causes.

7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 for the other head, and check

that the “white line” is displayed on the peak of the
waveform.
3 Select the heads to be used for the measurement. If not using the adjustable fixture for thickness measurement (OP-
88284/88285/88286/88864), please align sensor heads and proceed to
step 10.

8 Click [Head alignment guide].

4 Click [Head Settings].

5 When measuring a transparent object, set the

[Transparent object] to [ON].
With the [Transparent object] set to [ON], you can select a value for the
[Measurement object peak] and set the refractive index correction.

Refer to “Displacement (transparent object)” (Page 3-6) for details

on the selection for the [Measurement object peak] and [Refractive
index correction].

3-10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 STEP 2: Measurement method

9 Align the optical axis following the instruction on the

screen.
11 If needed, click the [Option].
The adjustment flow for [Head alignment guide] differs between the P
type/L type and S type/V type.
If the types of selected two heads are different, the head
alignment guide cannot be used.

z [Head alignment guide] screen for P type/L type

Refer to “Option settings” (Page 3-16) for more details.

Measurement settings
“How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For
15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-
88286)” (Page A-2)

z [Head alignment guide] screen for S type/V type

“How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For

High Precision Head CL-S015) (OP-88864)” (Page A-10)

10 If needed, click [Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance].

Refer to “Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance” (Page 3-16) for more details.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-11

 STEP 2: Measurement method

Height difference (2 heads) 5 Check that the “white line” is displayed on the peak of the
waveform.
If the target is detected, the “white line” is displayed on the peak of the
This is selected if measuring the height difference of an object using
waveform.
two heads.

1 Click [Edit] or [Add OUT].

2 Select [Height difference (2 heads)] and click [OK].

3
Refer to “Head settings” (Page 3-14) for more details.

If the “white line” is not displayed, the followings are

potential causes:

Cause Fix
Measurement settings

The object is out of Check the position of

measurement range. the object.

The reflection light intensity Make the sampling

from the object is too low. cycle longer.

Refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-13) for

additional causes.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other head, and check

that the “white line” is displayed on the peak of the

3
waveform.
Select the heads to be used for the measurement.
7 Click [OK] and close the [Head Settings] screen.

8 If needed, click [Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance].

4 Click [Head Settings].

Refer to “Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance” (Page 3-16) for more details.

9 If needed, click the [Option].

Refer to “Option settings” (Page 3-16) for more details.

3-12 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 STEP 2: Measurement method

Calculation 4 If needed, click [Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance].

Select this if the needed value cannot be acquired by a single OUT

alone.

To use the calculation function, at least one other OUT that

is not a calculation must be specified.

1 Click [Add OUT].

Refer to “Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance” (Page 3-16) for more details.

5
2 Select [Calculation] and click [OK]. If needed, click [Option].
3

Measurement settings
Refer to “Option settings” (Page 3-16) for more details.

3 Select the calculation method, and set [Formula] or

[Ave/P-P/Max/Min].
z In the case of [Formula]
Set the factor and [OUTs] to be used for the formula.

z In the case of [Ave/P-P/Max/Min]

Check the checkbox of the [OUTs] where the calculation is applied.

• Ave : Find the average value of the [OUTs].

• P-P : Find the “maximum - minimum” value of the [OUTs].
• Max : Find the maximum value of the [OUTs].
• Min : Find the minimum value of the [OUTs].
Example
If measuring warpage of the object by measuring the three sections
(the left end, center, right end of the measurement object) using three
heads, apply settings as follows:
• OUT01 : Using head 01
• OUT02 : Using head 02
• OUT03 : Using head 03
• OUT04 : [Measurement method] calculation: P-P
[OUTs]: OUT01, OUT02, OUT03

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-13

 STEP 2: Measurement method

Common settings z Threshold setting

When the received light intensity exceeds the threshold, it is identified
as the peak.
• AUTO : The threshold is optimized automatically.
• MANUAL : Set an arbitrary threshold (0 to 170).
Head settings If [High sensitivity] is ON, the threshold can be set in intervals of 0.05.

„ Waveform display area

As the standard to determine whether the measurement is
performed correctly, check the received light peak waveform from the In this situation, the threshold is 1 + 0.15 = 1.15.
measurement surface. Normally, select [AUTO].
It should meet all the following required conditions:
• If the received light peak to be detected is low (20 or
• The white line is stable on the peak of the waveform and doesn’t
less), select [MANUAL] to set the threshold to be low
disappear.
in order to detect the measurement value as much
• The height of the received light peak is 10 or more.
as possible.
• The received light peak waveform is not largely deformed, such as
split into two around the peak. • If a received light peak that you do not expect is
detected, select [MANUAL] to set the threshold
(1) (2) higher than the unexpected peak.

3
z Mask setting
Set the boundary to set the mask in the measurement range. If the
received light falls within the mask it will be ignored.

z Mask boundary
Measurement settings

If the [Mask setting] is ON, specify the mask boundary with [Boundary 1]
and [Boundary 2].
(3)
In the case of The outside of [Boundary 1] and
[Boundary 1] < [Boundary 2] [Boundary 2] is masked.

In the case of The part between [Boundary 1] and

[Boundary 1] > [Boundary 2] [Boundary 2] is masked.

As for the spot type, one received light peak waveform is displayed. In the case of
The mask is not applied.
As for the quad type, four received light peak waveforms are displayed [Boundary 1] = [Boundary 2]
in different colors since it searches for four heights.
The mask boundary can be set in units of 0.01 mm.
No. Item Contents

Start or Stop acquisition of the received

z Light intensity control
(1) [Stop]/[Start] Select how to adjust the light intensity and sensitivity.
light waveform. • AUTO : Make adjustment automatically to the appropriate light
intensity and sensitivity.
Waveform display
(2) Change how to display the waveform. • MANUAL : Make adjustment by limiting the adjustment range of the
option buttons
light intensity and sensitivity to an arbitrary range of 1 to
Display the received light peak 99.
(3) Peak waveform
waveform. If an object with high reflectivity (e.g., mirror) is out of the
measurement range, and a wrong measurement value is
„ [Basic] tab detected, this may be resolved by selecting [MANUAL] to
lower the upper limit.

z Light intensity tuning

Optimize the adjustment range of the light intensity and sensitivity by
measuring the actual object.
Click [Start] while the measurement object is being measured. Click
[Stop] after arbitrary time passes.

z Median filter
Reduce sudden changes of the measurement value by applying a
median filter of 7,15 or 31 points to the measurement value in order to
reduce the fluctuation of the measurement value. Set this if the object
moves with high speed, for example. When Multi light intensity control is used, the light intensity
• Setting range: OFF (initial value), 7, 15, 31 tuning cannot be used.
Example data processing when using a 7 point median filter
Sort the 7 measurement points by ascending order, and set the
median value as the measurement value.
Number of
measurements (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Measurement value 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.5 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1
Median 1st time 1.0
Median 2nd time 1.0
Median 3rd time 1.0

For example, in the case of the first median, when sorting (1) to (7),
the order is as follows and the median value of “1.0” becomes a
measurement value.
1.5 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.9

3-14 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 STEP 2: Measurement method

„ [Signal processing] tab „ [Transparent object] tab

Displayed only if selecting [Displacement (transparent object)] or
when [Thickness (transparent object)] is selected as the measurement
method.

z Peak shape filter

When ON, peak shape validation is activated.
The target is the peak wehre the received light intensity is above the
z Number of measurement peaks
Specify the number of detected received light peaks (= number of
search threshold. measurement surfaces, max. is 4).
This function is used to reduce the influence of surface roughness or • If the number of received light peaks detected is more than [Number
multi reflection off of hte measurement object. of measurement peaks], the first four peaks closest to the sensor are
There are 5 thresholds for validation: counted.
• -1: Loosest threshold, the measurement value is easy to pass as valid • If the number of received light peaks detected is less than the [Number
• -2: Strictest threshold, the measurement value is hard to pass as valid of measurement peaks], the measurement continues when [Multi light

3
intensity control] is [OFF]. If [Multi light intensity control] is [ON], the
z Light intensity integration measurement value becomes invalid data (+FFFFFF).
If it is ON, average the received light waveform by the number of
samplings specified.
This is used to stabilize the measurement even if there are multiple
z Peak number check
When the setting is [ON], the measurement value is invalidated if the
samples of low received light intensity. number of detected peaks does not match [Number of measurement

Measurement settings
If the object is moving up and down, the received light peaks].
waveform where the light intensity integration is applied • Example
cannot be acquired correctly. When measuring only the top surface of a thin transparent
target where you don’t want to accidentally measure the bottom
z Quad processing surface, set the measurement object peak as [+1P], the number of
measurement peaks as [2], and turn [ON] peak number check.
(enabled when using the quad type and the Multi light
intensity control is OFF) z Multi light intensity control
• Average When measuring a target where there are large differences in received
Calculates the measured value based on the peak received lights light intensity, set this function [ON].
from 4 CMOSs. • Quad type
The target(s) are only the selected peak(s). Of the four received light intensities from the 4 CMOSs, the peak
When the detected number of spots (received light peaks) is less of the highest received light intensity is used for the measurement.
than the set valid spots number, the measurement value is invalid. • Spot type
• Multiple reflection removal Finds the measurement by adjusting the light intensity between
If “Multiple reflection removal” is selected, the measurement value is samples (for up to 4 samples, actual sample number is determined
determined by selecting the received light peaks (of the four received) by [Number of measurement peaks]).
that are not influenced by multiple reflection light. • Example
“Applications where this feature can be useful: Measuring glass on top of a mirror surface or measuring
• Measuring coplanarity on a connector pin translucent or cloudy glass.
• Profile measurement along a step change”
Each measurement takes “Sampling cycle x Number
z High sensitivity of measurement peaks”.
When ON, the received light peak threshold can be set with higher
detail.
This function is used to stably measure black inclined surfaces and
coated surfaces with low reflectivity.
There are five sensitivity levels.
Increase the sensitivity when you want to detect even small differences
in the peaks and valleys of the received light.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-15

 STEP 2: Measurement method

Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance Option settings

3 „ Filter
Apply filter and data processing of the measurement value using a
moving average, low pass filter, or high pass filter.
Measurement settings

• Moving average : Set the number of the averaged measurement

values.
• Moving average
„ Scaling (excluding alarm) : Set the number of the averaged measurement
values.
You can scale the display value to the measured value for each OUT
arbitrarily. If invalid data (alarms) are included in the range
By clicking [Current value] you can assign the current measurement of averaging times, averaging is performed only
value to [Measurement value1] or [Measurement value2]. with valid data.
• Low pass : Set the cutoff frequency, and ignore the change of
The scaling cannot be set if the following condition is not frequencies that exceed this limit.
met. • High pass : Set the cutoff frequency, and ignore the change of
• Measured value 1 - Measured value 2 ≠ 0 frequencies that are lower than this limit.
Display value 2 - Display value 1 Moving average selector
• <= 10
Measured value 2 - Measured value 1 (1/2/4/8/16/32/64/256/1024/4096/16384/65536/262144 times)
Cutoff frequency selector
„ Offset (1000 Hz / 300 Hz / 100 Hz / 30 Hz / 10 Hz / 3 Hz / 1 Hz / 0.3 Hz / 0.1 Hz)
You can add/subtract an arbitrary value from the measurement value.
z Processing method for the moving average
Master calibration can be performed by using with Average the measurement value by setting the range of 1 to 262144
times.
“Auto zero function” (Page 2-9).
Example data processing when using a moving average of 4.
If setting the size of the master, you can assign a
known value to the dimension of the master target Sampling cycle
by setting the value of the master target as the offset
and executing auto zero while measuring the master 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
target.
Measurement
average time Output data A by
averaging data 1 to 4.
„ Tolerance settings Measurement
average time Output data B by
Internal data
z Upper limit/Lower limit Measurement
averaging data 2 to 5.
Set the tolerance to judge the measurement value (upper limit and average time Output data C by
lower limit). averaging data 3 to 6.
Judge the measurement value using the following 3 criteria to display
and output the results.
• When it is higher than the upper limit (HI) Output data A B C
• When it is within the tolerance range (GO)
• When it is lower than the lower limit (LO)
Update cycle
z Hysteresis z How to process moving average (excluding alarm)
When the measurement value varies up or down around the Tolerance
Average the measurement value by setting the range from 1 to 262144
value, the Judgment output can turn ON/OFF repeatedly.
times.
Set a [Hysteresis] band around the tolerance value and the recovery
If invalid data (alarms) are included in the range of averaging times,
value to avoid the repeated ON/OFF signal. [Hysteresis] is not applied
data excluding alarms are averaged.
(set to 0.0000 mm) by default.
Even if the amount of internal data is less than the average number of
times, only the internal data that exists is averaged and output.

3-16 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 STEP 2: Measurement method

z Processing method for the low-pass filter/high-pass filter

Set the cutoff frequency to each filter.
„ Hold processing
Select the method of hold processing.
The process when setting the filter is as follows:
Measurement value z Normal
Output the measurement value continuously.

Input waveform

Time

z Peak hold
Output the maximum value of the sampling period.
Measurement value Measurement value
Waveform with the Waveform with the

3
high-pass filter low-pass filter

Measurement settings
Time Time • Update condition: at [External timing 1]

• Update condition: at [External timing 2]

• Update condition: at [Internal timing]

z Bottom hold
Output the minimum value of the sampling period.

• Update condition: at [External timing 1]

• Update condition: at [External timing 2]

• Update condition: at [Internal timing]

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-17

 STEP 2: Measurement method

z Peak-to-peak hold z Sample hold

Output the difference between the maximum and minimum of the Output the measured value at the time when the external timing input
sampling period. was received.

• Update condition: at [External timing 1] • Update condition: at [External timing 1]

3
• Update condition: at [External timing 2] • Update condition: at [External timing 2]
Measurement settings

• Update condition: at [Internal timing] • Update condition: at [Internal timing]

z Average hold z Auto Peak hold

Output the maximum value of the sampling period. The sampling period
Output the average value of the sampling period.
starts when measurement value exceeds the value set in the [Level].

• Update condition: at [External timing 1]

z Auto bottom hold
Output the minimum value of the sampling period. The sampling period
starts when measurement value is lower than the value set in the [Level].

• Update condition: at [External timing 2]

• Update condition: at [Internal timing]

3-18 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 STEP 2: Measurement method

„ Invalid data processing

z Invalidation number
The last valid data is held until the number of invalid measurements
reaches the “Invalidation number”.
If this is set to 9999 times, the last valid data is held until the next valid
data is measured.

z Recovery number
If the number of valid measurements reaches the “Recovery number”,
the measurement is recovered.

„ Minimum display unit

Select the minimum display unit of the measurement value.

„ Analog output scaling

The analog voltage output can be scaled to any value in the range of
±10.5 V.
When setting the scaling, set the output voltage values for two arbitrary

3
measurement values.
Voltage (V)
Voltage when + range exceeded

+10.5 V

Measurement settings
+10 V

0V +5 mm: +10 V
–5 mm: –10 V

–10 V
–10.5 V

-5 0 +5 Display value
Voltage when – range exceeded (mm)

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 3-19

 STEP 3: Judgment output

STEP 3: Judgment output

Judgment output Terminal allocation

Allocate the judgment results of OUT (HI/GO/LO) for each output signal. Zero/Timing/Reset input has 2 groupings.
Set which is allocated per OUT.

3
By clicking [Setting], the [Judgment output logic] screen is displayed.
Set the logic for the judgment output signal (AND/OR), strobe terminal
allocation (No allocation/Strobe1/Strobe2), and the allocation of the
OUT judgment results.
Measurement settings

Analog OUT allocation

Each OUT can be allocated to analog output channels.

Select the checkbox for the judgment result (HI, GO, LO) which is to
be allocated to [Judgment output signal].
If checking the checkbox for multiple judgment results, the logic (AND/
OR) becomes enabled.
• If the measurement value is invalid data, it is handled
the same as the judgment results of [HI] or [LO].
• If the unset OUT and judgment standby data are in the
“status which cannot be judged”, they are handled as
“OFF” for any conditions.
• Refer to “Tolerance settings” (Page 3-16) for the settings of
judgment results (HI, GO, LO) for each OUT.
• Refer to “Input/Output Terminal Allocation” (Page 4-3) for the
terminal allocation of the judgment output signal.

z Logic
• AND
When all judgment results of OUTs with checkboxes checked
have been completed, the output turns ON.
• OR
When any of judgment results of OUTs with checkboxes checked
have been completed, the output turns ON.

z Strobe terminal allocation

The allocated strobe terminal turns ON when the judgment output signal
is updated.
Refer to “Timing Charts” (Page 6-7) for more details.

3-20 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 4
Common Settings
and Functions

Environment Settings.............................................. 4-2

Communication.................................................................... 4-2
Field network........................................................................ 4-2
I/O terminal settings............................................................. 4-3
Analog output settings.......................................................... 4-3
4
Encoder settings................................................................... 4-4

Common Settings and Functions

Other.................................................................................... 4-5

Saving and Reading Settings.................................. 4-6

Save Settings to File............................................................ 4-6
Read Settings File................................................................ 4-6
Displaying the Setting Contents........................................... 4-7

Monitor Functions and Operations......................... 4-8

Measurement Value Monitor................................................ 4-8
I/O Monitor............................................................................ 4-9
Communication Log Monitor.............................................. 4-10
Communication monitor..................................................... 4-11

PC Communication Settings................................. 4-12

Connect with USB.............................................................. 4-12
Connect with Ethernet........................................................ 4-12

Tool Function and its Operation........................... 4-14

Data Storage...................................................................... 4-14
Head Alignment Guide....................................................... 4-16
Calibration of Light Intensity............................................... 4-16

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 4-1

 Environment Settings

Environment Settings
By clicking the [Environment] button on the main screen, the Ethernet settings
[Environment settings] screen appears.
Pressing [OK] sends settings to the controller except for Adjust the settings if communicating with Ethernet.
[Communication] and [Field network]. These require an additional The settings are implemented after rebooting
reboot.
controller.

1 Click [Environment] on the main screen.

z Setting of IP Address at the Next Power On
Set the operation of acquiring the controller IP address at the next
power on.
• BOOTP -> Fixed IP address (initial value)
Start up by acquiring the settings of IP address/subnet mask/
gateway by BOOTP. The acquired values are saved as the

2
controller network settings.
Edit the [Environment settings]. This is switched to [Fixed IP address] automatically at the next
power on, and the saved network settings are used for the next
start up.
• Fixed IP address
Start up with the set IP address/subnet mask/gateway.
If PROFINET is selected in the field network, it is set

4
to [Fixed IP address].
• BOOTP
The set IP address/subnet mask/gateway are ignored, and the
start up is performed by newly and automatically acquiring the
network settings.
Common Settings and Functions

z IP address/subnet mask/gateway
This is enabled only when [Setting of IP address at the
next power on] is [Fixed IP address].

• The following IP addresses are handled as invalid IP

addresses:
• 0.0.0.0 (However, this can be specified if
“Communication” (Page 4-2) PROFINET is selected in the field network)
“Field network” (Page 4-2) • 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
“I/O terminal settings” (Page 4-3) • 127.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255
“Encoder settings” (Page 4-4) • Broadcast address
“Other” (Page 4-5) (IP address host part is all 1)
• Network address
(IP address host part is all 0)

Communication • The following addresses are handled as invalid

subnet masks:
Edit the RS-232C/Ethernet communication setting of the connected • 0.0.0.0
controller. • 255.255.255.255
• The bits of “1”s are not contiguous from the front.
(An example of an error: 255.255.255.64 = 11111111
.11111111.11111111.01000000)
• The following addresses are handled as invalid
gateways:
• 127.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255
• 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

z Port number
Set the port number used by the controller.
• Setting range: except 44818, 1024 to 65535 (initial value: 24685)

Field network
This is used to communicate with a PLC via a field network.
RS-232C settings Judgment results and other parameters can be output to a PLC.

Adjust the settings if communicating with RS-232C.

The settings are implemented after rebooting

controller.

z Baud rate
Set the baud rate of the RS-232C communication.
• Selections (unit: bps) : 9600/19200/38400/
The communication protocol which can be selected is as follows:
57600/115200 (initial value)
• EtherNet/IP
The data length (8 bit), stop bit (1 bit), and flow control • PROFINET
(none) are set as fixed values. • PLC-Link
• EtherCAT
z Parity
Set the parity of the RS-232C communication. The field network settings are implemented after
• Selections: NONE (initial value)/EVEN/ODD rebooting controller.

4-2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Environment Settings

I/O terminal settings Judgment output method

Set the input/output terminal allocation of the controller and the settings z Output mode
of the judgment output method. Set the output form of the judgment output results from the output
terminal.
• Normal (initial value)
When the judgment output result changes, the judgment output
terminal changes at the timing of the update cycle (= strobe time
x 2). The judgment output can be read by synchronizing with the
strobe output.
• Hold
Once the judgment output terminal turns ON, the ON continues
until the reset is input.
• OFF-DELAY
When the judgment output result turns OFF, the judgment output
terminal turns OFF after the OFF-DELAY time.
Set this if the time when the judgment output result is ON is too
short to read.
Refer to “Output Logic with Different Judgment Output Modes” (Page
6-14) for details.

z Strobe Time
Set this if the output mode is [Normal].
The strobe output is used by “Rising synchronization” when reading the

4
judgment output. Set the time when the strobe output turns ON (one
shot output time).
• Selection (unit: ms): 0.5, 1, 2 (initial value), 5, 10, 50, 100, and 500
Input/Output Terminal Allocation
The update cycle of judgment output is “Strobe Time × 2”

Common Settings and Functions

z Input signal at the shortest.
The following input signals can be allocated to input terminals (IN1 - 13)
arbitrarily:
• Zero 1 • Program bit 0
z Delay time
Set this if the output mode is [OFF-DELAY].
• Zero 2 • Program bit 1 Set the time from when the judgment output result turns OFF until
• Reset 1 • Program bit 2 judgment output terminal turns OFF.
• Reset 2 • Switch Program • Selection (unit: ms): 10, 50, 100 (initial value), 500
•
•
Timing 1
Timing 2
•
•
Emission stop
Measurement stop
z Minimum Input Time
Select the minimum input time of the input terminal from 250 µs or 1
• Storage start/stop • Unused ms.
• Storage clear Refer to “Timing Charts” (Page 6-7) for details.

The same signal cannot be allocated to multiple terminals.

If switching the program, you must allocate all signals of
[Program bit 0-2] and [Switch program]. Analog output settings
z Output signal This is used to communicate with a PLC via a field network.
The following output signals can be allocated to output terminals (OUT1 Judgment results and other parameters can be output to a PLC.
- 11) arbitrarily:
• Strobe 1 • Storage FULL
• Strobe 2 • Storage in operation
• Judgment output 1 • Measurement value valid status 1
• Judgment output 2 • Measurement value valid status 2
• Judgment output 3 • RUN
• Judgment output 4 • Trigger error
• Judgment output 5 • Warning • Output voltage upper limit / lower limit
• Judgment output 6 • Error You can set the limits of the output voltage within the range of
• Judgment output 7 • Unused ±10.8 V.
• Judgment output 8 • Voltage when + range exceeded / Voltage when − range exceeded
Set the voltage when the measurement value is outside the
The same signal cannot be allocated to multiple terminals. displayable range.
This value exceeding the displayable range is referred to as the +
z Polarity range being exceeded and falling below the displayable range as
the − range being exceeded.
You can select [N.O. (normal open)] (= a contact point) or [N.C. (normal
close)] (= b contact point) per terminal. • Invalid data / Standby state voltage
For the initial values, all terminals are [N.O.]. Set the voltage to output when the measurement value is invalid
data or judgment standby data.
Refer to “Functions of the Input/Output Signals” (Page 6-4) for
more details on each function of the input/output signal.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 4-3

 Environment Settings

Encoder settings Input mode

This section explains four types of input modes of the encoder pulse
Utilize the encoder pulse signal if sampling with an equal interval. signals.

z 1-ph 1 TM
The pulse count value is incremented at rising of A-phase regardless of
B-phase input.
A-phase

B-phase

Pulse
count value
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

z 2-ph 1 TM
• If B-phase is OFF
• Recognize the signal input at rising of A-phase, and the pulse
count value is added.
z Encoder unit • Recognize the signal input at falling of A-phase, and the pulse
Select whether or not to use the encoder unit. count value is subtracted.
If selecting [Use], each setting item is displayed on the screen.

4 • Selection: Used (initial value) / Not used • If B-phase is ON

• The signal input is not recognized, and the pulse count value is
z Operation mode not updated.
Select the published signal to the controller.
• Selection: OFF (initial value) / TIMING / TRIGGER A-phase
Common Settings and Functions

• The TIMING input by the encoder pulse signal is

assigned to “group 1” of the timing/reset. B-phase
• The shortest possible interval when the TIMING or
TRIGGER signal is sent is as follows:
Pulse
• The TIMING shortest possible interval: Minimum input count value 0 1 2 3 2 1 0
time x 2
Refer to “Judgment output method” (Page 4-3) z 2-ph 2 TM
for the minimum input time settings. • If B-phase is OFF
• The TRIGGER shortest possible interval: Refer to • Recognize the signal input at rising of A-phase, and the pulse
“In the case of Encoder Trigger (Skipping point 2)” count value is added.
(Page 6-13) • Recognize the signal input at falling of A-phase, and the pulse
count value is subtracted.
z Input mode • If B-phase is ON
Select the input method of the encoder pulse signal. • Recognize the signal input at rising of A-phase, and the pulse
• Selection : 1-ph 1 TM (initial value) / 2-ph 1 TM / 2-ph 2 TM / 2-ph 4 TM count value is subtracted.
Refer to “Input mode” (Page 4-4) for more details. • Recognize the signal input at falling of A-phase, and the pulse
count value is added.
z Skipping
Set the skipping interval for the TIMING or TRIGGER signal. For A-phase
example, if skipping is set to 10, every 10th pulse will be counted as the
TIMING or TRIGGER signal.
• Setting value: 1 - 1000 (initial value: 1) B-phase

z Search method
Select whether to issue TIMING or TRIGGER when the pulse count Pulse
increases or decreases. count value
• Selection : At count up / At count down / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Both count up and down (initial value)

z Minimum input time

Set the input set up time of A/B/Z-phase.
• Selection : 100 ns/200 ns/500 ns (initial value)/1 µs/2 µs/5 µs/
10 µs/20 µs
Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-5) for more details.

z Pulse count preset function

• Search logic
Select whether or not to use the pulse count preset function by
Z-phase.
Select the logic if used.
• Selection: OFF (initial value)/Positive logic/Negative logic
• Preset value
Set the preset value when using the pulse count preset function.
• Setting value: -2147483648 to 0 (initial value) to +2147483647
Refer to “Pulse Count Preset Function” (Page 4-5) for more details.

4-4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Environment Settings

z 2-ph 4 TM Other
The pulse count value is decided by the phase of A-phase and B-phase.
If the A-phase comes before the B-phase, the pulse count is added.
If the A-phase comes after the B-phase, the pulse count is subtracted.
• When B-phase is OFF
• Recognize the signal input at rising of A-phase, and the pulse count
value is added.
• Recognize the signal input at falling of A-phase, and the pulse count
value is subtracted.
• When B-phase is ON
• Recognize the signal input at rising of A-phase, and the pulse count
value is subtracted.
• Recognize the signal input at falling of A-phase, and the pulse count
value is added.
• When A-phase is OFF
• Recognize the signal input at rising of B-phase, and the pulse count
value is subtracted.
• Recognize the signal input at falling of B-phase, and the pulse
count value is added. Display panel settings
• When A-phase is ON
• Recognize the signal input at rising of B-phase, and the pulse count z Panel Lock
value is added. Select the panel lock ON/OFF.
• Recognize the signal input at falling of B-phase, and the pulse If turning ON the panel lock, the key operations on the display panel will
count value is subtracted. not work at all.

4
If an error (warning) occurs during the panel lock, the warning display
A-phase (Warn**) can be returned to the measurement value display by pressing
the [ENT] key.
B-phase z OUT number for top display
Set the OUT number displayed for the top Display on the Panel.

Common Settings and Functions

Pulse z OUT number for bottom display
count value Set the OUT number displayed for the bottom Display on the Panel.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fan setting
Turn ON / OFF the fan of the optical unit.
Minimum Input Time
If the fan is OFF, ensure the environment around the
You can restrict the maximum frequency of the “encoder pulse signal”
that can be input in each input mode by the minimum input time setting. optical unit does not exceed 35°C.
The frequency in each settings (operation guaranteed value) are as
follows:

Input mode settings

Minimum input
time settings
1-ph 1 TM 2-ph 1 TM 2-ph 2 TM 2-ph 4 TM

100 ns 4 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz

200 ns 2 MHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz

500 ns 800 kHz 400 kHz 800 kHz 1.6 MHz

1 µs 400 kHz 200 kHz 400 kHz 800 kHz

2 µs 200 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz 400 kHz

5 µs 80 kHz 40 kHz 80 kHz 160 kHz

10 µs 40 kHz 20 kHz 40 kHz 80 kHz

20 µs 20 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 40 kHz

Pulse Count Preset Function

Replace the pulse count value with preset value by Z-phase input as a
trigger.
The pulse count value is “0” after power ON.
• Positive logic
Z-phase recognizes Z-phase input at OFF -> ON edge, and
replaces the pulse count value with preset value.
• Negative logic
Z-phase recognizes Z-phase input at ON -> OFF edge, and
replaces the pulse count value with preset value.

Count input Addition

Subtraction

ON
Z-phase input
OFF

Count upper limit

+2147483647

Pulse count
preset value

Count lower limit

-2147483648

Pulse count preset operation

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 4-5

 Saving and Reading Settings

Saving and Reading Settings

Save Settings to File 3 Select the file and click [Open].

Save current settings to a file.

1 From the [File] menu, select [Save settings to file].

2 Set the storage location and file name, and click [Save]

z When transferring the file content

If the read file content is transferred to the controller, this message
screen appears.

4
Common Settings and Functions

By clicking [OK], the measurement starts with the read content.

Read Settings File

Read the settings file saved on a PC.
You can select to transfer the settings to the controller, or edit it in offline
mode.

1 From the [File] menu, select [Open settings file].

2 Select the read file processing, and click [OK]. z When editing in the offline mode
Read file content, and start up in offline mode.

If selecting [Edit in offline mode], an arbitrary settings file

can be opened and edited.

4-6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Saving and Reading Settings

Displaying the Setting Contents

You can check the current settings list.
The content can be checked by copying and pasting it to Excel.

1 From the [File] menu, select [Settings list].

The [Settings list] screen appears.

Common Settings and Functions

2 Click [Copy the Settings List to the clipboard].

3 Paste it to Excel, and check the list.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 4-7

 Monitor Functions and Operations

Monitor Functions and Operations

Measurement Value Monitor

This is used if you want to display the measurement value of 3 OUTs or more simultaneously.
The measurement value can be logged.

1 From the [Monitor/display] menu, select [Measurement value monitor].

The [Measurement value display] screen appears.

(1) (2)

4 (3) (5)
Common Settings and Functions

(6)

(4)
(7)

(8)
(9)

(10)

(11)

No. Name Function

(1) [Stop]/[Start] button Start / Stop the acquisition of the measurement value displayed in the measurement value monitor.

Measurement processing input You can input zero, timing, or reset to OUTs assigned to each command.
(2)
buttons “Terminal allocation” (Page 3-20)

(3) [Select OUT to display] button Select OUTs to display in the measurement value display area.

The current measurement value and the judgment result are displayed.
(4) Measured value display area
You can click the button to input a zero, timing, or reset to the applicable output.

OUT number that appears in the log is displayed.

(5) OUT No. display
The OUT number can be switched by .

(6) [Add] button Click the button to log the measurement value. (Maximum: 100).

(7) [Log] display area Display the log.

(8) [Undo] button Return to the previous log display.

(9) [Clear] button Clear the log.

Save the measurement value stored in the log as a CSV file.

(10) [Save as CSV] button
The output measurement value of all setup OUTs are saved.

(11) [Stats] area Display stats of the measurement value displayed in the log.

4-8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Monitor Functions and Operations

I/O Monitor
You can check that the input/output is wired correctly.

1 From the [Monitor/display] menu, select [I/O Monitor].

The [I/O Monitor] screen is displayed.

(1)

(5)

(6)

4
(7)

Common Settings and Functions

(8)

(2) (3) (4)

No. Name Function

(1) [Stop]/[Start] button Start / Stop the acquisition of the output status displayed in the [I/O Monitor] screen.

(2) Input terminal condition The current status of the input terminal ON/OFF can be checked.

(3) Output terminal status The current status of the output terminal ON/OFF can be checked.

(4) Test output status Set the status where the test output is performed in each terminal.

(5) [Output test start]/[Output test exit] By clicking [Output test start], the ON/OFF status of [Test output status] is forcefully output.

(6) [All ON] button Turn ON all [Test output status].

(7) [All OFF] button Turn OFF all [Test output status].

(8) [Close] button Close the [I/O Monitor] screen.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 4-9

 Monitor Functions and Operations

Communication Log Monitor

Display the communication log acquired from the controller.

1 From the [Monitor/display] menu, select [Communication log monitor].

The [Communication log monitor] screen is displayed.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

4 (5)
Common Settings and Functions

(6)

No. Name Function

Switch the communication type.

(1) [Communication type] selection menu • Selection: RS-232C (initial value)/Ethernet Socket0/Ethernet Socket1
Ethernet is the TCP/IP socket. If using only one socket, select Ethernet Socket0.

(2) [Start] button Start storage of the communication log with the controller.

(3) [Stop] button Stop storage of the communication log with the controller.

(4) [Clear] button Clear the communication log with the controller.

Display the communication log.

(5) Communication log display area The latest log is displayed at the bottom. (max: 16,000).
Commands sent in blocks are displayed in one line in the log.

(6) [Close] button Close the [Communication log monitor] screen.

4-10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Monitor Functions and Operations

Communication monitor
Communication data between the device connected with the field network and the controller can be monitored.

EtherCAT is not supported.

1 From the [Monitor/Display] menu, select [Communication monitor].

The [Communication monitor] screen is displayed.

z Receive data
(1) (3)
(2)

Common Settings and Functions

(5)

If the “Field network” setting is [PLC-Link], the address becomes the absolute address.

z Send data
(1) (3)
(2)

(4)
(5)

If the “Field network” setting is [PLC-Link], the address becomes the absolute address.

No. Name Function

(1) [Start]/[Stop] button Stop/Start sending or receiving communication data in [Communication monitor].

(2) [Receive data]/[Send data] tab Switch between “Receive data” and “Send data”.

Select display type.

(3) Display type
• Selections: [Standard] (default), [Hexadecimal (unsigned)], [Decimal (unsigned)], [Decimal (signed)]

If check box is checked , [Reflected value] is displayed. If you specify a value, the reflected value is output to PLC.
(Parameters that cannot be output are grayed out.)
(4) Manual output
If the “Field network” setting is [PLC-Link], the “Manual output” always turns ON.

(5) [Close] button Close the [Communication monitor] screen.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 4-11

 PC Communication Settings

PC Communication Settings
Set the communication method between the controller and CL-NavigatorN.

Connect with USB Connect with Ethernet

1 From the [Connection] menu,

select the [PC Connection Settings] menu.
1 From the [Connection] menu,
select the [PC Connection Settings] menu.

2 Select [Connect with USB] and click [OK]. 2 Select [Connect with Ethernet]. Enter the controller IP
address, and click [OK].

4
Common Settings and Functions

If failing to establish the USB communication, refer

to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-13). If the controller IP address is not set, set the settings.
“Setting the Controller IP Address” (Page 4-13)

3 Click [Connect], and establish the communication with

the controller. 3 Click [Connect], and establish the communication with
the controller.

4 Click [START], and start the measurement.

If failing to establish the Ethernet communication, the
following dialog screen appears:

Check that the status of the Ethernet cable connection and

communication settings are correct.

4 Click [START], and start the measurement.

4-12 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 PC Communication Settings

Setting the Controller IP Address 4 Set the controller IP address, and click [OK].

1 From the [Connection] menu,

select the [PC Connection Settings] menu.

2 Select [Connect with Ethernet] and click [Controller

search].
5 Check the controller IP address is set, and click [Close].

Common Settings and Functions

If mounting two LAN ports or more to the PC, the
screen to select the network adapter appears.
Select the network adapter used to connect with the
controller, and click [OK].

6 Check that the controller IP address is entered

correctly, and click [OK].

Search the controller connected with the network, and the results are
displayed.

3 Select the controller where the IP address is not set,

and click [Set IP address].

7 Click [Connect], and establish the communication with

the controller.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 4-13

 Tool Function and its Operation

Tool Function and its Operation

Data Storage
You can store a maximum of 1.6 million measurement values.
Read stored data to display it as a graph or save it as a CSV file.

Different from the trend chart saving, multiple OUT measurement values can be saved collectively as a CSV file.

1 From the [Tool] menu, select [Data storage].

The [Data storage] screen is displayed.

4
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(9) (12)
Common Settings and Functions

(10)

(11)
(13)

(14)

(15)

No. Name Function

(1) [Start reading] button Read the data stored in the controller.

(2) [Stop] button Stop reading the data stored in the controller.

(3) [Start storage] button Start storage of the measurement value.

(4) [Stop storage] button Stop storage of the measurement value.

(5) [Clear stored data] button Clear the stored data.

(6) [Open storage file] button Open the storage file (CSV format), and read the stored data.

(7) [Save in file] button Save the stored data to a CSV file.

(8) [Open data storage settings] button Open the [Storage settings] screen.

(9) Waveform display change button Change how to display the waveform.

(10) Stored data information Display the stored information of the measurement value at real time.

(11) OUT display Select the OUT number for waveform display.

(12) Data type display Select whether the displayed data is from the controller or the storage file.

(13) Graph display area Display the read measurement value by the trend chart.

(14) Cursor information display area Display the data at and between the cursors on the trend chart for the chosen OUT(s).

(15) Cursor A/B information display area Display the cursor A/B information.

4-14 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Tool Function and its Operation

Data storage step 4 Click [Start storage], and start the storage of the
measurement value.

1 From the [Tool] menu, select [Data storage].

2 Click [Open data storage settings]. 5 Click [Start reading], and read data stored from the
controller.

3 Set the storage condition, and click [OK].

6
4
Click [Stop storage], and stop the storage of the
measurement value.

Common Settings and Functions

7 Click [Stop], and stop reading the stored data.

z Number of storage points

Set the number of stored measurement values.
• Upper limit : 1600000
(when the OUTs to be stored is one to four)
800000
(when the select OUTs to be stored is five to eight)
• Initial value : 100000
By setting [Overwrite operation] to [Overwrite], the number
of storage points is fixed to 600,000 points to operate.
8 Check the content of the read data.
Set and check the cursor as required.
z Overwrite operation
Set whether or not to overwrite the stored data.
• Do not overwrite (initial value)
The storage operation stops once the limit is reached.
• Overwrite
Continue the storage operation. If the number of storage points is
exceeded the older data is overwritten.

z Storage Timing
Select whether the storage timing is set to [When updating
measurement value] (initial value) or [By judgment result].

z Storage cycle
This is displayed when the storage timing is [When updating
measurement value].
Set the number of skipping times (1 to 10,000).
(Initial value: 1)

z Judgment setting
This is displayed when the storage timing is [By judgment result].
By clicking the [Edit] button, the screen to set the judgment condition is
displayed. Select the OUT judgment result for the combined method or 9 To save the stored data, click [Save in file] and save it to
a CSV file.
judgment.

By setting the cursor over the read data, the data

between cursors can be saved as a CSV file.

z Select OUTs to store

Select the OUT number for storing the measurement value.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 4-15

 Tool Function and its Operation

Head Alignment Guide Calibration of Light Intensity

This is used to adjust two heads optical axes precisely by using When the warning occurs and the received light waveform is not
the optional adjustable fixture for thickness measurement (OP- normal, this can be used to fix the warning.

1
88284/88285/88286/88864).
The advanced thickness measurement can be achieved by adjusting From the [Tool] menu, select [Calibration of light
the optical axis precisely. intensity].

1 From the [Tool] menu, select [Head alignment guide].

2 Select the target head, and perform the calibration of

2 Select the heads for the head alignment guide, and

click [OK].
light intensity following the instruction on the screen.

4
Common Settings and Functions

If the models of selected two heads are different, the

[Head alignment guide] function cannot be used.

3 Align the optical axis following the instruction on the

screen.

Refer to “How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness

Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/
OP-88285/OP-88286)” (Page A-2) for details.
Refer to “How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness
Measurement (For High Precision Head CL-S015) (OP-88864)” (Page
A-10) for details.

4-16 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 5
Display Panel

Basic Operation of the Display Panel..................... 5-2

Each mode display by key operation.................................... 5-2
Character display of the Display Panel................................ 5-2
Number input of the Display Panel....................................... 5-3

Switching Program................................................... 5-4

Switching the Measurement Value Display............ 5-4
Switching the top display and bottom display....................... 5-4
Changing the display settings.............................................. 5-4
5
Changing Tolerance Settings.................................. 5-5

Display panel
Restore the Device Setting to Factory Defaults.... 5-5
Each Function Setting.............................................. 5-6
Hierarchical list of the menu in the settings mode................ 5-6
Display panel operation........................................................ 5-7

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 5-1

 Basic Operation of the Display Panel

Basic Operation of the Display Panel

Use the display panel keys to switch the display and change settings.

Each mode display by key operation

Each mode can be displayed by key operation.

Program switching mode Display settings mode

PRG+1 OUT+01
Press the Press the ENT key
PROGRAM key disp1
You can call the program and Switch the display contents of the
change the settings. measurement value.
“Switching Program” (Page 5-4) “Changing the display settings” (Page 5-4)

Hold the SET key for one second

5 Press the SET key

Tolerance setting mode Setup Mode

Display panel

OUT+01 HEAD
LIMIT
Set the upper limit or lower limit, hysteresis and Change each function setting such as the
others in the tolerance setting mode. head and measurement processing.
“Changing Tolerance Settings” (Page 5-5) “Each Function Setting” (Page 5-6)
Refer to “Display panel (CL-D500)” (Page 1-6) for more information about each button function.

Character display of the Display Panel

The characters displayed in the display panel are as follows:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 -

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

5-2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Basic Operation of the Display Panel

Number input of the Display Panel

When setting numerical values on the display, the operations of the keys are as follows:

Key Operation

If a digit is blinking, increase one number.

If all digits are blinking, switch plus/minus of the value.

Shift digit selection to the right.

When held (for three seconds), return the displayed numerical value to
the initial value.

An example if setting the measured value 1

+00.0000
mesur1

00.0000
mesur1
00.0000
mesur1
00.0000
mesur1
00.0000
mesur1
5

Display panel
10.0000 01.0000 00.0001
mesur1 mesur1 mesur1

90.0000 09.0000 00.0009

mesur1 mesur1 mesur1

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 5-3

 Switching Program

Switching Program
Pressing the [PROGRAM] key in the status of the measurement value display enters into the program switching mode.
Change the program number using the key, and select the program with the [ENT] key.
Measurement value display Select the program No.

+12.3456 PRG+0 PRG+3

0.6789

Switching the Measurement Value Display

5
Switching the top display and bottom Changing the display settings
Display panel

display In the display settings mode, you can set the OUT number displayed on
the top and bottom of the display panel.
You can switch the measurement value display by pressing the key
Measurement value display Top display settings
during measurement.
Display simultaneously (initial setting)
+12.3456 out+01
+12.3456
0.6789 disp1
0.6789 Select the OUT number to be
displayed on the top using the key

Bottom display settings

+12.3456 out+01
0.6789 disp2
Top display (single) Bottom display (single)
Select the OUT number to
be displayed on the bottom
using the key

5-4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Changing Tolerance Settings

Changing Tolerance Settings

Pressing the [SET] key in the status of measurement value display enters into the tolerance settings mode.
By selecting the applicable OUT number using the key and pressing the [ENT] key, you can set “upper limit”, “lower limit”, and “hysteresis”.
Refer to “Number input of the Display Panel” (Page 5-3) for how to enter numbers in the display panel.
Measurement value display

+12.3456
0.6789

OUT No. selection Upper limit input Lower limit input Hysteresis input

out+01 05.0000 +05.0000 00.0000

Limit 01+hi 01+lo 01+hys

5
out+02

Display panel
Limit

out+08
Limit

Restore the Device Setting to Factory Defaults

Disable all setting contents and restore the unit to factory defaults.

1 Hold the [ENT] key while turning on the power.

“Init” (INIT) is displayed at the top of the display panel.

2 When “OK” (OK) flashes in the lower of the measurement value display parts, press the [ENT] key again.
The settings of this unit are initialized to factory default settings. The display returns to the status of measurement value display.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 5-5

 Each Function Setting

Each Function Setting

Hierarchical list of the menu in the settings mode

Display/Setting item Setting value Ref.
Search mode settings • AUTO (initial value)
5-8
Search threshold [AUTO/MANUAL] • MANUAL
[DETECT] Threshold setting 0 - 170
5-8
[BORDER] (Initial value: 50)
Head number
Head Settings selection Median filter Median filter settings
OFF (initial value) /7/15/31 5-8
[HEAD] [HEAD-01] - [MEDIAN]
[HEAD-06]
Calibration of light intensity start
Calibration of light Start
intensity 5-9
[CALIB] Calibration of light intensity completed
Stop

Invalidation number 0 - 9999

Invalid data processing [HOLD] (Initial value: 8)
5-11
[INVLID] Recovery number 0 - 9999
[RETURN] (Initial value: 0)
Measured value 1 settings -999999 - 999999

5
[MESUR1] (Initial value: 0)
OUT No.
OUT settings Selection Display value 1 settings -999999 - 999999
[OUT] [OUT-01] - Scaling [DISP1] (Initial value: 0)
[OUT-08] 5-11
[SCAL] Measured value 2 settings -999999 - 999999
Display panel

[MESUR2] (Initial value: 1)

Display value 2 settings -999999 - 999999
[DISP2] (Initial value: 1)
Offset Offset settings -999999 - 999999
5-11
[OFFSET] [OFFSET] (Initial value: 0)
• 9,600 bps
• 19,200 bps
Baud rate settings
• 38,400 bps
[A-B]
RS232C • 57,600 bps
• 115,200 bps (Initial value) 5-13
[RS232]
• NONE (initial value)
Parity settings
• EVEN
[A-P]
• ODD
• BOOTP -> Fixed IP add (initial value)
Setting of IP address at Operation setting of IP address at
[BO-STA]
the next power on the next power on 5-14
• Fixed IP address [STATIC]
[B-0 : NEX-ON] [B-N]
• BOOTP [BOOOTP]
Field 0 settings 0 - 255
[A-FLD0] (Initial value: 192)
Field 1 settings 0 - 255
IP address [A-FLD1] (Initial value: 168)
5-14
[B-1 : IPADR] Field 2 settings 0 - 255
[A-FLD2] (Initial value: 0)

Communication Field 3 settings 0 - 255

settings [A-FLD3] (Initial value: 1)
[COM] Field 0 settings 0 - 255
[M-FLD0] (Initial value: 255)

Ethernet Field 1 settings 0 - 255

[ETHER] Subnet mask [M-FLD1] (Initial value: 255)
5-15
[B-2 : S-MASK] Field 2 settings 0 - 255
[M-FLD2] (Initial value: 255)
Field 3 settings 0 - 255
[M-FLD3] (Initial value: 0)
Field 0 settings 0 - 255
[G-FLD0] (Initial value: 192)
Field 1 settings 0 - 255
Gateway [G-FLD1] (Initial value: 168)
5-15
[B-3 : GATEWY] Field 2 settings 0 - 255
[G-FLD2] (Initial value: 0)
Field 3 settings 0 - 255
[G-FLD3] (Initial value: 254)
Port number Port number settings 0 - 65535
5-15
[B-4 : PORT] [PORT] (Initial value: 24685)

5-6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Each Function Setting

Display panel operation

Setting item selection

Holding the [SET] key in the status of measurement value display enters into the settings mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the display switches between “Head settings”, “OUT settings”, and “Communication settings”.

By pressing the [SET] key during the measurement mode settings, the setting changes are discarded and settings return to their
original state.

Setting item selection

Measurement value
display Head Settings

+12.3456 (Long-press) HEAD

“Selecting the Head Settings Menu” (Page 5-7)

0.6789

OUT settings

OUT
“Selecting the OUT Settings Menu” (Page 5-10)

Display panel
Communication setting

com
“Selecting the Communication Settings Menu”
(Page 5-12)

Selecting the Head Settings Menu

Selecting “Head Settings” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into “Head number selection”.
By selecting the applicable head number using the key and pressing the [ENT] key, the head settings can be edited.
Selecting the head
settings menu
Head Settings Head number selection Search threshold

HEAD head01 ABC

“Search Threshold setting”
(Page 5-8)
head01 DETECT

Median filter

head02 ABC
“Median Filter Settings”
(Page 5-8)
head02 median

Calibration of light
intensity

head06 ABC
“Calibration of Light Intensity”
(Page 5-9)
head06 CALIB

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 5-7

 Each Function Setting

„ Search Threshold setting

Selecting [DETECT] in the “Selecting the head settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “Search mode settings”.
Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL], and press the [ENT] key.
If selecting [MANUAL], set “Threshold” and press the [ENT] key.
Refer to “Threshold setting” (Page 3-14) for details on the setting contents.
Search mode settings
Selecting the head
settings menu AUTO

ABC a+0
DETECT auto

Threshold setting
MANUAL

a+1 050
manual border

5
„ Median Filter Settings
Display panel

Selecting [MEDIAN] in the “Selecting the head settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “Median filter settings”.
Select the median filter number to be used, and press the [ENT] key.
Refer to “Median filter” (Page 3-14) for details on the setting contents.
Selecting the head
settings menu Median filter settings

ABC b+0
median off

b+1
7

b+2
15

b+3
31

5-8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Each Function Setting

„ Calibration of Light Intensity

Selecting [CALIB] in the “Selecting the head settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “Calibration of light intensity”.
By pressing the [ENT] key, the calibration of light intensity is executed. The key operation is disabled while executing the calibration of light intensity (START:
On status).
• After completing the calibration of light intensity execution (STOP: blink), by pressing the [ENT] key, the execution results are acquired and the
calibration of light intensity is completed.
• If the calibration of light intensity fails, an error code appears. Refer to “Error Messages” (Page A-16) for more details.
Key operation disabled
(two seconds)

Calibration of light
Calibration of Calibration of light intensity execution Calibration of light
Selecting the head light intensity intensity in execution completed intensity completed
settings menu

ABC start start stop stop

CALIB calib calib calib calib
Calibration of light
intensity failed

err+88
calib
Starting calibration of
light intensity failed 5
err+88

Display panel
Measurement value
calib
display

+12.3456
0.6789

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 5-9

 Each Function Setting

Selecting the OUT Settings Menu

Selecting “OUT settings” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into “OUT No. selection”.
By selecting the applicable OUT number using the key and pressing the [ENT] key, the OUT settings can be edited.
Selecting the OUT
settings menu
OUT No. selection
OUT settings Invalid data processing

OUT out+01 ABC

“Setting Invalid Data
Processing” (Page 5-11)
out+01 invlid

Scaling

out+02 ABC
“Scaling Settings”
(Page 5-11)
out+02 scal

5 Offset
Display panel

out+08 ABC
“Offset Settings”
(Page 5-11)
out+08 offset

5-10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Each Function Setting

„ Setting Invalid Data Processing

Selecting [INVLID] in the “Selecting the OUT settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “setting invalid data processing”.
Set “invalidation number” and “recovery number”.
Refer to “Invalid data processing” (Page 3-19) for details on the setting contents.
Refer to “Number input of the Display Panel” (Page 5-3) for how to enter numbers in the display panel.

Selecting the OUT Setting of invalidation Setting of recovery

settings menu number number

ABC 0008 0000

invlid hold return

„ Scaling Settings
Selecting [SCAL] in the “Selecting the OUT settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “scaling settings”.
Set all measured / display values.
Refer to “Scaling” (Page 3-16) for details on the setting contents.
Refer to “Number input of the Display Panel” (Page 5-3) for how to enter numbers in the display panel.
Selecting the OUT
settings menu Measured value 1 settings Display value 1 settings

ABC 00.0000 00.0000

scal mesur1 disp1 5

Display panel
Measured value 2 settings Display value 2 settings

01.0000 01.0000
mesur2 disp2

„ Offset Settings
Selecting [OFFSET] in the “Selecting the OUT settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “offset settings”.
Set the offset value, and press the [ENT] key.
Refer to “Offset” (Page 3-16) for details on the setting contents.
Refer to “Number input of the Display Panel” (Page 5-3) for how to enter numbers in the display panel.
Selecting the OUT
settings menu Offset settings

ABC 00.0000
offset offset

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 5-11

 Each Function Setting

Selecting the Communication Settings Menu

Selecting “Communication setting” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into “Selecting the communication settings menu”.
Select “RS-232C” or “Ethernet” by pressing the key, and press [ENT] key.
If selecting “Ethernet”, select the applicable Ethernet setting menu option by using the key.
Selecting the communication
settings menu
Communication
setting RS-232C

com ab
“RS-232C Settings (Baud Rate Settings and Parity Settings)”
(Page 5-13)
rs232

Selecting the Ethernet

settings menu

Setting of IP address
Ethernet at the next power on

ab b+n0
“Setting of IP Address at the
Next Power On” (Page 5-14)
ether nex+on

5
Display panel

IP address

b+n1
“Setting of IP Address”
(Page 5-14)
ipadr

Subnet mask

b+n2
“Setting of the Subnet
Mask” (Page 5-15)
s+mask

Gateway

b+n3
“Setting of the Gateway”
(Page 5-15)
gatewy

Port number

b+n4
“Setting of the Port
Number” (Page 5-15)
port

5-12 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Each Function Setting

„ RS-232C Settings (Baud Rate Settings and Parity Settings)

Selecting [RS232] in the “Selecting the communication settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “Baud rate settings”.
Select the baud rate number to be used, and press the [ENT] key.
Next, go to “Parity settings”. Select the parity settings number to be used, and press the [ENT] key.

Baud rate settings Parity settings

RS-232C settings

ab a+b0 a+p0
rs232 9600 non

a+b1 a+p1
19200 even

5
a+b2 a+p2

Display panel
38400 odd

a+b3
57600

a+b4
115200

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 5-13

 Each Function Setting

„ Setting of IP Address at the Next Power On

Selecting [NEX-ON] in the “Selecting the Ethernet settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “Setting of IP address at the next power on”.
Select how to acquire the address during next power on, and press the [ENT] key.
Refer to “Setting of IP Address at the Next Power On” (Page 4-2) for details on the setting contents.

Selecting the Ethernet Setting of IP address

settings menu at the next power on

b+0 b+n0
nex+on bo+sta

b+n1
static

5
b+n2
Display panel

bootp

„ Setting of IP Address
Selecting [IPADR] in the “Selecting the Ethernet settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “Setting of IP address”.
Set the addresses per field, and press the [ENT] key.
Refer to “Number input of the Display Panel” (Page 5-3) for how to enter numbers in the display panel.

Selecting the Ethernet Setting of the IP address

settings menu (settings by field)

b+1 192 168

ipadr a+fld0 a+fld1

000 001
a+fld2 a+fld3

5-14 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Each Function Setting

„ Setting of the Subnet Mask

Selecting [S-MASK] in the “Selecting the Ethernet settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “Setting of the subnet mask”.
Set the addresses per field, and press the [ENT] key.
Refer to “Number input of the Display Panel” (Page 5-3) for how to enter numbers in the display panel.

Selecting the Ethernet Setting of the subnet mask

settings menu (settings by field)

b+2 255 255

s+mask m+fld0 m+fld1

255 000
m+fld2 m+fld3

„ Setting of the Gateway

Selecting [GATEWY] in the “Selecting the Ethernet settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “Setting of the gateway”.
5
Set the addresses per field, and press the [ENT] key.

Display panel
Refer to “Number input of the Display Panel” (Page 5-3) for how to enter numbers in the display panel.

Selecting the Ethernet Setting of the gateway

settings menu (settings by field)

b+3 192 168

gatewy g+fld0 g+fld2

000 254
g+fld2 g+fld3

„ Setting of the Port Number

Selecting [PORT] in the “Selecting the Ethernet settings menu” and pressing the [ENT] key enters into the “Setting of the port number”.
Set the port number, and press the [ENT] key.
Refer to “Number input of the Display Panel” (Page 5-3) for how to enter numbers in the display panel.

Selecting the Ethernet Setting of the port

settings menu number

b+4 24685
port port

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 5-15

 Each Function Setting

MEMO

5
Display panel

5-16 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 6
I/O Terminal

Names and Functions of the I/O Terminals............ 6-2

Functions of the I/O Terminals.............................................. 6-2
Functions of the Input/Output Signals.................................. 6-4
Input/Output Circuit.............................................................. 6-5

Timing Charts........................................................... 6-7

Representative terminal operation at startup....................... 6-7
N.O./N.C. setting reflection timing at startup........................ 6-7
Response delay time............................................................ 6-7
Terminal operation when the hold mode is “Normal”............ 6-8
Terminal operation when the hold mode is
“Peak hold/Bottom hold/Peak-to-peak hold/Average hold”,
and the update condition is “External Timing 1”................... 6-8
Terminal operation when the hold mode is
6
“Peak hold/Bottom hold/Peak-to-peak hold/Average hold”,

I/O Terminal
and the update condition is “External Timing 2”................... 6-9
The terminal operation when the hold mode is
“Sample hold”, and the update condition is
“External Timing 1”............................................................... 6-9
The terminal operation when the hold mode is
“Sample hold”, and the update condition is
“External Timing 2”............................................................. 6-10
The terminal operation when the update condition
of the hold processing is “Internal Timing”.......................... 6-10
Terminal operation when the hold mode is
“Auto peak hold”................................................................. 6-11
Terminal operation of Auto Zero......................................... 6-11
Terminal operation of Switch Program............................... 6-12
Terminal operation of Storage............................................ 6-12
Terminal operation of Emission stop.................................. 6-13
Terminal operation of Stop Measurement.......................... 6-13
In the case of Encoder Trigger (Skipping point 2).............. 6-13
Output Logic with Different Judgment Output Modes......... 6-14

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 6-1

 Names and Functions of the I/O Terminals

Names and Functions of the I/O Terminals

This section describes the names and functions of the I/O terminals of the controller (I/O terminal blocks) and the input terminal of the encoder unit.

Functions of the I/O Terminals

This section describes the overview and functions of each I/O terminal.

Controller
„ Input Terminal Block
Used for control input, etc.
Compatible socket blocks (Mounted on the main unit): 15EDGKD-2.5-14P-14-12A(H) (Degson Electronics)
Compatible cable specifications: AWG20 to 28, Tip processing length 8 mm

No. Terminal name Assigned terminal *1 N.O./N.C. *1 Contents

1 IN1 Zero 1 N.O. Auto ZERO 1 input

IN1
IN2
2 IN2 Zero 2 N.O. Auto ZERO 2 input
IN3
IN4
IN5
3 IN3 Reset 1 N.O. Reset 1 input
IN6
IN7 4 IN4 Reset 2 N.O. Reset 2 input
IN8
IN9 5 IN5 Timing 1 N.O. Timing 1 input
IN10
IN11 6 IN6 Timing 2 N.O. Timing 2 input
IN12
IN13
7 IN7 Clear storage N.O. Clear storage data
COMI

6
8 IN8 Program bit0 N.O.

9 IN9 Program bit1 N.O. Specify switch destination program No.

10 IN10 Program bit2 N.O.

I/O Terminal

11 IN11 Switch Program N.O. Switch program No.

12 IN12 Light off N.O. Emission stop input

13 IN13 Stop measurement N.O. Stop measurement input

14 COMI - - Common for inputs

*1 Initial value. The assignment setting can be changed as desired. Refer to “I/O terminal settings” (Page
4-3) for more details.

„ Output terminal block

Used for judgment/state output.
Compatible socket blocks (Mounted on the main unit): 15EDGKD-2.5-12P-14-12A(H) (Degson Electronics)
Compatible cable specifications: AWG20 to 28, Tip processing length 8 mm

No. Terminal name Assigned terminal *1 N.O./N.C. *1 Contents

1 OUT1 Judgment output 1 N.O. Judgment output 1

OUT1
OUT2
2 OUT2 Judgment output 2 N.O. Judgment output 2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
3 OUT3 Judgment output 3 N.O. Judgment output 3
OUT6
OUT7
4 OUT4 Judgment output 4 N.O. Judgment output 4
OUT8
OUT9 Measurement valid
5 OUT5 N.O. Measurement value valid status 1 output
OUT
10 status 1
OUT
11
COMO Measurement valid
6 OUT6 N.O. Measurement value valid status 2 output
status 2

7 OUT7 Strobe 1 N.O. Strobe 1 output

8 OUT8 Strobe 2 N.O. Strobe 2 output

9 OUT9 RUN N.O. Measurement is live

10 OUT10 Warning N.O. System warning output

11 OUT11 Error N.O. System error output

12 COMO - - Common for outputs

*1 Initial value. The assignment setting can be changed as desired. Refer to “I/O terminal settings” (Page
4-3) for more details.

6-2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Names and Functions of the I/O Terminals

Expansion analog unit (CL-H150)

Compatible socket blocks (Mounted on the main unit) : FK-MCP1.5/15-ST-3.5 (Phoenix Contact)
Compatible cable specifications : AWG16 to 28, Tip processing length 9 mm

No. Terminal name Contents

1 CH1 CH1 analog voltage output + terminal

CH1
0V
2 0V CH1 analog GND
CH2
3 CH2 CH2 analog voltage output + terminal
0V
CH3
4 0V CH2 analog GND
0V
CH 4 5 CH3 CH3 analog voltage output + terminal
0V
6 0V CH3 analog GND
7 CH4 CH4 analog voltage output + terminal
8 0V CH4 analog GND

Encoder unit (CL-E100)

Compatible socket blocks (Mounted on the main unit) : FK-MCP1.5/15-ST-3.5 (Phoenix Contact)
Compatible cable specifications : AWG16 to 28, Tip processing length 9 mm

No. Terminal name Contents

1 A24V 24V specification A-phase input

A
24V
A
12V 2 A12V 12V specification A-phase input
A
5V
A
COM-
3 A5V 5V specification/Line driver A-phase input
B
24V
B
12V
4 ACOM- A-phase Common terminal
B

6
5V
B
COM-
5 B24V 24V specification B-phase input
Z

6 B12V 12V specification B-phase input

24V
Z
12V
Z
5V
Z 7 B5V 5V specification/Line driver B-phase input
COM-
N.C.
8 BCOM- B-phase Common terminal

I/O Terminal
5V
OUT
0V
OUT 9 Z24V 24V specification Z-phase input
10 Z12V 12V specification Z-phase input
11 Z5V 5V specification/Line driver Z-phase input
12 ZCOM- Z-phase Common terminal
13 N.C. Not connected
14 5VOUT Service power supply 5V output
15 0VOUT Service power supply GND

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 6-3

 Names and Functions of the I/O Terminals

Functions of the Input/Output Signals

This section explains the functions of the I/O signals.

I/O Signals Function I/O Signals Function

Resets the measured value of OUT assigned Stored data is cleared when the input signal is
to reset 1/2. Storage clear
Reset ON.
Judgment output will be in standby until the
measurement value is updated. Switches the signal ON while the data are
being stored by the storage function.
Holds the measured value of OUT assigned to Storage in When the storage data reaches the specified
Timing
timing 1/2. operation number of stored data items, the storage
Sets the measured value of OUT assigned to operation and the signal output will both be
ZERO 1/2 to zero. switched OFF.
Zero
Auto ZERO will be canceled when it stays ON The signal is ON when the internal measured
for two seconds or longer. values of all OUTs assigned to timing 1/2 and
reset 1/2 are no longer in judgment standby
Switches to the program No. selected in Measurement valid
state (------).
the program bit terminal when the program status
This signal is used to judge whether or not
switching terminal(s) become ON. a timing can be inserted after switching
Program Program Program Program programs.
No. bit2 bit1 bit0
Updates the signal output when any of
0 OFF OFF OFF the measured values of OUTs used in the
Program bit, 1 OFF OFF ON “Judgment output settings” of each judgment
Switch Program output is updated.
2 OFF ON OFF
The signal is also updated when the measured
3 OFF ON ON Judgment output
value becomes a judgment standby status
4 ON OFF OFF during finalization of the measured value, zero
input, or reset input.
5 ON OFF ON
(The strobe terminal is switched ON at the
6 ON ON OFF same time.)
7 ON ON ON
Switches the signal ON when a system error

6 Stop Measurement
Stops the measurement while the input signal
is ON. OUT measurement will be in standby
while the measurement is stopped.
Error
occurs.
All inputs are ignored and all outputs are OFF
while in the system error state.
This signal is used to suspend measurement Switches the signal ON when a warning is
I/O Terminal

while the emission is active. detected by the controller.

Warning example:
Light off Stops the emission while the input signal is ON. Warning An optical unit requiring a light intensity
Performs the storage function while the input calibration is connected.
Storage start/stop An optical unit having a FAN error is
signal is ON.
connected.
Switches the applicable strobe terminal ON
Strobe when any of the judgment output terminals Switches the signal ON during operation
assigned to strobe terminals 1/2 is updated. (measurement).
RUN
The signal is switched OFF during program
Switches the signal ON when the storage data switching and setting changes.
Storage FULL have reached the specified number of stored
data items. If a trigger could not be issued in response to a
trigger request via the expansion unit (encoder
unit), pulse output will become active for a
Trigger error certain time period (100 ms).
If a trigger cannot be issued again during the
pulse output, the ON duration of the pulse
output will be extended.

6-4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Names and Functions of the I/O Terminals

• When connecting an output from the controller to a PLC with a

Input/Output Circuit positive common
IN

Poly Switch

Controller OUT

„ Input circuit
• Max. applied voltage : 26.4V
• ON voltage : 19V or greater COMOUT*
• OFF current : 0.1mA or less
COM(+)
12kΩ
IN PLC Input circuit Output circuit
Positive common
7.5kΩ • When connecting an output from the controller to a relay

COMIN*
Poly Switch
Load
OUT

z Connection example :
When connecting an NPN PLC output to the system input
COMOUT*

OUT IN

Relay Output circuit

z Connection example: When connecting the controller’s

COM(-) COMIN* output with a negative common
If the input instrument is compatible with the PNP open
PLC (NPN outputs) Input circuit collector outputs, then refer to this connection example.

z Connection example :
When connecting a PNP output to the controller input
• When connecting an output from the controller to a PLC with a
negative common
IN
6

I/O Terminal
IN Poly Switch

OUT

COM(+)
COMIN*
COMOUT*

COM(-)
Input circuit
OUT
PLC Input circuit Output circuit
Negative common
PLC (PNP outputs) • When connecting an output from the controller to a relay

„ Output circuit Load

Poly Switch

• Max. applied voltage : 30V OUT

• Max. sink current : 50mA
• Leakage current : 0.1mA or less
• Residual voltage : 1.4V or less (50mA) / 1.0V or less (20mA)
COMOUT*
Poly Switch

OUT

Relay Output circuit

Expansion analog unit (CL-H150)

COMOUT

„ Output circuit
Since this unit utilizes a photo MOSFET in the output
Internal circuit

elements, any one of the NPN inputs, or PNP inputs is 47Ω 47Ω
Point connectable. Voltage output

0V
z Connection example: When connecting the controller’s
output with a positive common
If the input instrument is compatible with the NPN open Voltage output
collector outputs, then refer to this connection example. Output range ±10.8 V (measurement value: ±10.5 V)
Resolution 2 mV
±0.05% of F.S.
Accuracy
(F.S. = 20 V, accuracy in terms of the display value)
Output impedance Approx. 100Ω
Approx. 10 μs
Response delay time
(after updating the measurement value)

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 6-5

 Names and Functions of the I/O Terminals

Encoder unit
A/B/Z-phase

Item 5V DC
24V DC 12V DC
When open collector is used When line driver is used

Maximum input rating 28.8V DC 14.4V DC 6.0V DC

Minimum ON voltage 19.0V DC 9.6V DC 3.0V DC AM26LS31 equivalent

Maximum OFF voltage 4.8V DC 2.4V DC 1.0V DC

Maximum OFF current 0.1mA -

Input current TYP 5.4mA TYP 6.9mA

„ Input circuit
2.2kΩ
A24V/B24V/Z24V
1.6kΩ
A12V/B12V/Z12V
150Ω 150Ω
A5V/B5V/Z5V

1.8kΩ

200Ω
ACOM-/BCOM-/ZCOM-

z Connection example: When the encoder has NPN open collector output
6
*A wiring example when connecting a DC 12V power supply
2.2kΩ Shielded twisted
A24V/B24V/Z24V pair wire NPN open collector output of
12V
1.6kΩ the encoder
I/O Terminal

A12V/B12V/Z12V
150Ω 150Ω
A5V/B5V/Z5V

1.8kΩ

200Ω
OUT
ACOM-/BCOM-/ZCOM- A-phase/
Input circuit B-phase/
Z-phase
COM(-)

z Connection example: When the encoder has PNP open collector output
*A wiring example when connecting a DC 12V power supply
2.2kΩ Shielded twisted pair A-phase/
A24V/B24V/Z24V wire B-phase/ PNP open collector output of
1.6kΩ Z-phase the encoder
A12V/B12V/Z12V
150Ω 150Ω
A5V/B5V/Z5V

1.8kΩ

200Ω
COM(+)
ACOM-/BCOM-/ZCOM-
12V
Input circuit

OUT

z Connection example: When the encoder has line driver output

2.2kΩ
A24V/B24V/Z24V Line driver output of the
1.6kΩ Shielded twisted A-phase/ encoder
A12V/B12V/Z12V pair wire B-phase/
150Ω 150Ω
Z-phase+
A5V/B5V/Z5V

1.8kΩ

200Ω

ACOM-/BCOM-/ZCOM- A-phase/
Input circuit B-phase/
Z-phase-

6-6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Timing Charts

Timing Charts

Representative terminal operation at startup

Power
supply
M

(1)

RUN

(2)
Measurement
value valid
status 1/2
A

(3)
Judgment
output
1-8

250μs B B

Strobe 1/2

(1) When switching to the measurement mode, the RUN output turns ON.
(2) The Measurement value valid status output turns ON when the internal measured values of all OUTs allocated to timing/reset are no longer in

A
the judgment standby status (------).
(3) Read the judgment ouput by synchronizing it with the strobe output rising.

Update cycle A = B x 2 (max. speed: Strobe time 0.5 ms x 2 = 1 ms)

6

I/O Terminal
B Strobe time Refer to “Strobe Time” (Page 4-3).
When the sampling cycle is 100 µs : Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times + 550 µs
D Reset time When the sampling cycle is 200 µs or more : Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times + 650 µs
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
M Start up time M = 10 s or less

N.O./N.C. setting reflection timing at startup

Power
supply
M
(1)
Open N.O.
Output
terminal
Close N.C.
(1) By default, terminals set to N.C. will start up as OPEN until M time has passed from the power supply turning on.

M Start up time M = 10 s or less

Response delay time

Distance to target

(1)
Measurement
value output

(1) Response delay time (N) is the time from recognition of the target to measurement value output.

Response delay When the sampling cycle is 100 µs : N = 600 µs to 700 µs

M
time When the sampling cycle is 200 µs or more : N = Sampling cycle + (600 µs to 700 µs)

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 6-7

 Timing Charts

Terminal operation when the hold mode is “Normal”

A

(1) (2) (2) D D

Judgment
output (3)
1-8
250μs B B

Strobe 1/2

Measurement
value valid
status 1/2
C C C C

Timing 1/2

C C

Reset 1/2
E

(1) Read the judgment output by synchronizing it with the strobe output rising.
(2) If the timing input is turned ON, the judgment output just before is held.
(3) If the reset input is turned ON when the timing input is ON, the judgment standby state is entered until the timing input is turned OFF.

A Update cycle A = B x 2 (max. speed: Strobe time 0.5 ms x 2 = 1 ms)

B Strobe time Refer to “Strobe Time” (Page 4-3).
C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs
Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).

6 M Start up time M = 10 s or less

Terminal operation when the hold mode is “Peak hold/Bottom hold/Peak-to-peak

I/O Terminal

hold/Average hold”, and the update condition is “External Timing 1”

Judgment
output
1-8
250μs B 250μs B 250μs B

(2) (2) (2)

Strobe 1/2

(1) (4)
Measurement
value valid F F F
status 1/2
D
C C C

Timing 1/2
E
C
(3)
Reset 1/2
E

(1) T he sampling period of the hold mode is (the first time only) the period from the measurement start to the time when the first timing input turns
ON. The sampling period other than the first time is the period from the timing input ON to the next timing input ON.
(2) The strobe output turns ON 250 µs after the measurement value and judgment output are updated. Read the judgment output by synchronizing
it with the strobe output rising.
(3) If the reset input turns ON, the judgment output returns to the judgment standby status after the input response time (C). The Measurement
value valid status output also turns OFF.
(4) The sampling period after the reset input is the period from the time when the Measurement value valid status output turns ON to the time
when the next timing input turns ON.

B Strobe time Refer to “Strobe Time” (Page 4-3).

C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs
Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).
F Sampling period

6-8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Timing Charts

Terminal operation when the hold mode is “Peak hold/Bottom hold/Peak-to-peak

hold/Average hold”, and the update condition is “External Timing 2”
Judgment
output
1-8
250μs B 250μs B 250μs B

Strobe 1/2 (2) (2) (2)

(1) (4)
Measurement
value valid F F F
status 1/2
C C D C C D D C

Timing 1/2
E
C
(3)
Reset 1/2

(1) T he sampling period of the hold mode is (the first time only) the period from the measurement start to the time when the first timing input turns
ON.
The sampling period other than the first time is the period from the time when the timing input turns OFF to perform reset processing, to the time
when the next timing input turns ON.
(2) The strobe output turns ON 250 µs after the measurement value and judgment output are updated. Read the judgment output by synchronizing
it with the strobe output rising.
(3) If the reset input turns ON, the judgment output returns to the judgment standby status after the input response time (C). The Measurement
value valid status output also turns OFF.
(4) The sampling period after the reset input is the period from the time when the Measurement value valid status output turns ON to the time
when the next timing input turns ON.

C
B Strobe time
Input response time
Refer to “Strobe Time” (Page 4-3).
Max. C = E + 300 µs
Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times
6
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).

I/O Terminal
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).
F Sampling period

The terminal operation when the hold mode is “Sample hold”, and the update
condition is “External Timing 1”
Judgment
output
1-8
250μs B 250μs B 250μs B

Strobe 1/2

Measurement
value valid
status 1/2
D
C C C
(1) (3)
Timing 1/2
E
C
(2)
Reset 1/2

(1) T he measurement value and the judgment output are updated after the input response time (C) since the timing input turns ON, and 250 µs
after this, the strobe output turns ON.
Read the judgment output by synchronizing it with the strobe output rising.
(2) If the reset input turns ON, the judgment output returns to the judgment standby status after the input response time (C). The Measurement
value valid status output also turns OFF.
(3) After a reset input, the measured value valid status output turns OFF. A timing input can be turned on once the measurement value valid status
is back on.

B Strobe time Refer to “Strobe Time” (Page 4-3).

C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs
Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 6-9

 Timing Charts

The terminal operation when the hold mode is “Sample hold”, and the update
condition is “External Timing 2”
Judgment
output
1-8
250μs B 250μs B 250μs B

Strobe 1/2 (2) (2) (2)

D
Measurement
value valid
status 1/2
C D C D C D C D
(1)
Timing 1/2
E E E E
C C
(3)
Reset 1/2

E E

(1) T he measurement value and judgment output are updated after the timing input turns ON, after waiting for the measurement sample with
averaging to be collected (C+D).
(2) The strobe output turns ON 250 µs after the measurement value and judgment output are updated. Read the judgment output by synchronizing
it with the strobe output rising.
(3) If the reset input turns ON, the judgment output returns to the judgment standby status after the input response time (C). The Measurement
value valid status output also turns OFF.
B Strobe time Refer to “Strobe Time” (Page 4-3).
C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs
Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times

6
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).
I/O Terminal

The terminal operation when the update condition of the hold processing is
“Internal Timing”
A A A A
Judgment
output (1)
1-8
250μs B 250μs B 250μs B 250μs B

Strobe 1/2 (2) (2) (3) (2)

RUN

D + 400µs
Measurement
value valid
status 1/2
C D

Reset 1/2

(1) The first measurement value and judgment output are updated at the end of the update cycle after the RUN output turns ON.
(2) The strobe output turns ON 250 µs after the measurement value and judgment output are updated. Read the judgment output by synchronizing
it with the strobe output rising.
(3) The strobe output turns ON per update cycle even during judgment standby.

A = The number set in the “internal timing” x Sampling cycle

A Update cycle
(however, max. speed: Strobe time 0.5 ms x 2 = 1 ms)
B Strobe time Refer to “Strobe Time” (Page 4-3).
C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs
Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).

6-10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Timing Charts

Terminal operation when the hold mode is “Auto peak hold”

Output value

Trigger level

Hysteresis (1) (4)

F F F
Judgment
output
1-8
250μs B 250μs B 250μs B

(2)
Strobe 1/2

Measurement
value valid
status 1/2
C D
(3)
Reset 1/2
E

This is explained with the auto peak hold as an example. In the case of the auto bottom hold, “higher”/”lower” is reversed.
(1) The sampling period is from the point where the measurement value is higher than the “level” to the point where the value is lower than the “trigger

6
level” - “hysteresis”.
(2) The strobe output turns ON 250 µs after the measurement value and judgment output are updated. Read the judgment output by synchronizing
it with the strobe output rising.
(3) If the reset input turns ON, the judgment output returns to the judgment standby status after the input response time (C). The Measurement
value valid status output also turns OFF.

I/O Terminal
(4) The sampling period after the reset input is the time when the Measurement value valid status output is ON, to the point when it is lower than
the value of “trigger level” - “hysteresis”.
B Strobe time Refer to “Strobe Time” (Page 4-3).
C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs
Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).
F Sampling period

Terminal operation of Auto Zero

D D D
Judgment
output
1-8

Measurement
value valid
status 1/2
C C C
(1)
(2)
Zero input

E G

(1) If the zero input turns ON, the measurement value and judgment output enter the judgment standby state for the reset time (D).
After this, the measurement value and judgment output are updated to reflect the zero input.
(2) If the zero input turns ON for two seconds or more, the zero input is cleared. If this is the case, the measurement value and judgment output
enter the judgment standby state for the reset time (D).
After this, the measurement value and judgment output are updated to reflect the cleared zero function.

C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs

Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).
G Auto zero clear time 2s

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 6-11

 Timing Charts

Terminal operation of Switch Program

H D
Judgment
output
1-8

RUN

Measurement
value valid
status 1/2
E
Program bit
1/2/3

Switch
Program
E

If specifying the program No. with the ON/OFF status of the program bits 1/2/3, then turning ON the program switching input switches the program to
the specified program No.
C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs
Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).
H Program switching time 100 ms or less when connecting 2 optical units.

6
Terminal operation of Storage

z No overwriting
(1) (2)
I/O Terminal

Storage start/stop

C C C E
(4)
Storage clear
C

Storage in operation

Storing Storing

(3)
Storage FULL

(1) By turning ON the storage start/stop input, the storage starts, and the storage in operation output turns ON.
(2) By turning OFF the storage start/stop input, the storage stops, and the storage in operation output turns OFF.
(3) If the number of the stored data becomes full, the storage FULL output turns ON, and the storage in operation output turns OFF.
(4) By turning ON the storage clear input, the stored data is cleared. Data storage is possible again, and the storage in operation output turns ON.
C Input response time Max. C = 15 ms
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).

z With overwriting
(1) (2)
Storage start/stop Overwrite from the older data

C C C E
(4)
Storage clear
C

Storage in operation

Storing Storing

(3)
Storage FULL

(1) By turning ON the storage start/stop input, the storage starts, and the storage in operation output turns ON.
(2) By turning OFF the storage start/stop input, the storage stops, and the storage in operation output turns OFF.
(3) If the number of the stored data becomes full, the storage FULL output turns ON. With overwriting, the storage in operation output remains ON,
and the older stored data are overwritten.
(4) By turning ON the input of the storage clear, the stored data is cleared, and the storage FULL turns OFF.

C Input response time Max. C = 15 ms

E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).

6-12 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Timing Charts

Terminal operation of Emission stop

(1) (2)
Emission
stop Input E
C C

Light source
emission

D
Measurement
value valid
status 1/2
(1) If the light off input turns ON, emission stops and the Measurement value valid status output also turns OFF.
(2) If the light off input turns OFF, emission starts and the Measurement value valid status output turns ON after the reset time (D).
C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs
In the case of the sampling cycle is 100 µs : Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times + 550 µs
D Reset time In the case of the sampling cycle is 200 µs or more : Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times + 650 µs
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).

Terminal operation of Stop Measurement

D

Judgment
output
1-8

Measurement
value valid

6
status 1/2
C C D D
(1) (2)
Measurement
stop input
E E E

I/O Terminal
(1) B
 y turning ON the stop measurement input, the measurement stops, and the measurement value and judgment output enter the judgment
standby state. The Measurement value valid status output also turns OFF.
(2) By turning OFF the stop measurement input, the measurement starts, and the measurement value and judgment output are updated.
C Input response time Max. C = E + 300 µs
Max. D = Sampling cycle x Averaging times
D Reset time
Refer to “Sampling cycle” (Page 3-4).
E Minimum input time Refer to “Minimum Input Time” (Page 4-3).

In the case of Encoder Trigger (Skipping point 2)

L or more Less than L L or more

Pulse count 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J J 100ms J
(2)
Trigger error output

(1) (1) (1)

Encoder trigger
(internal signal)

(1) Whenever the encoder count value changes by 2 values, the encoder trigger is input.
(2) If the input interval of the encoder trigger is less than the sampling cycle, the encoder trigger is disabled, and the trigger error output turns ON.

J Encoder response time Refer to “Minimum input time” (Page 4-4) in the encoder set.
Encoder trigger L = Sampling cycle + 5 µs
L
issued interval (however, in the case that [Multi light intensity control] is ON in the spot type head: L = Sampling cycle x 4 + 5 µs)
When the encoder trigger (internal signal) is issued, the measurement value is sampled once.

CL-S015EX cannot use the encoder operation mode “TRIGGER”.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 6-13

 Timing Charts

Output Logic with Different Judgment Output Modes

The change of the OUT01, OUT02, and OUT03 measurement values and change of each GO output are displayed by output mode.
This section explains an example where the judgment output 1 and 2 logic is as follows:
• Judgment output 1 turns ON when OUT01 is GO
• Judgment output 2 turns ON when OUT01 or OUT02 are GO

Upper limit
Measured value
of OUT01
Lower limit

Upper limit
Measured value
of OUT02
Lower limit

z When the output mode

is [Normal]
(1) (2)
Judgment output 1

(1) (2) (1)

Judgment output 2

6 z When the output mode

is [OFF-DELAY] F
(1) (3)
I/O Terminal

Judgment output 1

F
(1) (3) (1)
Judgment output 2

z When the output mode

is [Hold]
(1) (4)
Judgment output 1

(1) (4)
Judgment output 2

C D

Reset 1/2

(1) W hen the judgment changes from OFF to ON, the judgment output turns ON per update cycle regardless of the hold mode (see (4) for an
exception).
(2) When the judgment changes from ON to OFF, the judgment output immediately turns OFF per update cycle in [Normal] mode.
(3) When the judgment changes from ON to OFF, the judgment output turns OFF after a period of time (F) in [OFF-DELAY] mode.
(4) In [Hold] mode, if the judgment output turns ON, the signal is held until the reset input turns ON.

6-14 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 7
Communication
Control

USB Interface............................................................ 7-2

Standard Specifications, Connector Specifications.............. 7-2
Connecting to a PC.............................................................. 7-2

RS-232C Interface..................................................... 7-3

Communication Specifications............................................. 7-3
Connector Specifications...................................................... 7-3

Ethernet Interface..................................................... 7-3

Standard Specifications, Connector Specifications.............. 7-3

Control/Data Output via Commands....................... 7-4

Notes on Command Input/Output......................................... 7-4
Command List...................................................................... 7-4
Command Details................................................................. 7-6

7
Binary Command Detail..................................................... 7-19

Non-procedural Communication via RS-232C..... 7-25

Getting Started................................................................... 7-25
Changing the RS-232C communication settings................ 7-25

Communication control
Connection with a Personal Computer............................... 7-25

Non-procedural Communication via Ethernet..... 7-26

Getting Started................................................................... 7-26
Changing the Ethernet communication settings................. 7-26
One-to-one Connection with a PC...................................... 7-26
Example Telnet Software to Controller TCP/IP
Communication.................................................................. 7-27

Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP................ 7-28

Cyclic and Message Communications............................... 7-28
Cyclic Communication........................................................ 7-29
Message Communication................................................... 7-37

Control/Data Output Using PROFINET................. 7-40

Overview of PROFINET Connection.................................. 7-40
Communication Specifications........................................... 7-40
Cyclic communication specification.................................... 7-40
Changing PROFINET Settings........................................... 7-46
Ethernet settings for PROFINET communication............... 7-46
Alarm communication......................................................... 7-49

Control/Data Output via PLC Link......................... 7-50

Overview of PLC Link Function.......................................... 7-50
Models Supported for PLC Link Connection...................... 7-50
Preparing the PLC.............................................................. 7-51
Outputting the Measurement Data with PLC Link.............. 7-56

Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT................... 7-58

Overview of EtherCAT........................................................ 7-58
Process data object communications................................. 7-58
Changing EtherCAT Settings............................................. 7-61
Mailbox Communications................................................... 7-61
Object Dictionary................................................................ 7-62

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-1

 USB Interface

USB Interface
The USB port of this controller can only be used for connecting to Keyence’s PC application software (CL-NavigatorN). The USB port cannot be used with
any other software.

The connector shield (FG), signal GND, and power GND are common. When there is a potential difference with the destination, a
failure or malfunction of the controller and the destination may result.

Standard Specifications, Connecting to a PC

Connector Specifications You can connect the controller to the PC via the USB port. To connect
the controller to the PC, use the OP-51580 USB cable (2 m, Sold
separately).
z Standard Specifications
• Connector : USB Mini-B female connector Only a single PC can be connected to one controller.
• Standard : USB Version 2.0 compliant, High-Speed supported • If a cable other than OP-51580 or an extension
(Compatible with USB Ver.1.1Full-Speed) cable is used, the controller may not operate
z Connector Specifications correctly.
• Conventional USB devices such as a USB mouse,
The specifications of the USB port of this unit are as shown below.
card reader or thumb drive cannot be connected
to this port.
• Communication may be interrupted due to high
voltage or electrical noise near the system. If
1 communication is interrupted, disconnect and re-
2 connect the USB cable, and restart the software.
• If communication interruption occurs frequently,
3
check the surrounding area for noise sources
4 (inverter, solenoid valve, etc.).
5

System requirements
To connect the controller to a PC via the USB port, a PC with the
following requirements is needed.
• OS : Windows 11 (Pro)

7
Windows 10 (Home/Pro/ Enterprise)
Signal Windows 7 (Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate)
No. Signal Signal Direction
Description Both 32 bit and 64 bit versions are supported.
• USB 2.0 compatible connector
1 GND GND -
Communication control

2 ID - - Installing the USB driver

Differential Signal Before using the USB interface of this controller, you need to install
3 D+ I/O our PC application software and the special USB driver for the
+
CL-3000 Series on your PC. The USB driver is normally installed
Differential Signal automatically with our PC application software. If the driver is not
4 D- I/O installed automatically, you will need to install it manually by following
-
the procedure below.
5 VBUS VBUS -
USB driver installation must be performed by a user
with Administrators privileges.

This section describes how to install the driver, using Windows 10 as an

example.

1 Turn on the controller and the PC.

2 Connect the USB port of the controller to that of the

PC using the OP-51580 cable (Sold separately).

3 Open [Device Manager] on your PC, find the device

for the CL-3000, right click on the device and select
[Update Driver].

4 Click [Browse my computer for driver software] and

manually specify the folder containing the USB driver.
Installation of the USB driver starts.
• If our PC application software is installed, the USB driver
can be found in the following location:
C:\Program Files (x86)\KEYENCE\CL-NavigatorN\driver
The driver can also be downloaded from the KEYENCE
website.
• When you install a driver on the PC, Windows may
display a warning message. If a warning message
appears, click [Continue] to complete the driver
installation.

7-2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 RS-232C Interface

RS-232C Interface Ethernet Interface

This controller can perform non-procedural communications with external The Ethernet port on this controller can be used to communicate with
devices using RS-232C. external equipment in addition to connecting to our PC application
software (CL-NavigatorN). To communicate with external devices, you
can use the non-procedural mode (which has the same commands as
Communication Specifications RS-232C), EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET, or EtherCAT.
The IP address, port number, subnet mask, gateway, etc. in the system
EIA RS-232C compliant (Modem defined) settings of the controller will be used.

Communication
Full duplex
mode Standard Specifications,
Synchronous Start-stop synchronization Connector Specifications
Transmission code ASCII

Data length 8bit

z Standard Specifications
• Connector: RJ-45
• Media: 100BASE-TX
Stop length 1 bit • Communication protocol:
• Non-procedural communication (TCP/IP)
• None (Initial value)
• EtherNet/IP
Parity * • Odd • PLC-Link
• Even • PROFINET
• EtherCAT
• 9600 bps

Baud rate *
•
•
19200 bps
38400 bps
z Connector Specifications
The specifications of the Ethernet port of this unit are as shown below.
• 57600 bps 8
• 115200 bps(Initial value)

Data delimiter CR

Flow control None

* The parity and baud rate in the controller environment settings will 1 (Controller side)
be used.
100BASE-TX

7
No.
Signal Signal direction
Connector Specifications
1 TX + Output
Compatible connector specifications: Modular 6-pin plug connector 2 TX - Output

Communication control
A 2.5 m long RS-232C straight-through cable (OP-96368) is included.
“Optional Product List” (Page 1-4) 3 RX + Input

4 Unused -

5 Unused -

6 RX - Input
1 7 Unused -
2
3 8 Unused -
4
5
6

Terminal No. Signal name Content

1 (Unused) -

2 (Unused) -

Receive from external

3 SD (TXD)
instrument (Input)

4 SG (GND) GND

Send to external instrument

5 RD (RXD)
(Output)

6 (Unused) -

* D o not use unused terminals as it may result in a malfunction.

* SD will be receiving (input to this unit) and RD will be sending (output
from this unit) respectively as defined by the modem.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-3

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Control/Data Output via Commands

This section shows the list of communication control commands, cautions for using commands, and command notations, as well as each command’s
detailed behavior.

Notes on Command Input/Output

When using non-procedural commands Response time

The timing chart for the received and sent commands is as shown
z Number of characters for command parameters below.
For the number of characters for command parameters, enter an
appropriate number of characters specified for each command. An error Received command Receive
will occur if the number of characters is different.

z When an error occurs on command acceptance

An error response “ER, **, nn” will be returned.
Sent command Send
The error response consists of the following information:

○○ Received command that caused the error t

2-digit error code

• 72: Timeout error The time t will be as follows.
• 73: Command length error
Command t
• 74: Undefined command error
nn • 81: State error PW 30 ms + 30 ms x No. of units
• 82: Parameter count error Measurement/
• 83: Parameter range error Control CC, CW 50 ms
• 84: Command specific error (Refer to the command
details) SW, MK 100 ms + 100 ms x No. of units

SW,
Setting/ 30 ms + 30 ms x No. of units
** (Other than MK)
When using number-specified commands Confirmation
(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET) HA 570 ms + 270 ms x No. of units

7
Specification and execution of each command number is processed in AJ 800 ms + 320 ms x No. of units
2 words.
Q0 5 ms
z Execution result Mode change
The error code is written in the command result address as the R0 30 ms + 30 ms x No. of units
Communication control

execution result. The error response consists of the following

information: Other 5 ms

0 Success
The response speed will be slower than the above during
72 Timeout error communication with CL-NavigatorN or connection with an
expansion unit.
73 Command length error

74 Undefined command error

81 Status error

82 Parameter count error

83 Parameter range error

84 - Command specific error (Refer to the command details)

Command List
Measurement
Command type Command content Command Command No. Setup Mode Ref.
Mode

Go to Setup Mode Q0 1 ü ü 7-8

Mode change
Go to Measurement mode R0 2 ü ü 7-8

Measurement value output (Single) MS - ü × 7-8

Measurement value output Measurement value output (Multiple) MM - ü × 7-8

Measurement value output (ALL) MA 3 ü × 7-8

Timing ON/OFF (Single) TS - ü × 7-9

Timing ON/OFF (Multiple) TM 10 ü × 7-9

Timing input Timing ON/OFF (1 specified) T1 11 ü × 7-9

Timing ON/OFF (2 specified) T2 12 ü × 7-9

Timing ON/OFF (1 and 2 specified) TA - ü × 7-9

7-4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Measurement
Command type Command content Command Command No. Setup Mode Ref.
Mode

Auto zero ON/OFF (Single) ZS - ü × 7-9

Auto zero ON/OFF (Multiple) ZM 13 ü × 7-9

Auto zero input Auto zero ON/OFF (1 specified) Z1 14 ü × 7-9

Auto zero ON/OFF (2 specified) Z2 15 ü × 7-9

Auto zero ON/OFF (1 and 2 specified) ZA - ü × 7-9

Reset measurement value (Single) RS - ü × 7-10

Reset measurement value (Multiple) RM 16 ü × 7-10

Reset measurement value (1 specified) R1 17 ü × 7-10

Reset measurement value
Reset measurement value (2 specified) R2 18 ü × 7-10

Reset measurement value (1 and 2

RA - ü × 7-10
specified)

Panel control Locking/unlocking panel operation KL - ü ü 7-10

Switch program No. PW 20 ü × 7-10

Switch program No.
Read program No. PR 21 ü ü 7-10

Measurement control Measurement control MC 40 ü × 7-11

Emission control Emission control LC 41 ü × 7-11

Start automatic transmission NS - ü × 7-11

Automatic transmission
Stop automatic transmission NT - ü × 7-11

Specify mask setting range SW,MK 50 ü ü 7-12

Mask setting
Read mask setting range SR,MK 70 ü ü 7-12

Invalid data processing

Specify invalid data processing

Read invalid data processing

SW,AH

SR,AH
51

71
ü

ü
ü

ü
7-13

7-13
7
Specify scaling setting SW,SC 52 ü ü 7-14

Communication control
Scaling
Read scaling value SR,SC 72 ü ü 7-14

Specify offset SW,OF 53 ü ü 7-15

Offset
Read offset SR,OF 73 ü ü 7-15

Specify tolerance SW,LM 54 ü ü 7-16

Specify tolerance
Read tolerance SR,LM 74 ü ü 7-16

Clear pulse count CC 42 ü × 7-17

Encoder
Get pulse count CR 43 ü × 7-17

Start data storage DS 30 ü × 7-17

Stop data storage DT 31 ü × 7-17

Data storage
Clear data storage DC 32 ü × 7-17

Get storage status DA - ü × 7-17

Light axis match acquisition Light axis match acquisition HA No. 75 ü × 7-18

2 heads thickness measurement

2 heads thickness measurement check AJ No. 76 ü × 7-18
check

z Binary command
Measurement
Command type Command content Command Setup Mode Ref.
Mode

Measurement value output Measurement value output 0x01 ü × 7-20

Get index for fast measurement value output 0x04 ü × 7-20

Fast measurement value output
Fast measurement value output 0x05 ü × 7-21

Get storage data index 0x02 ü × 7-22

Get storage data
Get storage data 0x03 ü × 7-23

Binary commands are available only over Ethernet. Not available with RS-232C.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-5

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Command Details

Command parameter example

Specify ON/OFF.
b • 1 : ON
• 0 : OFF

Specify one target OUT for processing.

x
• Setting value: 1 to 8

Specify the target OUT to be processed.

OUTs are assigned from the beginning e.g. OUT1, OUT2, ... OUT8.
• 0: Do not process
x x x x x x x x • 1: Process
Example: When processing OUT1, OUT3 and OUT6
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

Measurement value get request options.

• Measurement value only
• 1: Measurement value + Measurement result information
• 2: Measurement value + Judgment result
• 3: Measurement value + Measurement result information + Judgment result
m
• 4: Count value + Measurement value
• 5: Count value + Measurement value + Measurement result information
• 6: Count value + Measurement value + Judgment result
• 7: Count value + Measurement value + Measurement result information + Judgment result
Also refer to “Measurement value format” (Page 7-7).

p Specify the program No. (0 to 7).

h Specify the head No. (1 to 6).

o Specify the OUT No. (1 to 8).

7 g g g g g g g
Specify the mask range (Unit: mm).
• Setting range: -999.99 to +999.99 (The value is always signed, and blank digits must be filled with zeros.
The position of the decimal point is fixed.)
NG example: 123.45 (Unsigned), -12.34 (Blank digits are not filled with zeros), +0123.4 (Decimal point is in a
Communication control

different position).

Specify the processing count for the invalid data processing.

a a a a
• Setting value: 0000 to 9999

Pulse count value (11 digits including sign).

c c c c c c c c c c c
• Range: -2147483648 to +2147483647

Data storage status.

• 0: Stop
s
• 1: Storing
• 2: Full

No. of storage data.

d d d d d d d
• Range: 0 - 1600000

These are the values when light axis match acquisition is used.
e e e e e e e e
(0 to 99999999)

7-6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Measurement value format

Display the measurement values according to the displayable range format specified for each minimum
display unit.
When the range is exceeded, the upper and lower limits of the displayable range are displayed.
• Measurement value : ±(Measurement value)
• Range exceeded: ±999999
• Invalid data : -999999
Measured value format • Judgment standby data : -999998
The decimal point is added according to the minimum display unit.
If the minimum display unit is “0.01 mm”, the measurement value is displayed as “+0012.34”, “-1234.00”, and so on.
(The value is always signed, and blank digits must be filled with zeros. The position of the decimal point is fixed.)
NG example: 0
 012.34 (Unsigned), -12.34 (Blank digits are not filled with zeros),
+00123.4 (Decimal point is in a different position).

Measurement result information.

• 0: Normal value
v
• 1: Invalid data
• 2: Judgment standby data

Check result information.

i • 0: Check NG
• 1: Check OK

The judgment result (HI/GO/LO) is displayed. The invalid data will be “LO”, and the judgment standby data will
j j
be “--”.

• Encpder unit is used : Pulse count value (-2147483648 to +2147483647)

A A A A A A A A A A A • Encoder unit is not used : Trigger count value . (0 to 4294967295: 11 digits including sign)
Example: +0000487812

The measurement value format will be as follows according to the measurement value get request option.

0 Measurement value only f f f f f f f f

1 Measurement value + Measurement result information f f f f f f f f , v

2 Measurement value + Measurement result

Measurement value + Measurement result information

f f f f f f f f , j j
7
3 f f f f f f f f , v , j j
+ Judgment result

Communication control
4 Count value + Measurement value A A A A A A A A A A A , f f f f f f f f

Count value + Measurement value

5 A A A A A A A A A A A , f f f f f f f f , v
+ Measurement result information

6 Count value + Measurement value + Judgment result A A A A A A A A A A A , f f f f f f f f , j j

Count value + Measurement value

7 A A A A A A A A A A A , f f f f f f f f , v , j j
+ Measurement result information + Judgment result

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-7

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Mode change
„ Go to setting mode „ Go to measurement mode
Switch the controller from the measurement mode to setting mode. Switch the controller from the setting mode to measurement mode.
(If the controller is already in setting mode, the command will finish (If the controller is already in measurement mode, the command will
normally without making any changes.) finish normally without making any changes.)

z Non-procedural command format z Non-procedural command format

Send Q 0 cr Send R 0 cr

Receive Q 0 cr Receive R 0 cr

z For number-specified commands z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET) (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Send Address Command No. 1
Send Address Command No. 2

Receive Address Executed command No. 1

Receive Address Executed command No. 2

Address +2 Command execution result Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4). • Command-specific error 84: Consistency error in the setting value
• Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for
common errors.

Measurement value output

Output the measurement value. There are three non-procedural commands and one number specification command.

z Non-procedural command format

• Output the measurement value of one specified OUT.
Send M S , m , x cr
Receive M S , Measured value format cr

• Output the measurement value of multiple specified OUTs.

7
Send M M , m , x x x x x x x x cr
Receive M M , Measured value format , Measured value format , … cr

• Output all measurement values of OUT1 to OUT8.

Communication control

Send M A , m cr
Receive M A , Measured value format , Measured value format , … Measured value format cr

z For number-specified commands (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)

Output all measurement values of OUT1 to OUT8.
Send Address Command No. 3

Receive Address Executed command No. 3

Address +2 Command execution result
Address +4 Response data 1 Measured value of OUT1
Address +6 Response data 2 Measured value of OUT2
: : :
Address +18 Response data 8 Measured value of OUT8

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).

7-8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Timing input Auto zero input

Timing is set to ON or OFF for the specified OUT. Auto zero is set to ON or OFF for the specified OUT.

z Non-procedural command format z Non-procedural command format

• Timing is set to ON/OFF for one specified OUT. • Auto zero is set to ON/OFF for one specified OUT.
Send T S , b , x cr Send Z S , b , x cr
Receive T S cr Receive Z S cr

• Timing is set to ON/OFF for one or multiple specified OUTs. • Auto zero is set to ON/OFF for one or multiple specified OUTs.
Send T M , b , x x x x x x x x cr Send Z M , b , x x x x x x x x cr
Receive T M cr Receive Z M cr

• Timing is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Timing 1. • Auto zero is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Zero 1.
Send T 1 , b cr Send Z 1 , b cr
Receive T 1 cr Receive Z 1 cr

• Timing is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Timing 2. • Auto zero is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Zero 2.
Send T 2 , b cr Send Z 2 , b cr
Receive T 2 cr Receive Z 2 cr

• Timing is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Timing 1 and • Auto zero is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Zero 1 and
Timing 2. Zero 2.
Send T A , b cr Send Z A , b cr
Receive T A cr Receive Z A cr

z For number-specified commands z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET) (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
• Timing is set to ON/OFF for one or multiple specified OUTs. • Auto zero is set to ON/OFF for one or multiple specified OUTs.
Send Address Command No. 10 Send Address Command No. 13
Address +2 Timing ON/OFF specification *1 Address +2 Auto zero ON/OFF specification *1

7
Address +4 OUT No. specification *2 Address +4 OUT No. specification *2
*1 : ON = 1, OFF = 0 *1 : ON = 1, OFF = 0
*2 : (Example) “10000011” sets OUT1, OUT2 and OUT8 to ON/OFF. *2 : (Example) “10000011” sets OUT1, OUT2 and OUT8 to ON/OFF.

Receive Address Executed command No. 10 Receive Address Executed command No. 13

Communication control
Address +2 Command execution result Address +2 Command execution result

• Timing is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Timing 1. • Auto zero is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Zero 1.
Send Address Command No. 11 Send Address Command No. 14
Address +2 Timing 1 ON/OFF specification *1 Address +2 Auto zero 1 ON/OFF specification *1
*1 : ON = 1, OFF = 0 *1 : ON = 1, OFF = 0

Receive Address Executed command No. 11 Receive Address Executed command No. 14
Address +2 Command execution result Address +2 Command execution result

• Timing is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Timing 2. • Timing is set to ON or OFF for the OUT assigned to Zero 2.
Send Address Command No. 12 Send Address Command No. 15
Address +2 Timing 2 ON/OFF specification *1 Address +2 Auto zero 2 ON/OFF specification *1
*1 : ON = 1, OFF = 0 *1 : ON = 1, OFF = 0

Receive Address Executed command No. 12 Receive Address Executed command No. 15
Address +2 Command execution result Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4). Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-9

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Reset measurement value Panel control (Lock/unlock panel operation)

Reset the measurement value of the specified OUT. Lock or unlock the display panel.

z Non-procedural command format z Non-procedural command format

• Reset the measurement value of one specified OUT.
Send K L , b cr
Send R S , x cr
Receive K L cr
Receive R S cr

• Reset the measurement value of one or multiple specified OUTs.

z Command error/Execution result
Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).
Send R M , x x x x x x x x cr
Receive R M cr
Switch program No.
• Reset the measurement value of OUT assigned to reset 1.
Send R 1 cr
„ Switch program No.
Change the program No.
Receive R 1 cr
z Non-procedural command format
• Reset the measurement value of OUT assigned to reset 2. Send P W , p cr

Send R 2 cr Receive P W cr

Receive R 2 cr
z For number-specified commands
• Reset the measurement value of OUT assigned to reset 1 and reset 2. (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Send R A cr Send Address Command No. 20
Address +2 Program No.
Receive R A cr
Receive Address Executed command No. 20
z For number-specified commands Address +2 Command execution result
(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
• Reset the measurement value of one or multiple specified OUTs. z Command error/Execution result
Send Address Command No. 16 Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).
Address +2 OUT No. specification *1
*1 : (Example) “10000011” sets OUT1, OUT2 and OUT8 to ON/OFF. „ Read program No.
7
Read the current program No.
Receive Address Executed command No. 16
Address +2 Command execution result
z Non-procedural command format
Send P R cr
• Reset the measurement value of OUT assigned to reset 1.
Communication control

Receive P R , p cr
Send Address Command No. 17

Receive Address Executed command No. 17 z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Address +2 Command execution result
Send Address Command No. 21
• Reset the measurement value of OUT assigned to reset 2.
Receive Address Executed command No. 21
Send Address Command No. 18
Address +2 Command execution result
Receive Address Executed command No. 18 Address +4 Program No.
Address +2 Command execution result
z Command error/Execution result
z Command error/Execution result Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).
Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).

7-10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Measurement control Emission control

Specify whether or not to perform a measurement. Turn ON/OFF the light beam for measurement.

z Non-procedural command format z Non-procedural command format

Send M C , b cr Send L C , b cr

Receive M C cr Receive L C cr

z For number-specified commands z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET) (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Send Address Command No. 40 Send Address Command No. 41
Processing enabled/ Address +2 Light ON/OFF specification *1
Address +2
disabled specification *1
*1: ON = 1, OFF = 0
*1: Measure = 1, Do not measure = 0
Receive Address Executed command No. 41
Receive Address Executed command No. 40
Address +2 Command execution result
Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result z Command error/Execution result

• Command-specific error 84: An emission stop signal is assigned to
• Command-specific error 84: A measurement stop signal is assigned
the input terminal.
to the input terminal.
• Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for
• Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for
common errors.
common errors.

Automatic transmission
„ Start automatic transmission
Output the measurement value each time it is updated.

z Non-procedural command format

Start the automatic transmission of the measurement value of one or multiple specified OUTs.
Send N S , m , x x x x x x x x cr

Receive N S cr

z Command error/Execution result

• Command-specific error 84: Automatic transmission start request was made during automatic transmission.
• Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common errors.
7
z During RS-232C communication

Communication control
Refer to “Measurement value format” (Page 7-7) for the output format.

z During Ethernet communication

• When the measurement value get request option (m) is specified as 0 to 3, it is always processed as “3”. When (m) is specified as 4 to 7, it is always
processed as “7”.
• Only when the measurement value get request option (m) 4 to 7 is specified, “*5 (Count value)” is output.
• The output format will be as shown below.
Following a “Count value”, the “Measurement value + Measurement result information + Judgment result” of the OUT specified for output are stored
consecutively.
As shown below, 8 bytes of data are output for the “Header + Length” (8 bytes) + “Count value (*5)” + “1 Out” (Not an ASCII code).
Example: When two OUTs are specified as the output source OUT
Header Length *5 *1 *2 *3 *4 *1 *2 *3 *4

Header 4 bytes: 0x4E 0x44 0x00 0x00 (‘N’ ‘D’ 0x00 0x00) (Fixed)
Length Length of the subsequent data in bytes (Length of the light blue section in the above figure)
The measurement value is displayed without a decimal point. The decimal point’s location is determined
by the minimum display unit. (Minimum display unit: 1.234 mm is displayed as 1234 when the minimum
display unit is 0.01 mm)
*1: Measurement value of OUT
Special values are listed below:
(4 bytes)
• Range exceeded : ±999999
• Invalid data : -999999
• Judgment standby: -999998
*2: Measurement result information
0: Normal data, 1: Invalid data, 2: Judgment standby data, 3: + Range exceeded, 4: - Range exceeded
(1 byte)
*3: Judgment result (1 byte) 0: GO, 1: LO, 2: HI, 3: Judgment standby (1: LO for invalid data)
*4: Reserved area (2 bytes) Fixed to 0
When encoder unit is used, this is the pulse count value. When encoder unit is not used, this is the trigger
*5: Count value (4 Bytes)
count value.

„ Stop automatic transmission

Stop the automatic transmission.

z Non-procedural command format

Send N T cr

Receive N T cr

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common errors.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-11

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Mask setting
„ Specify mask setting range
Specify the mask range in the head settings in the order of Boundary 1 and Boundary 2 in mm, and whether to enable/disable the mask.
The mask specifiable range is -999.99 to +999.99.

z Non-procedural command format

Send S W , M K , h , b , g g g g g g g , g g g g g g g cr
Border 1 Border 2

Receive S W , M K cr

• Boundary 1 and Boundary 2 are specified in the range from -999.99 to +999.99 (in mm).
• The value is specified with “a sign”, “three integer digits”, “decimal point”, and “two decimals” as in +012.34.
• When you specify Mask OFF, The values for Boundary 1 and Boundary 2 must be specified, even if you are specifying mask OFF
(the boundary values will not be used).

z For number-specified commands (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)

Send Address Command No. 50
Address +2 Head No.
Address +4 Mask ON/OFF specification *1
Address +6 Border 1 *2
Address +8 Border 2 *2
*1 : Mask ON = 1, Mask OFF = 0
*2 : Specify the boundary in mm to two decimal places without a decimal point.
(Example) To specify “+12.34”, set the value to “+1234”. To specify “-120”, set the value to “-12000”.

Receive Address Executed command No. 50

Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common errors.

„ Read mask setting range

7
Read the mask range in the head settings in the order of Boundary 1 and Boundary 2 in mm.
The mask setting status (enabled/disabled) is also read.

z Non-procedural command format

Send S R , M K , h cr
Communication control

Receive S R , M K , h , b , g g g g g g g , g g g g g g g cr
Border 1 Boundary 2

• Boundary 1 and Boundary 2 are read in the range from -999.99 to +999.99 (in mm).
• The values of Boundary 1 and Boundary 2 stored in the controller will be read, even when the mask is OFF.

z For number-specified commands (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)

Send Address Command No. 70
Address +2 Head No.

Receive Address Executed command No. 70

Address +2 Command execution result
Address +4 Mask ON/OFF status *1
Address +6 Border 1 *2
Address +8 Border 2 *2
*1 : Mask ON = 1, Mask OFF = 0
*2 : The boundary is read in mm up to two decimal places. The boundary values stored in the controller will be read when the mask is OFF.
(Example) If “1234” is read, it means that the boundary is “+12.34 mm”.

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common errors.

7-12 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Invalid data processing

„ Specify invalid data processing
Specify the invalidation number and recovery number for invalid data
processing.

z Non-procedural command format

Send S W , A H , x , a a a a , a a a a cr
Invalidation Recovery
number number

Receive S W , A H cr

The invalidation number and recovery number are

specified in 4-digit integers.
“Invalid data processing” (Page 3-19)

z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Send Address Command No. 51
Address +2 OUT No.
Address +4 Invalidation number
Address +6 Recovery number

Receive Address Executed command No. 51

Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).

„ Read invalid data processing

Read the invalidation number and recovery number for invalid data
processing.

z Non-procedural command format

Send

Receive
S R

S R
,

,
A H

A H
,

,
x cr

x , a a a a
Invalidation
, a a a a cr
Recovery
7
number number

Communication control
z For number-specified commands
(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Send Address Command No. 71
Address +2 OUT No.

Receive Address Command No. 71

Address +2 Command execution result
Address +4 Invalidation number
Address +6 Recovery number

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-13

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Scaling
„ Specify scaling setting
Specify the scaling value and whether scaling is enabled or disabled.

z Non-procedural command format

Send S W , S C , x , Measured value 1 , Display value 1 , Measured value 2 , Display value 2 cr
Receive S W , S C cr

Specify the actual and displayed values as signed values according to the minimum display unit.
(Example) If the minimum display unit is “0.01 mm”, specify the value in the form of “+0012.34”, “-0009.87”, and so on.

z For number-specified commands (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)

Send Address Command No. 52
Address +2 OUT No.
Address +4 Measured value 1 *1
Address +6 Display value 1 *1
Address +8 Measured value 2 *1
Address +10 Display value 2 *1
*1 : S
 pecify actual and display values omitting the decimal point, according to the minimum display units.
(Example) To specify “+1.234 mm” when the minimum display unit is “0.001 mm”, “1234” is stored in the data memory.

Receive Address Executed command No. 52

Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common errors.

„ Read scaling value

Read the scaling value and whether scaling is enabled or disabled.

z Non-procedural command format

7
Send S R , S C , x cr
Receive S R , S C , x , Measured value 1 , Display value 1 , Measured value 2 , Display value 2 cr

Actual and displayed values are read as signed values according to the minimum display unit.
Communication control

z For number-specified commands (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)

Send Address Command No. 72
Address +2 OUT No.

Receive Address Executed command No. 72

Address +2 Command execution result
Address +4 Measured value 1 *1
Address +6 Display value 1 *1
Address +8 Measured value 2 *1
Address +10 Display value 2 *1
*1 : A
 ctual and displayed values are read as values as per the minimum display unit.
(Example) If “1234” is read when the minimum display unit is “0.001 mm”, it means that the value is “+1.234”.

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common errors.

7-14 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Offset
„ Specify offset
Specify the offset value for the measurement value.

z Non-procedural command format

Send S W , O F , x , Offset value cr
Receive S W , O F cr

Specify the offset value as a signed value according to

the minimum display unit.
(Example) If the minimum display unit is “0.01 mm”,
specify the value in the form of “+0012.34”, “-0009.87”,
and so on.

z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Send
Address Command No. 53
Address +2 OUT No.
Address +4 Offset *1
*1 : S
 pecify the offset value omitting the decimal point, according to
the minimum display units.
(Example) To specify “+1.234 mm” when the minimum display
unit is “0.001 mm”, “1234” is stored in the data memory.

Receive Address Executed command No. 53

Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).

„ Read offset
7
Read the offset value for the measurement value.

z Non-procedural command format

Send S R , O F , x cr
Receive S R , O F , x , Offset value cr

Communication control
The offset value is read as a signed value according to
the minimum display unit.

z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Send Address Command No. 73
Address +2 OUT No.

Receive Address Executed command No. 73

Address +2 Command execution result
Address +4 Offset *1
*1 : The offset value is read as per the minimum display unit.
(Example) If “1234” is read when the minimum display unit is
“0.001 mm”, it means that the value is “+1.234”.

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4).

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-15

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Specify tolerance
„ Specify tolerance
Set the tolerance for the OUT measurement value (upper and lower limits) and hysteresis.

z Non-procedural command format

Send S W , L M , x , Upper limit value , Lower limit value , Hysteresis cr
Receive S W , L M cr

Specify the upper and lower limits and hysteresis as signed values according to the minimum display unit.
(Example) If the minimum display unit is “0.01 mm”, specify the value in the form of “+0012.34”, “-0009.87”, and so on.

z For number-specified commands (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)

Send Address Command No. 54
Address +2 OUT No.
Address +4 Upper limit *1
Address +6 Lower limit *1
Address +8 Hysteresis
*1 : S
 pecify the upper and lower limits and hysteresis as signed values according to the minimum display unit, without the decimal point.
(Example) To specify “+1.234 mm” when the minimum display unit is “0.001 mm”, “1234” is stored in the data memory (in the case of decimal value).

Receive Address Executed command No. 54

Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common errors.

„ Read tolerance
Read the tolerance for the OUT measurement value (Upper and lower limits) and hysteresis.

z Non-procedural command format

Send S R , L M , x cr

7
Receive S R , L M , x , Upper limit value , Lower limit value , Hysteresis cr

The upper and lower limits and hysteresis are read as signed values according to the minimum display unit.

z For number-specified commands (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)

Communication control

Send Address Executed command No. 74

Address +2 OUT No.

Receive Address Executed command No. 74

Address +2 Command execution result
Address +4 Upper limit *1
Address +6 Lower limit *1
Address +8 Hysteresis
*1 : T
 he upper and lower limits and hysteresis are read as values as per the minimum display unit.
(Example) If “1234” is read when the minimum display unit is “0.001 mm”, it means that the value is “+1.234”.

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common errors.

7-16 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Encoder Data Storage

„ Clear pulse count „ Start data storage
Set the encoder pulse count value to a preset value. Start the data storage.

z Non-procedural command format z Non-procedural command format

Send C C cr Send D S cr
Receive C C cr Receive D S cr

z For number-specified commands z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET) (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Send Address Command No. 42 Send Address Command No. 30

Receive Address Executed command No. 42 Receive Address Executed command No. 30
Address +2 Command execution result Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result z Command error/Execution result

• Command-specific error 84: [Encoder unit] is not set to [Use] in • Command-specific error
[Environment settings] -> [Encoder set], or [Operation mode] is not • 84: The storage start/stop is assigned to the input terminal.
set to [TRIGGER] or [TIMING]. • 85: The data storage cannot start since the stored data is full.
• Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for • Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for
common errors. common errors.

„ Get pulse count „ Stop data storage

Get the encoder pulse count value. Stop the data storage.

z Non-procedural command format z Non-procedural command format

Send C R cr Send D T cr

Receive C R , c c c c c c c c c c c cr Receive D T cr

z For number-specified commands z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET) (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)

7
Send Address Command No. 43 Send Address Command No. 31

Receive Address Executed command No. 43 Receive Address Executed command No. 31
Address +2 Command execution result Address +2 Command execution result

Communication control
Address +4 Pulse count value
z Command error/Execution result
• Command-specific error 84: The storage start/stop is assigned to the
z Command error/Execution result input terminal.
• Command-specific error 84: [Encoder unit] is not set to [Use] in
[Environment settings] -> [Encoder set], or [Operation mode] is not • Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for
set to [TRIGGER] or [TIMING]. common errors.
• Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for
common errors.
„ Clear data storage
Clear the data stored in the data storage.

z Non-procedural command format

Send D C cr
Receive D C cr

z For number-specified commands

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)
Send Address Command No. 32

Receive Address Executed command No. 32

Address +2 Command execution result

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common
errors.

„ Get storage status

Get the storage status of the data storage.

z Non-procedural command format

Send D A cr
Receive D A , s , d d d d d d d cr

z Command error/Execution result

Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for common
errors.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-17

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Light axis match acquisition 2 heads thickness measurement check

„ Light axis match acquisition „ 2 heads thickness measurement check
If the light axis match is a spot, a single number is output. Check that the specified 2 heads are installed opposite each other for
If the light axis match is a quad, five numbers (four numbers and their measurement.
total) are output. Once successfully checked, the measurement is output in the set
minimum display unit.
z Non-procedural command format *Power cycle to reset the value.
Send H A , h , h cr
z Non-procedural command format
Receive For spot Send A J , h , h cr
H A , e e e e e e e e cr
Receive A J , i cr
For quad
H A , e e e e e e e e , z For number-specified commands
e e e e e e e e , (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET)

e e e e e e e e , Send Address Command No. 76

e e e e e e e e , Address +2 Head No.
e e e e e e e e cr Address +4 Head No.

z For number-specified commands Receive Address Executed command No. 76

(EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET) Address +2 Command execution result
Address +4 Check result
Send Address Command No. 75
Address +2 Head No.
Address +4 Head No.
z Command error/Execution result
• Command-specific error
• 84 : The specified head (optical unit) is not connected.
Receive Address Executed command No. 75 • 85 : The type of the specified head is different. Or the same head
Address +2 Command execution result number is specified.
Address +4 Light axis match 1
• 86 : No received light waveform exists.
• Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for
Address +6 Light axis match 2 common errors.
Address +8 Light axis match 3
Address +10 Light axis match 4

7
Address +12 Light axis match total

z Command error/Execution result

• Command-specific error
• 84 : The specified head (optical unit) is not connected.
Communication control

• 85 : The type of the specified head is different. Or the same head

number is specified.
• 86 : No received light waveform exists.
• Refer to “Notes on Command Input/Output” (Page 7-4) for
common errors.

7-18 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

Binary Command Detail

Command format
Common format that doesn’t depend on each command is shown below. “Parameter” and “Response data” depends on each command.

z Command
(1) (2) (3) (4) ...
Length (4byte) Command code
0x0F 0xE0 0x00 0x00 (Data length (Byte unit) for (1 byte code + Reserved Parameter
(3) + (4)) area 3 bytes)

z Response
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) ...
Error code
Length (4byte) Command code
(1 byte code + Reserved
0x0F 0xE0 0x00 0x00 (Data length (Byte unit) for (1 byte code + Reserved Response data
area 3 bytes, all 0 when
(3) to (5)) area 3 bytes)
no error.)

Each command parameter

Command parameter (from 13th byte) and Response parameter (from 17th byte) are explained below.

„ Measurement value output : command code 0x01

z Command
Parameter: None

z Response
byte data
17
Count value
18
19 When using an encoder, it is the encoder count value (-2147483648 to +2147483647),
when not using it, it is the trigger count value (0 to 4294967295).

7
20
21 OUT1 measurement value
22 Integer with sign : minimum display unit as 1
23 (if minimum display unit: 0.0001, 1.2345mm → 12345)

Communication control
24 ±Range over: ±999999, Invalid data: -999999, Judgment standby: -999998
OUT1 measurement result information
25 OUT2 - OUT8 are
0: Normal data, 1: Invalid data, 2: Judgment standby data, 3: + Range exceeded, 4: - Range exceeded the same format as
OUT1 measurement result well
26
0: GO, 1: LO, 2: HI, 3: Judgment standby (When invalid data, 1: LO)
27
Reserved
28
… …
77
- OUT8 measurement value information
84
*Unused OUT result is judgment standby.

z Example: when OUT1 is 32.8mm (GO) and OUT2 to OUT8 are not used, count value is 391367. (Minimum display unit 0.1 µm)
<Command>
0x0F 0xE0 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x00
<Response>
0x0F 0xE0 0x00 0x00 0x4C 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

Count value: 0xC7 0xF8 0x05 0x00

OUT1 measurement value: 0x48 0x01 0x00 0x00
OUT1 measurement result/judgment result: 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
OUT2 measurement value: 0xC2 0xBD 0xF0 0xFF
OUT2 measurement result/judgment result: 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x00
OUT3 measurement value: 0xC2 0xBD 0xF0 0xFF
OUT3 measurement result/judgment result: 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x00
OUT4 measurement value: 0xC2 0xBD 0xF0 0xFF
OUT4 measurement result/judgment result: 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x00
OUT5 measurement value: 0xC2 0xBD 0xF0 0xFF
OUT5 measurement result/judgment result: 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x00
OUT6 measurement value: 0xC2 0xBD 0xF0 0xFF
OUT6 measurement result/judgment result: 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x00
OUT7 measurement value: 0xC2 0xBD 0xF0 0xFF
OUT7 measurement result/judgment result: 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x00
OUT8 measurement value: 0xC2 0xBD 0xF0 0xFF
OUT8 measurement result/judgment result: 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x00

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-19

 Control/Data Output via Commands

„ Fast measurement value output

Fast measurement value output command can be used to get all the sampling data.
This device stores its measured data in a ring buffer. Also, a consecutive number (index) from the start of measurement is allocated to each piece of
measurement data. This index can be used to identify the data to get even if the ring buffer is overwritten.
* Buffer size of the controller is 30000 points.
(1) Use Get index for fast measurement value output command to get the first reading start index.
0 Now there are 0 to 1000 data in the buffer.
Then if you send Get index for fast measurement value output command, index “1001” is returned.
1
.
.
. Index = 1001

1000

(2) Use Fast measurement value output command to get the data from the index that you got in step (1).
0 Specify the index: 1001 and the acquired number of data : 300.
1
.
. Index 1001 to 1300 can be received.
. The next index “1301” is also returned.
1001
. The number of data is 300
. Next index = 1301
1300
.
.
.

7 (3) Use Fast measurement value output command to get the data from the index that you got in step (2). You can get all the measurement
values by repeating step (3).
Communication control

0 Specify the index: 1301 and the acquired number of data : 300.
1
.
.
.
.
. Index 1301 to 1600 can be received.
. The next index “1601” is also returned.
1301
. The number of data is 300
. Next index = 1601
1600

„ Get index for fast measurement value output : Command Code 0x04
You can get the index for fast measurement value output.

z Command
Parameter: none

z Response
byte data
17
18
Index (0 - 4294967295)
19
20

7-20 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

„ Fast measurement value output : Command Code 0x05

You can get the measurement value of each used OUT from specified index.

z Command
byte data
13
14
Start index (0 - 4294967295)
15
16

17 Obtained Data count (1 - Limit)

Limit of data amount that can be received at once : 307173/{4 + (8 x the No. of OUTs)}
18 If you specify over this limit, only data up to the limit will be received.

0: Received data size is not fixed. For example, if 1000 pieces of data are requested out of a 300 data buffer,
300 pieces of data are received.
19 Not 0 : Received data size is fixed. For example, if 1000 pieces of data are requested out of a 300 data buffer,
the received data will include 300 values of real data + 700 values of 0. The received data size will always
equal the requested data size.
20 Reserved

z Response
byte data
17
18
Next index (next index from the latest data in response)
19
20
21
Received data amount
22
23
Reserved
24
25 Target OUT
From LSB, OUT1, OUT2, ... ,OUT8. bit=1 means the OUT is stored.
26 Example: OUT1, OUT2 data are stored, “0000 0000 0000 0011”
27
28
29
Reserved
7
Count value
30

Communication control
When using an encoder, it is the encoder count value (-2147483648 to +2147483647),
31
when not using it, it is the trigger count value (0 to 4294967295).
32
33 OUT measurement value
34
Integer with sign : minimum display unit as 1
35 (if minimum display unit: 0.0001, 1.2345mm → 12345)
36 ±Range over: ±999999, Invalid data: -999999, Judgment standby: -999998 This data block is
received as shown
OUT measurement result information below.
37
0: Normal data, 1: Invalid data, 2: Judgment standby data, 3: + Range exceeded, 4: - Range exceeded

OUT measurement result

38
0: GO, 1: LO, 2: HI, 3: Judgment standby (When invalid data, 1: LO)
39
Reserved
40
...
...
OUT measurement value information (Number N)

Example when only OUT1 is received. Example when OUT1 and OUT2 are received.
Count value first data Count value first data

OUT1 first data OUT1 first data

Count value second data

OUT2 first data
OUT1 second data
Count value second data

OUT1 second data

OUT2 second data

z Error code
• Err-83 (53H) : T
 he number of specified acquisition data is invalid. Or when specifying a value other than 0 with the 19 byte of command, the number of
acquired data exceeding the communication upper limit size is specified.
• Err-85 (55H) : The specified index data does not exist.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-21

 Control/Data Output via Commands

„ Get storage data

This section describes how to acquire data stored in the controller with the data storage function.
(1) Use Get index for fast measurement value output command to get the first reading start index.
0 Now there are 0 to 1000 data in the buffer.
Send the get index command at the time to get the oldest data index.
1
(or, if getting data to be stored from now on, get the next index of the latest data here)
. Refer to the “Get storage data” - “Get storage data index” command.
.
. Index = 0
1000

(2) Use Fast measurement value output command to get the data from the index that you got in step (1).
0 Specify the index: 0 and the acquired number of data : 300.
.
Storage data index 0 to 299 can be received.
.
The next index “300” is also returned.
.
299
300
The number of data is 300
. Next index = 300
.
.

(3) Use Fast measurement value output command to get the data from the index that you got in step (2). You can get all the measurement
values by repeating step (3).
0 Specify the index: 300 and the acquired number of data : 300.

7 .
.
.
299
Communication control

300
.
. Index 300 to 599 can be received.
. The next index “600” is also returned.
599
The number of data is 300
. Next index = 600
.
.

„ Get storage data index : command code 0x02

Get the data storage index.

z Command
byte data

Acquisition start index specification

13 0: The oldest data index (if acquiring data at the specified position)
1: Next index of the latest data (when continuing on to acquire the latest data)

14
15 Reserved
16

z Response
byte data

17

18
Storage data index (0 - 4294967295)
19

20

7-22 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via Commands

„ Get storage data : Command Code 0x03

Get it by number which is specified from the index where the set OUT storage data is specified in the select OUT to store of the storage.

z Command
byte data
13
14
Start index (0 - 4294967295)
15
16
17 Obtained Data count (1 - Limit)
Limit of data amount that can be received at once : 307173/{4 + (8 x the No. of OUTs)}
18 If you specify over this limit, only data up to the limit will be received.

0: Received data size is not fixed. For example, if 1000 pieces of data are requested out of a 300 data buffer,
300 pieces of data are received.
19 Not 0 : Received data size is fixed. For example, if 1000 pieces of data are requested out of a 300 data buffer,
the received data will include 300 values of real data + 700 values of 0. The received data size will always
equal the requested data size.
20 Reserved

z Response
byte data
17
18
Next index ( next index from the latest data in response)
19
20
21
Received data amount
22
23
Reserved
24
25 Target OUT
From LSB, OUT1, OUT2, ... ,OUT8. bit=1 means the OUT is stored.
26 Example: OUT1, OUT2 data are stored, “0000 0000 0000 0011”
27
28
29
Reserved

Count value
7
30

Communication control
When using an encoder, it is the encoder count value (-2147483648 to +2147483647),
31
when not using it, it is the trigger count value (0 to 4294967295).
32
33 Stored data OUT measurement value
34
Integer with sign : minimum display unit as 1
35 (if minimum display unit: 0.0001, 1.2345mm → 12345)
36 ±Range over: ±999999, Invalid data: -999999, Judgment standby: -999998 This data block is
received as shown
Stored data OUT measurement result information below.
37
0: Normal data, 1: Invalid data, 2: Judgment standby data, 3: + Range exceeded, 4: - Range exceeded

OUT measurement result

38
0: GO, 1: LO, 2: HI, 3: Judgment standby (When invalid data, 1: LO)
39
Reserved
40
...
...
Stored data OUT measurement value information (Number N)

Example when only Stored data OUT1 is received. Example when Stored data OUT1 and OUT2 are received.
Count value first data Count value first data

Stored data OUT1 first data Stored data OUT1 first data

Count value second data

Stored data OUT2 first data
Stored data OUT1 second data
Count value second data

Stored data OUT1 second data

Stored data OUT2 second data

z Error code
• Err-83 (53H) : T
 he number of specified acquisition data is invalid. Or when specifying a value other than 0 with the 19 byte of command, the number of
acquired data exceeding the communication upper limit size is specified.
• Err-85 (55H) : The specified index data does not exist.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-23

 Control/Data Output via Commands

MEMO

7
Communication control

7-24 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Non-procedural Communication via RS-232C

Non-procedural Communication via RS-232C

Getting Started Connection with a Personal Computer

By connecting this controller to the PC with a RS-232C cable, you can Dedicated cables OP-96368 (Straight-through cable, 2.5 m) and
output measurement values and judgment results as well as control the OP‑26401 (D-sub, 9 pins) are used in combination for the connections.
controller using the PC via RS-232C. “Optional Product List” (Page 1-4)
Refer to “Control/Data Output via Commands” (Page 7-4) for more
details. PC side

Signal
Changing the RS-232C communication CL-3000 Series side OP-26401
name

settings RD (RXD) 5 2 RD (RXD)

SG (GND) 4 5 SG (GND)

To change the settings using CL-NavigatorN SD (TXD) 3 3 SD (TXD)

On the [Environment setting] screen of CL-NavigatorN, you can change
7 RS (RTS)
the settings for connecting the PC to the controller for various data
input/output using non-procedural communication. 8 CS (CTS)

DR (DSR)

6 CD (DCD)

4 ER (DTR)

OP-26401
1 Click [Environment] on the main screen.

2 Select the [Communication settings] tab.

3 Change the settings as required.

7
• Baud rate
Select 115200 (Default value), or 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 (bps)
for the baud rate.
• Parity
Select [NONE] (Default value), or [EVEN] or [ODD].

Communication control
4 Click [OK].
The settings are implemented after rebooting the
controller.
PC
OP-96368
To change the settings on the Display Panel
To change the settings on the display panel, refer to the following:
“Selecting the Communication Settings Menu” (Page 5-12)
“RS-232C Settings (Baud Rate Settings and Parity Settings)” (Page
5-13)

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-25

 Non-procedural Communication via Ethernet

Non-procedural Communication via Ethernet

Getting Started One-to-one Connection with a PC

By connecting this controller to the PC with an Ethernet cable, you can
output measurement values and judgment results as well as control the
controller using the PC via Ethernet. Connecting the controller to a PC
Refer to “Control/Data Output via Commands” (Page 7-4) for more When controlling the controller with the PC in a one-to-one connection
details. without using LAN, use the OP-66843 Ethernet cable (3 m, sold
separately).

Changing the Ethernet communication

settings

To change the settings using CL-NavigatorN

Ethernet cable (3 m)
On the [Environment setting] screen of CL-NavigatorN, you can change (OP-66843)
the settings for connecting the PC using non-procedural communication.

1 Change the TCP/IP settings of the controller.

This controller uses the TCP/IP settings specified in the environment
settings on CL-NavigatorN.
You can check and/or change the IP address/subnet mask/gateway in
“Ethernet settings” (Page 4-2).

2 Change the TCP/IP settings on the PC.

When the controller is directly connected to your PC with an Ethernet
cable, set the IP address between 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.255
excluding 192.168.0.10 (When the IP address of the controller is
192.168.0.10 AND the subnet mask of the controller and PC are
255.255.255.0).

7
See the instruction manual for your PC or LAN card for more
information.

1 Click [Environment] on the main screen. 3 Turn off the controller and the PC, and connect the
Ethernet connector on the PC to the Ethernet port using
Communication control

2 Select the [Communication settings] tab. an Ethernet cable.

Subsequently, check if the settings and connection have been made
3 Change the settings as required. correctly.
Refer to “Ethernet settings” (Page 4-2) for the detail.
4 Turn on the controller and the PC.
4 Click [OK].
5 Start [Command Prompt] on the PC.
The settings are implemented after rebooting the
controller.

To change the settings on the Display Panel

6
To change the settings on the display panel, refer to the following:
“Selecting the Communication Settings Menu” (Page 5-12) Enter [ping] followed by the IP address of the controller
“Setting of IP Address at the Next Power On” (Page 5-14) in alphanumeric characters and press the Enter key.
“Setting of IP Address” (Page 5-14)
“Setting of the Subnet Mask” (Page 5-15) z Example
“Setting of the Gateway” (Page 5-15) When the IP address of the controller is [192.168.0.10], enter “ping
“Setting of the Port Number” (Page 5-15) 192.168.0.10”.

If the controller and the PC are properly connected and configured, the
message [Reply from (IP address of the unit):] will appear.

7-26 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Non-procedural Communication via Ethernet

z When [Request timed out] appears Example Telnet Software to Controller

If a message [Request timed out] appears and the correct IP address
of the controller has been specified in the ping command, the setting or
configuration of the controller or the PC is incorrect. TCP/IP Communication
You can use a Telnet software to communicate with the controller. In
this example, the operation process using Tera Term (Freeware) is
described.

For details on Tera Term, refer to the following URL (as of

August 2018):
https://osdn.net/projects/ttssh2/releases/
Check that the steps from 1 to 4 described on the previous page have
been properly completed.

Communication control

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-27

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

The CL-3000 Series supports communication via EtherNet/IP. EtherNet/IP is an open communications standard with specifications that are managed by
ODVA (Open Device Net Vendor Association, Inc.). Communication is possible with all devices that support it, regardless of the vendor.

Cyclic and Message Communications

EtherNet/IP communication offers the following two types of communications: Cyclic communication for sending and receiving data periodically (Implicit
messaging), and message communication for sending and receiving commands/responses in arbitrary timings.

Cyclic communication Message communication

It allows you to set the RPI (Communication cycle) based on the priority With message communications, you can send/receive the required
of the sent/received data, enabling sending and receiving of data with commands and responses in the required timings.
adjustment of the overall communication load.
Send Command Receive
Communication cycle (RPI) setting PLC
• Controller A: 10 ms Processing,
• Controller B: 50 ms Operation
• Controller C: 1000 ms
Response data
Receive Send
EtherNet/IP

Controller A Controller B Controller C

RPI = 10 ms RPI = 50 ms RPI = 1000 ms

Communication Specifications
RPI 1 ms to 10000 ms (1 ms increments)

EtherNet/IP interface Conformance test Compatible with Version.CT14

7
Connection count: 8 8

This unit → PLC 272 bytes

Cyclic communication (Implicit message) Communication size
PLC → This unit 100 bytes
Communication control

UCMM (Unconnected)
Message communication (Explicit message) Supported message formats
Class 3 (Connected)

This controller can issue control instructions from multiple interfaces (I/O terminals, RS-232C, connection to CL-NavigatorN via
USB or LAN, and EtherNet/IP communications) simultaneously. However, it cannot receive any instructions from other interfaces
while receiving a control instruction from an interface.

The EDS file for this unit can be downloaded from our home page (www.keyence.com).

7-28 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Cyclic Communication
This function sends and receives data using the RPI (communication cycle) set between the PLC and this controller.
It can control and check the status of the controller, as well as send/receive the measurement value and judgment result output data without a ladder
program.

z Check the controller status

• Read the system status
• Read the system error code
• Read the status of the measuring devices (Emission stop, Stop measurement, and so on)

z Output the measurement result

• Read the OUT measurement value status (Judgment standby, invalid data, etc.)
• Read OUT measurement value
• Read judgment result

z Controlling the controller

• Execute various communication commands
• Start/stop/initialize the data storage
• Read the storage status and points of the data storage
• Control the inputs (Timing, auto zero, reset, etc.)
• Read the control status of the measuring devices (Timing, auto zero, etc.)
• Switch programs
• Read the current program No.

• Communication settings for the cyclic communication, such as the RPI (communication cycle) and the data size, will be
configured on the PLC side. In a network with many connected devices (including the EtherNet/IP devices), a network delay
and/or packet loss may occur when there is a heavy load on the network. Be sure to perform sufficient verification prior to
operation.
• Use message communication when communicating via EtherNet/IP with a PLC that does not support cyclic communication
(Rockwell MicroLogix Series, etc.).

Configuring the PLC

For using cyclic communication, configure the following settings on the PLC:
1. Configure the connection settings.
2. Configure the settings of the device to be used for communication via EtherNet/IP.
For the setting details, refer to the manual for each PLC.

z Connection types
In EtherNet/IP, a connection is opened from the PLC to this controller during cyclic communication. Different devices can use different types of
connections. The following shows the list of connections that are available for this controller.
7

Communication control
Connection name I/O Assembly Instance Size (byte) Application type

Controller send 64H 272

Monitor Data And Control Data Exclusive Owner
Controller receive 65H 100

Controller send 64H 272

Monitor Data (Input Only) Input Only
Controller receive FEH 0

• It is not possible to open multiple “Exclusive Owner” connections for a single controller unit.
• When using “Input Only”, the RPI of all “Exclusive Owner” and “Input Only” devices must be the same.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-29

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Memory map
„ Monitor data list (Controller -> PLC)
Monitor data are devices that write responses from the controller to the PLC. If this device is used, the functions of each device will be assigned as shown
below.
Address
Area Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Warning
0 B007 B006 B005 B004 B003 B002 B001 B000 Error status
status
System status
1 B00F B00E B00D B00C B00B B00A B009 B008

Measurement Storage Emission

Measurement 2 B017 B016 B015 B014 Storage FULL B013 B012 B011 RUN B010
stopped in operation stopped
operation
status
3 B01F B01E B01D B01C B01B B01A B019 B018

4 B027 OUT8 B026 OUT7 B025 OUT6 B024 OUT5 B023 OUT4 B022 OUT3 B021 OUT2 B020 OUT1
Enabled
status
5 B02F B02E B02D B02C B02B B02A B029 B028

Judgment 6 B037 OUT8 B036 OUT7 B035 OUT6 B034 OUT5 B033 OUT4 B032 OUT3 B031 OUT2 B030 OUT1
standby
status 7 B03F B03E B03D B03C B03B B03A B039 B038

Display range 8 B047 OUT8 B046 OUT7 B045 OUT6 B044 OUT5 B043 OUT4 B042 OUT3 B041 OUT2 B040 OUT1
exceeded
status 9 B04F B04E B04D B04C B04B B04A B049 B048

Measurement 10 B057 OUT8 B056 OUT7 B055 OUT6 B054 OUT5 B053 OUT4 B052 OUT3 B051 OUT2 B050 OUT1
value valid
status 11 B05F B05E B05D B05C B05B B05A B059 B058

12 B067 OUT8 B066 OUT7 B065 OUT6 B064 OUT5 B063 OUT4 B062 OUT3 B061 OUT2 B060 OUT1
Timing status
13 B06F B06E B06D B06C B06B B06A B069 B068

14 B077 OUT8 B076 OUT7 B075 OUT6 B074 OUT5 B073 OUT4 B072 OUT3 B071 OUT2 B070 OUT1
Auto zero
status
15 B07F B07E B07D B07C B07B B07A B079 B078

Reserved 16 - 19

Judgment 20 B0A7 OUT8 B0A6 OUT7 B0A5 OUT6 B0A4 OUT5 B0A3 OUT4 B0A2 OUT3 B0A1 OUT2 B0A0 OUT1
output
(HI) 21 B0AF B0AE B0AD B0AC B0AB B0AA B0A9 B0A8

Judgment 22 B0B7 OUT8 B0B6 OUT7 B0B5 OUT6 B0B4 OUT5 B0B3 OUT4 B0B2 OUT3 B0B1 OUT2 B0B0 OUT1

7
output
(LO) 23 B0BF B0BE B0BD B0BC B0BB B0BA B0B9 B0B8

24 B0C7 OUT8 B0C6 OUT7 B0C5 OUT6 B0C4 OUT5 B0C3 OUT4 B0C2 OUT3 B0C1 OUT2 B0C0 OUT1
Judgment
output (GO)
25 B0CF B0CE B0CD B0CC B0CB B0CA B0C9 B0C8
BIT
Communication control

Area Reserved 26, 27

Program Command
28 B0E7 B0E6 B0E5 B0E4 B0E3 B0E2 switching B0E1 execution B0E0
Operation completed completion
order
completed Measurement Measurement
Emission start Emission stop Clear Storage Storage stop Storage start
29 B0EF B0EE B0ED B0EC start B0EB stop B0EA B0E9 B0E8
completed completed completed completed completed
completed completed

Reserved 30, 31

32 B0107 OUT8 B0106 OUT7 B0105 OUT6 B0104 OUT5 B0103 OUT4 B0102 OUT3 B0101 OUT2 B0100 OUT1
Timing
completed
33 B010F B010E B010D B010C B010B B010A B0109 B0108

34 B0117 OUT8 B0116 OUT7 B0115 OUT6 B0114 OUT5 B0113 OUT4 B0112 OUT3 B0111 OUT2 B0110 OUT1
Auto zero
completed
35 B011F B011E B011D B011C B011B B011A B0119 B0118

36 B0127 OUT8 B0126 OUT7 B0125 OUT6 B0124 OUT5 B0123 OUT4 B0122 OUT3 B0121 OUT2 B0120 OUT1
Reset
completed
37 B012F B012E B012D B012C B012B B012A B0129 B0128

Reserved 38, 39

Program Command
40 B0147 B0146 B0145 B0144 B0143 B0142 switching B0141 execution B0140
Operation failed failed
order failure
Emission start Emission stop Measurement Measurement Clear Storage Storage stop Storage start
41 B014F B014E B014D B014C B014B B014A B0149 B0148
failure failure start failure stop failure failure failure failure

Reserved 42, 43

44 B0167 OUT8 B0166 OUT7 B0165 OUT6 B0164 OUT5 B0163 OUT4 B0162 OUT3 B0161 OUT2 B0160 OUT1
Timing failure
45 B016F B016E B016D B016C B016B B016A B0169 B0168

46 B0177 OUT8 B0176 OUT7 B0175 OUT6 B0174 OUT5 B0173 OUT4 B0172 OUT3 B0171 OUT2 B0170 OUT1
Auto zero
failure
47 B017F B017E B017D B017C B017B B017A B0179 B0178

48 B0187 OUT8 B0186 OUT7 B0185 OUT6 B0184 OUT5 B0183 OUT4 B0182 OUT3 B0181 OUT2 B0180 OUT1
Reset failed
49 B018F B018E B018D B018C B018B B018A B0189 B0188

Reserved 50, 51

Error code 52, 53 W000 Error code

Reserved 54, 55
WORD
area
Warning code 56, 57 W002 Warning code

Reserved 58, 59

7-30 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Address
Area Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Current
60 - 63 W004 Current program number
program No.

Storage data
64 - 67 W006 Number of storage data points
point

Pulse count
68 - 71 W008 Pulse count value
value

Reserved 72 - 75

Measured
76 - 79 W00C Measured value OUT1
value OUT1

Measured
80 - 83 W00E Measured value OUT2
value OUT2

Measured
84 - 87 W010 Measured value OUT3
value OUT3

Measured
88 - 91 W012 Measured value OUT4
value OUT4

Measured
92 - 95 W014 Measured value OUT5
value OUT5

Measured
96 - 99 W016 Measured value OUT6
value OUT6

Measured
100 - 103 W018 Measured value OUT7
value OUT7

Measured
104 - 107 W01A Measured value OUT8
value OUT8

Reserved 108 - 139

Measurement
value update 140 - 143 W02C Measurement value update count OUT1
count OUT1

Measurement
value update 144 - 147 W02E Measurement value update count OUT2
count OUT2

Measurement
value update 148 - 151 W030 Measurement value update count OUT3
count OUT3

7
Measurement
value update 152 - 155 W032 Measurement value update count OUT4
count OUT4
DWORD
area Measurement
value update 156 - 159 W034 Measurement value update count OUT5
count OUT5

Communication control
Measurement
value update 160 - 163 W036 Measurement value update count OUT6
count OUT6

Measurement
value update 164 - 167 W038 Measurement value update count OUT7
count OUT7

Measurement
value update 168 - 171 W03A Measurement value update count OUT8
count OUT8

Reserved 172 - 203

Executed
204 - 207 W04C Executed command No.
command No.

Command
execution 208 - 211 W04E Command execution result
result

Response data 1 212 - 215 W050 Response data 1

Response data 2 216 - 219 W052 Response data 2

Response data 3 220 - 223 W054 Response data 3

Response data 4 224 - 227 W056 Response data 4

Response data 5 228 - 231 W058 Response data 5

Response data 6 232 - 235 W05A Response data 6

Response data 7 236 - 239 W05C Response data 7

Response data 8 240 - 243 W05E Response data 8

Response data 9 244 - 247 W060 Response data 9

Response data 10 248 - 251 W062 Response data 10

Response data 11 252 - 255 W064 Response data 11

Response data 12 256 - 259 W066 Response data 12

Response data 13 260 - 263 W068 Response data 13

Response data 14 264 - 267 W06A Response data 14

Response data 15 268 - 271 W06C Response data 15

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-31

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

„ Control data list (PLC → Controller)

Control data are devices that write instructions to the controller from the PLC. If this device is used, the functions of each device will be assigned as
shown below.
Address
Area Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Program Command
0 B01A7 B01A6 B01A5 B01A4 B01A3 B01A2 switching B01A1 processing B01A0
Operation request request
order request
Emission start Emission stop Measurement Measurement Clear Storage Storage stop Storage start
1 B01AF B01AE B01AD B01AC B01AB B01AA B01A9 B01A8
request request start request stop request request request request

Reserved 2, 3

4 B01C7 OUT8 B01C6 OUT7 B01C5 OUT6 B01C4 OUT5 B01C3 OUT4 B01C2 OUT3 B01C1 OUT2 B01C0 OUT1
Timing
request
5 B01CF B01CE B01CD B01CC B01CB B01CA B01C9 B01C8

6 B01D7 OUT8 B01D6 OUT7 B01D5 OUT6 B01D4 OUT5 B01D3 OUT4 B01D2 OUT3 B01D1 OUT2 B01D0 OUT1
Auto zero
request
BIT 7 B01DF B01DE B01DD B01DC B01DB B01DA B01D9 B01D8
Area
8 B01E7 OUT8 B01E6 OUT7 B01E5 OUT6 B01E4 OUT5 B01E3 OUT4 B01E2 OUT3 B01E1 OUT2 B01E0 OUT1
Reset request
9 B01EF B01EE B01ED B01EC B01EB B01EA B01E9 B01E8

Reserved 10 - 15

16 B0227 OUT8 B0226 OUT7 B0225 OUT6 B0224 OUT5 B0223 OUT4 B0222 OUT3 B0221 OUT2 B0220 OUT1
Timing ON/OFF
specification
17 B022F B022E B022D B022C B022B B022A B0229 B0228

Auto zero 18 B0237 OUT8 B0236 OUT7 B0235 OUT6 B0234 OUT5 B0233 OUT4 B0232 OUT3 B0231 OUT2 B0230 OUT1
ON/OFF
specification 19 B023F B023E B023D B023C B023B B023A B0239 B0238

Reserved 20 - 23

Program No.
24 - 27 W06E Specify program number
specification

Reservation 28 - 31

Command No. 32 - 35 W072 Command No.

Command
36 - 39 W074 Command parameter 1
parameter 1

Command

7
40 - 43 W076 Command parameter 2
parameter 2

Command
44 - 47 W078 Command parameter 3
parameter 3

Command
48 - 51 W07A Command parameter 4
parameter 4
Communication control

Command
52 - 55 W07C Command parameter 5
parameter 5

Command
56 - 59 W07E Command parameter 6
parameter 6

Command
60 - 63 W080 Command parameter 7
DWORD parameter 7
area
Command
64 - 67 W082 Command parameter 8
parameter 8

Command
68 - 71 W084 Command parameter 9
parameter 9

Command
72 - 75 W086 Command parameter 10
parameter 10

Command
76 - 79 W088 Command parameter 11
parameter 11

Command
80 - 83 W08A Command parameter 12
parameter 12

Command
84 - 87 W08C Command parameter 13
parameter 13

Command
88 - 91 W08E Command parameter 14
parameter 14

Command
92 - 95 W090 Command parameter 15
parameter 15

Command
96 - 99 W092 Command parameter 16
parameter 16

7-32 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Monitor data details

„ Parameter details (This controller → PLC)
Item Contents

Output the error status of the unit.

When ON, the value is stored in “Error code”. When OFF, 0 is stored in “Error code”.
Error status
• ON: An error has occurred.
• OFF: No error has occurred.

Output the warning status of the unit.

When ON, the value is stored in “Warning code”. When OFF, 0 is stored in “Warning code”.
Warning status
• ON: A warning has occurred.
• OFF: No warning has occurred.

RUN This bit becomes 1 in the case of the measurement mode.

Output the measurement-related status (Emission stop, Stop measurement, Storage in operation,
Storage FULL).
Measurement operation status
• ON: Status is ON
• OFF: Status is OFF

When the measurement value of each OUT is in the judgment standby, range exceeded, or invalid status,
0 will be stored in this bit. If this bit is 1, the measurement value and judgment output of each OUT will be
Enabled status OUT1 to 8 enabled.
• ON: Measurement values are enabled.
• OFF: The measurement value is disabled (in judgment standby, range exceeded, or invalid status).

• Judgment standby status OUT1 to 8 If the measurement value of each OUT is in a status described on the left, this bit will become 1.
• Display range exceeded status OUT1 to 8 • ON: The measurement value is in a status described on the left.
• Invalid status OUT1 to 8 • OFF: The measurement value is not in a status described on the left.

It indicates the status of each signal for the respective OUT.

• Timing status OUT1 to 8
• ON: The left signal is ON.
• Auto zero status OUT1 to 8
• OFF: The left signal is OFF

It indicates the judgment output status of each OUT measurement value.

Judgment output (HI/LO/GO) • ON: Each output is ON.
• OFF: Each output is OFF

•
•
•
Command execution completion
Program switching completed
Storage start completed
7
• Storage stop completed

Communication control
• Clear storage completed
It indicates whether each processing request has completed (succeeded).
• Measurement stop completed
• ON: The processing request has completed (succeeded).
• Measurement start completed
• OFF: The processing request has not completed (not succeeded).
• Emission stop completed
• Emission start completed
• Timing completed OUT1 to 8
• Auto zero completed OUT1 to 8
• Reset completed OUT1 to 8

• Command execution failure

• Program switching failed
• Storage start failure
• Storage stop failure
• Clear storage failure
It indicates whether each processing request has failed.
• Measurement stop failure
• ON: The processing request has failed.
• Measurement start failure
• OFF: The processing request has not failed.
• Emission stop failure
• Emission start failure
• Timing failed OUT1 to 8
• Auto zero failed OUT1 to 8
• Reset failed OUT1 to 8

Current program number It stores the current program No. (0 to 7). (32 bit DINT type)

Storage data point Store the number of the actual stored data in the result of using the data storage function. (32 Bit DINT type)

Store the number of pulses input to the encoder unit. (32 bit DINT type)
Pulse count value
It is only enabled when using an encoder trigger.

Store the measurement value (32 bit DINT type) of each OUT.
(Example) If “1032” is stored when the minimum display unit is “0.01 mm”, it means that the measurement
value is “10.32 mm”.
When in a special status, measurement values are output as described below.
Measurement value OUT1 to 8
• Invalid data: -999999
• Judgment standby data: -999998
• + Range exceeded: +999999
• - Range exceeded: -999999

Count up by +1 for each measurement value update.

Measurement value update count OUT1 to 8
The count range is 0 to 4294967295 and will restart at 0 if exceeded.

Store the reply to the external device after the controller has executed the command received from the
Executed command No. and response
external device.
data
Refer to “Command List” (Page 7-4) for the command format.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-33

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Control data details

„ Parameter details (PLC → This controller)
Item Contents

• ON: Execute the command specified by command No. and command parameters.
Command processing request
• OFF: Set command execution completed/execution failed to OFF.

• ON: Switch the current program to the specified program No.

Program switching request
• OFF: Set program switching completed/switching failed to OFF.

• Storage start request

• Storage stop request
• Clear Storage request
• ON: Execute the process.
• Measurement stop request
• OFF: Set processing completed/processing failed to OFF.
• Measurement start request
• Emission stop request
• Emission start request

• ON: Each control process is executed in the specified status (ON or OFF).
• Timing request OUT1 to 8
• OFF: Set processing completed/processing failed to OFF.
• Auto zero request OUT1 to 8
* The “ON/OFF specification” bit provided for each control process is used to specify the status.

• ON: Execute the process.

Reset request OUT1 to 8
• OFF: Set processing completed/processing failed to OFF.

Specify whether to execute each control process in ON status or OFF status.

• Timing ON/OFF specification OUT1 to 8
• ON: Control processing is ON.
• Auto zero ON/OFF specification
• OFF: Control processing is OFF.
OUT1 to 8
*The process is executed using the “Request” bit provided for each control.

Specify which program No. (0 to 7) to switch to when a program switching is requested.

Specify program number (32 bit DINT type)
* The “Program switching request” bit is used to execute the process.

Store the command No. and its parameters to be sent to the controller.
Command No. and command parameters Refer to “Command List” (Page 7-4) for the command format.
* The “Command processing request” bit is used to execute the command.

7
Communication control

7-34 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Operation example
„ Example 1: Read the measurement value of the controller.
The OUT measurement values of OUT1 to OUT8 can be read.
PLC
OUT1 measurement value update counter n n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4

Measured value of OUT

Controller
Measurement value update counter of OUT1 n n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4

Measured value of OUT1

This is an example of reading the measurement value of OUT1 when the measurement mode is set to Normal.
• When the measurement value of OUT1 and the measurement value update counter is updated, it will be input into the IN area using cyclic
communication.

„ Example 2: Handshake processing of a timing request

PLC
(1)
1
Timing ON/OFF specification
0

1 (2) (5)
Timing request
0
Controller (3)
1 (6)
Timing completed
0

1 (4)
Timing failure (7)
0

Timing status
1

0
(8)
7

Communication control
(1) To insert a Timing ON input, set the “Timing ON/OFF specification” bit corresponding to the desired OUT to 1.
(2) Set the “Timing request” bit corresponding to the OUT from 0 to 1.
(3) If the timing input is successful, the “Timing completed” bit will become 1 (Solid line). The bit will remain 0 if failed (Dotted line).
(4) If the timing input fails, the “Timing failed” bit will become 1 (Dotted line). The bit will remain 0 if successful (Solid line).
(5) If “Timing request” bit is changed from 1 to 0, the “Timing completed” and “Timing failed” bits become 0 as well ((6), (7)).
(8) You can check the Timing ON/OFF status in “Timing status”.

„ Example 3: Handshake processing of a program switching request

PLC (1)
1
Specify program number 00H 03H
0

(2) (5)
1
Program change request
0
Controller
1
Program change completed (3) (6)
0

1 (4)
Program change failure (7)
0
(8)
1
Program No. No.0 No.3
0

(1) Enter the program No. to switch to in the “Specify program number” area.
(2) Change the “Program switching request” bit from 0 to 1.
(3) If the program switching is successful, the “Program switching completed” bit will change from 0 to 1 (Solid line). The bit will remain 0 if failed (Dotted
line).
(4) If the program switching fails, the “Program switching failed” bit will change from 0 to 1 (Dotted line). The bit will remain 0 if successful (Dotted line).
(5) If the “Program switching request” bit is changed from 1 to 0, the “Program switching completed” and “Program switching failed” bits will become 0 as
well ((6), (7)).
(8) The program No. will change from No.0 to No.3.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-35

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

„ Example 4: Change the Tolerance judgment value.

PLC (1)
1
Command No. 54
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 1 1
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 2 1000
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 3 -500
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 4 20
0

1 (3)
Command processing (9)
request
0
Controller
1
Command execution (4)
(10)
completion 0

1 (5)
Command execution failure (11)
0

(6)
1
Executed command No. 54
0

(7)
1
Command execution result 0

7
0

(8)
Tolerance judgment 1
(Upper limit) 0.1000 mm
0

(8)
Communication control

Tolerance judgment 1
(Lower limit) -0.0500 mm
0

(8)
1
Tolerance judgment
0.0020 mm
(Hysteresis) 0

(1) Enter the desired command No. into the command No. area. The command No. for writing the Tolerance judgment value is 54.
(2) Enter the command parameter. When writing the Tolerance judgment values, enter the values in the order of OUT No., upper limit, lower limit,
followed by hysteresis.
(3) The command will be executed when “Command processing request” bit is set from 0 to 1.
(4) If the command processing is successful, the “Command execution completed” bit will become 1 (Solid line). The bit will remain 0 if failed (Dotted
line).
(5) If the command processing fails, the “Command execution failed” bit will become 1 (Dotted line). The bit will remain 0 if successful (Solid line).
(6) The executed command No. will be written to the “Executed command No.” area.
(7) The command execution result is written to the “Command execution result” area.
(8) The upper limit, lower limit and hysteresis values of the Tolerance judgment are written to their respective areas.
(9) If the “Command processing request “ bit is changed from 1 to 0 in preparation for the next command execution, the “Command execution
completed” and “Command execution failed” bits will become 0 as well ((10), (11)).

7-36 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Message Communication

Message communication Service object

Message communication is a function for communicating using objects
and services (Service Code) available on EtherNet/IP devices by „ Object configuration
issuing commands at arbitrary timing.
Class ID Object name Description
Some objects and services in message communication are defined by
the standard, while others are specific to this controller. Measurement This object provides writing/reading of
This controller allows you to perform operations such as reading/writing 71H
Object * the controller status and parameters.
parameters, reset, etc. using specific objects and/or services.
The message communication function of this controller is An object that provides a controller
01H Identity Object
compatible with the UCMM (Unconnected) and Class 3 reset, etc.
(Connected) of the CIP standard.
* “Measurement Object” is a vendor-specific object prepared by
KEYENCE, and is not an object included in the EtherNet/IP protocol.
„ Objects and services
Message communication uses objects and services to send/receive
data. „ Measurement Object
Executing a service for an object of this controller will trigger operations
such as data output, reading of settings and execution of a specified
z Class
Class service
operation.
Service
„ Basic format for message communication code
Service name Description
In message communication, the PLC and this controller communicate
by sending and receiving Explicit messages. When a message is sent 0EH GetAttributeSingle Obtain the content of the attribute.
from the PLC in the Explicit message format, the controller will return a
response to the PLC. Class attribute (Instance ID:00H)

z Command Service
Name Description
code
Item Contents
The revision of this object is
Service code Specify the service.
displayed.
01H Revision
Class ID Specify the class ID according to the service. Revision = 2 (Fixed value) on this
controller.
Specify the instance ID according to the

7
Instance ID
service. z Instance
Instance service
Specify the attribute ID according to the
Attribute ID
service. Service
Service name Description
code

Communication control
Specify the service data according to the
Service data
service. Execute various communication
commands.
Communication
4BH It can be used for measurement
z Response command execution
control, settings change/check, and
Item Contents so on.

Return the general status for the command. Instance attribute (Instance ID: 01H)
General status (1
00H is returned when the operation is There is no attribute ID.
byte)
successful.

Additional status (2
Return the additional status.
bytes)

Service response
Return the command result data.
data

„ Message communications operation

Send
command

Send
response

To execute a service for this controller, send a command from the PLC.
This controller returns a response as the service execution result.
When sending a command, the service code, class ID, instance ID,
and attribute ID are specified. To write parameters, the setting values
(Service data) will be required.
Command Response
Service code General status
Class ID Additional status
Instance ID Service response data
Attribute ID
Service data

* The attribute ID and service data may be unnecessary depending

on the command used.
Service response data may not be output depending on the
command used.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-37

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Communication command execution service

„ Parameter description „ Example of data
z Sent data (PLC → This unit) z Sent data (PLC → This unit)
To switch the program No. to 3 using the “Switch programs” command
Item Description (Command No.20).
4BH Fixed value (Communication command Example
Service code Item Description
execution service) of data

Class ID 71H Fixed value (Measurement Object) Fixed value

Service code 4BH (Communication command
Instance ID 01H Fixed value execution service)
There is no attribute ID in this service. If the Fixed value
Attribute ID attribute ID is specified, the service will be Class ID 71H
(Measurement Object)
executed ignoring it.
Instance ID 01H Fixed value
Store the command No. to be sent to the
controller. There is no attribute ID in this
Service data
Refer to “Command List” (Page 7-4) for service. If the attribute ID is
Attribute ID -
the command No. specified, the service will be
executed ignoring it.

This is the command number for

z Received data (This unit → PLC) Service data 0 20
switching the program.
Item Description (DWORD unit)
1 3 Switch the program number to 3.
Store the service execution result.
• 00H: This service was executed
successfully.
z Received data (This unit → PLC)
Example 1: When the service was executed successfully
• 0CH: This service has failed. If the “program switching” command is executed normally, “00H” is
• Refer to the error code (RS-232C command stored to the general status since the command processing is executed,
error) included in the service response data. and the error code indicating the execution result is stored to the
General status
• 05H: The class ID or instance ID is out of second data of the response data.
range.
• 08H: This service cannot be executed with Example
Item Description
of data
the specified class ID or instance ID.

7 • 13H: The service data size is smaller than

the specification.

There are no additional statuses in this

General status 00H
The service was executed
successfully.

Additional status There are no additional statuses

service. Additional status -
Communication control

in this service.
It stores the command to be returned to The executed command number
the external device, after the controller has 0 20
is stored.
Service response executed the command received from the Response data
data external device. (DWORD unit) The error code is stored.
Refer to “Command Details” (Page 7-6) 1 3 0 is stored when there is no
for the command format. error code.

Example 2: When the service execution fails

By the “program switching” command, if the number other than the
program number that can be designated (0 - 7) is mistakenly specified,
“00H” is stored to the general status since the command processing is
executed, and the error code indicating the execution result is stored to
the second data of the response data.

Example
Item Description
of data

General status 0CH Failed to execute the service.

There are no additional statuses

Additional status -
in this service.

The executed command number

0 20
is stored.
Response data
(DWORD unit) The error code is stored.
1 83 The parameter range error (83)
is stored.

7-38 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using EtherNet/IP

Identity Object
z Reset service
The Reset service is one of the CIP standard services, and has a function to realize the operation which is equivalent to the power restart (emulate).
Upon accepting this service, this controller will stop all functions, disconnect the communications and reload the settings. The Reset service is used as a
restart request to apply settings that require a controller reboot (e.g. IP address).
The Reset service must execute with the instance ID of the Identity object set to 01H.

• Commands received during a Reset processing may be discarded.

• The response to the Reset service is sent back before this controller starts the reset process.

Service
Service code Service data (1 byte)
name

00H : Emulate a power reset. (Initial value)

01H : Reset the following network settings to the factory default settings and emulate a power reset.
Factory default settings
• IP Address setting at the Next Power On: BOOTP -> Fixed IP address
• IP Address: 192.168.0.1
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway: 192.168.0.254
05H Reset
• EtherNet/IP enable/disable: 1 (enable)
• Multicast TTL: 1
• Multicast allocation method: 0 (Auto)
• Multicast addresses: 1
• Multicast start address: 244.0.0.0
* If it is set to 02H or greater, the CIP error code 03H (Invalid parameter value) will be returned when the Reset
service is received.

Communication control

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-39

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Overview of PROFINET Connection Cyclic communication specification

PROFINET is the open communication standard specified by
PROFIBUS & PROFINET International (PI). This is based on an
Ethernet in general, and it can be used mixed with the generic Ethernet Cyclic Communication Function
communication. This is the function to perform data communication between the
For PROFINET, there are IRT (Isochronous Real-Time) communication PROFINET controller and device by cyclic (certain period).
used for the high speed synchronization control such as motion control For the cyclic communication, the data I/O communication is used. For
and ms order real time network RT (Real-Time) communication, and PROFINET, the device data is managed by module, and specify the
this unit is supported by the RT (Real-Time) communication. module address using a slot.
This unit operates as a PROFINET I/O device compatible to the For this unit, input data (this unit -> controller) is specified by slot1 to 3
Conformance Class A, and supports the cyclic communication and module, whereas the output data (controller -> this unit) is specified by
alarm communication. slot4 to 5 module.

What Can be Done by Cyclic Communication

Communication Specifications z Check the controller status
• Read the system status
Supported • Read the system error code
transmission 100BASE-TX • Read the status of the measuring devices (Laser OFF, Stop
speed measurement, and so on)

Supported Cyclic Communication (I/O communication) z Output the measurement result

function Alarm communication • Read the OUT measured value status (Judgment standby, invalid,
etc.)
• RPI: 1
 , 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, and • Read OUT measurement value
PROFINET 512 ms • Read judgment result
Cyclic
• Number of controllers that can be connected:
communication
1 z Controlling the controller
• Execute various communication commands
Suitable protocol LLDP, DCP • Start/stop/initialize the data storage
• Read the storage status and points of the data storage

7
PNIO version V2.32 • Control the inputs (Timing, auto zero, reset, etc.)
• Read the control status of the measuring devices
Conformance (Timing, auto zero, reset, etc.)
Conformance Class A compatible
class • Switch programs
• Reading the current program No.
* P
 ROFINET cannot be used with EtherNet/IP or PLC link at the same
Communication control

time.
Module which Can be Used
• slot1: BIT area of the input data
• slot2: WORD area of the input data
• slot3: DWORD area of the input data
• slot4: BIT area of the output data
• slot5: DWORD area of the output data
Refer to “Memory map” (Page 7-41) for details.

7-40 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Memory map
„ Monitor data list (This unit -> PLC)
Monitor data are devices that write responses from this unit to the PLC. If this device is used, the functions of each device will be assigned as shown
below.
Address
Area Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Warning
0 B007 B006 B005 B004 B003 B002 B001 B000 Error status
System status status

1 B00F B00E B00D B00C B00B B00A B009 B008

Measurement Measurement Storage Emission

2 B017 B016 B015 B014 Storage FULL B013 B012 B011 RUN B010
operation stopped in operation stopped
status
3 B01F B01E B01D B01C B01B B01A B019 B018

Enabled 4 B027 OUT8 B026 OUT7 B025 OUT6 B024 OUT5 B023 OUT4 B022 OUT3 B021 OUT2 B020 OUT1
status 5 B02F B02E B02D B02C B02B B02A B029 B028

Judgment 6 B037 OUT8 B036 OUT7 B035 OUT6 B034 OUT5 B033 OUT4 B032 OUT3 B031 OUT2 B030 OUT1
standby
status 7 B03F B03E B03D B03C B03B B03A B039 B038

Display range 8 B047 OUT8 B046 OUT7 B045 OUT6 B044 OUT5 B043 OUT4 B042 OUT3 B041 OUT2 B040 OUT1
exceeded
status 9 B04F B04E B04D B04C B04B B04A B049 B048

Disabled 10 B057 OUT8 B056 OUT7 B055 OUT6 B054 OUT5 B053 OUT4 B052 OUT3 B051 OUT2 B050 OUT1
status 11 B05F B05E B05D B05C B05B B05A B059 B058

12 B067 OUT8 B066 OUT7 B065 OUT6 B064 OUT5 B063 OUT4 B062 OUT3 B061 OUT2 B060 OUT1
Timing status
13 B06F B06E B06D B06C B06B B06A B069 B068

Auto zero 14 B077 OUT8 B076 OUT7 B075 OUT6 B074 OUT5 B073 OUT4 B072 OUT3 B071 OUT2 B070 OUT1
status 15 B07F B07E B07D B07C B07B B07A B079 B078

Reserved 16 - 19

Judgment 20 B0A7 OUT8 B0A6 OUT7 B0A5 OUT6 B0A4 OUT5 B0A3 OUT4 B0A2 OUT3 B0A1 OUT2 B0A0 OUT1
output
(HI) 21 B0AF B0AE B0AD B0AC B0AB B0AA B0A9 B0A8

Judgment 22 B0B7 OUT8 B0B6 OUT7 B0B5 OUT6 B0B4 OUT5 B0B3 OUT4 B0B2 OUT3 B0B1 OUT2 B0B0 OUT1
output
(LO) 23 B0BF B0BE B0BD B0BC B0BB B0BA B0B9 B0B8

Judgment 24 B0C7 OUT8 B0C6 OUT7 B0C5 OUT6 B0C4 OUT5 B0C3 OUT4 B0C2 OUT3 B0C1 OUT2 B0C0 OUT1

7
output (GO) 25 B0CF B0CE B0CD B0CC B0CB B0CA B0C9 B0C8
BIT
Area
(slot1) Reserved 26, 27

Program Command
28 B0E7 B0E6 B0E5 B0E4 B0E3 B0E2 switching B0E1 execution B0E0
Operation completed completion

Communication control
order
completed Measurement Measurement
Emission start Emission stop Clear Storage Storage stop Storage start
29 B0EF B0EE B0ED B0EC start B0EB stop B0EA B0E9 B0E8
completed completed completed completed completed
completed completed

Reserved 30, 31

Timing 32 B0107 OUT8 B0106 OUT7 B0105 OUT6 B0104 OUT5 B0103 OUT4 B0102 OUT3 B0101 OUT2 B0100 OUT1
completed 33 B010F B010E B010D B010C B010B B010A B0109 B0108

Auto zero 34 B0117 OUT8 B0116 OUT7 B0115 OUT6 B0114 OUT5 B0113 OUT4 B0112 OUT3 B0111 OUT2 B0110 OUT1
completed 35 B011F B011E B011D B011C B011B B011A B0119 B0118

Reset 36 B0127 OUT8 B0126 OUT7 B0125 OUT6 B0124 OUT5 B0123 OUT4 B0122 OUT3 B0121 OUT2 B0120 OUT1
completed 37 B012F B012E B012D B012C B012B B012A B0129 B0128

Reserved 38, 39

Program Command
40 B0147 B0146 B0145 B0144 B0143 B0142 switching B0141 execution B0140
Operation failed failed
order failure
Emission start Emission stop Measurement Measurement Clear Storage Storage stop Storage start
41 B014F B014E B014D B014C B014B B014A B0149 B0148
failure failure start failure stop failure failure failure failure

Reserved 42, 43

44 B0167 OUT8 B0166 OUT7 B0165 OUT6 B0164 OUT5 B0163 OUT4 B0162 OUT3 B0161 OUT2 B0160 OUT1
Timing failure
45 B016F B016E B016D B016C B016B B016A B0169 B0168

Auto zero 46 B0177 OUT8 B0176 OUT7 B0175 OUT6 B0174 OUT5 B0173 OUT4 B0172 OUT3 B0171 OUT2 B0170 OUT1
failure 47 B017F B017E B017D B017C B017B B017A B0179 B0178

48 B0187 OUT8 B0186 OUT7 B0185 OUT6 B0184 OUT5 B0183 OUT4 B0182 OUT3 B0181 OUT2 B0180 OUT1
Reset failed
49 B018F B018E B018D B018C B018B B018A B0189 B0188

Reserved 50, 51

Error code 52, 53 W000 Error code

WORD Reserved 54, 55
area
(slot2) Warning code 56, 57 W002 Warning code

Reserved 58, 59

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-41

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Address
Area Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Current
60 - 63 W004 Current program number
program No.

Storage data
64 - 67 W006 Storage data point
point

Pulse
68 - 71 W008 Pulse count value
count value

Reserved 72 - 75

Measured
76 - 79 W00C Measured value OUT1
value OUT1

Measured
80 - 83 W00E Measured value OUT2
value OUT2

Measured
84 - 87 W010 Measured value OUT3
value OUT3

Measured
88 - 91 W012 Measured value OUT4
value OUT4

Measured
92 - 95 W014 Measured value OUT5
value OUT5

Measured
96 - 99 W016 Measured value OUT6
value OUT6

Measured
100 - 103 W018 Measured value OUT7
value OUT7

Measured
104 - 107 W01A Measured value OUT8
value OUT8

Reserved 108 - 139

Measurement
value update 140 - 143 W02C Measurement value update count OUT1
count OUT1

Measurement
value update 144 - 147 W02E Measurement value update count OUT2
count OUT2

Measurement
value update 148 - 151 W030 Measurement value update count OUT3
count OUT3

Measurement
value update 152 - 155 W032 Measurement value update count OUT4
count OUT4

Measurement

7
value update 156 - 159 W034 Measurement value update count OUT5
count OUT5

Measurement
value update 160 - 163 W036 Measurement value update count OUT6
DWORD count OUT6
area Measurement
Communication control

(slot3) value update 164 - 167 W038 Measurement value update count OUT7
count OUT7

Measurement
value update 168 - 171 W03A Measurement value update count OUT8
count OUT8

Reserved 172 - 203

Executed
204 - 207 W04C Executed command No.
command No.

Command
execution 208 - 211 W04E Command execution result
result

Response
212 - 215 W050 Response data 1
data 1

Response
216 - 219 W052 Response data 2
data 2

Response
220 - 223 W054 Response data 3
data 3

Response
224 - 227 W056 Response data 4
data 4

Response
228 - 231 W058 Response data 5
data 5

Response
232 - 235 W05A Response data 6
data 6

Response
236 - 239 W05C Response data 7
data 7

Response
240 - 243 W05E Response data 8
data 8

Response
244 - 247 W060 Response data 9
data 9

Response
248 - 251 W062 Response data 10
data 10

Response
252 - 255 W064 Response data 11
data 11

Response
256 - 259 W066 Response data 12
data 12

Response
260 - 263 W068 Response data 13
data 13

Response
264 - 267 W06A Response data 14
data 14

Response
268 - 271 W06C Response data 15
data 15

7-42 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

„ Control data list (PLC ->This unit)

Control data are devices that write instructions to the unit from the PLC. If this device is used, the functions of each device will be assigned as shown
below.
Address
Area Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Program Command
0 B01A7 B01A6 B01A5 B01A4 B01A3 B01A2 switching B01A1 processing B01A0
Operation request request
order request
Emission start Emission stop Measurement Measurement Clear Storage Storage stop Storage start
1 B01AF B01AE B01AD B01AC B01AB B01AA B01A9 B01A8
request request start request stop request request request request

Reserved 2, 3

4 B01C7 OUT8 B01C6 OUT7 B01C5 OUT6 B01C4 OUT5 B01C3 OUT4 B01C2 OUT3 B01C1 OUT2 B01C0 OUT1
Timing
request
5 B01CF B01CE B01CD B01CC B01CB B01CA B01C9 B01C8

6 B01D7 OUT8 B01D6 OUT7 B01D5 OUT6 B01D4 OUT5 B01D3 OUT4 B01D2 OUT3 B01D1 OUT2 B01D0 OUT1
Auto zero
BIT request
7 B01DF B01DE B01DD B01DC B01DB B01DA B01D9 B01D8
Area
(slot4)
8 B01E7 OUT8 B01E6 OUT7 B01E5 OUT6 B01E4 OUT5 B01E3 OUT4 B01E2 OUT3 B01E1 OUT2 B01E0 OUT1
Reset request
9 B01EF B01EE B01ED B01EC B01EB B01EA B01E9 B01E8

Reserved 10 - 15

Timing 16 B0227 OUT8 B0226 OUT7 B0225 OUT6 B0224 OUT5 B0223 OUT4 B0222 OUT3 B0221 OUT2 B0220 OUT1
ON/OFF
specification 17 B022F B022E B022D B022C B022B B022A B0229 B0228

Auto zero 18 B0237 OUT8 B0236 OUT7 B0235 OUT6 B0234 OUT5 B0233 OUT4 B0232 OUT3 B0231 OUT2 B0230 OUT1
ON/OFF
specification 19 B023F B023E B023D B023C B023B B023A B0239 B0238

Reserved 20 - 23

Program
No. 24 - 27 W06E Specify program number
specification

Reservation 28 - 31

Command
32 - 35 W072 Command No.
No.

Command
36 - 39 W074 Command parameter 1
parameter 1

Command
parameter 2

Command
parameter 3
40 - 43

44 - 47
W076

W078
Command parameter 2

Command parameter 3
7

Communication control
Command
48 - 51 W07A Command parameter 4
parameter 4

Command
52 - 55 W07C Command parameter 5
parameter 5

Command
56 - 59 W07E Command parameter 6
parameter 6
DWORD
Command
area 60 - 63 W080 Command parameter 7
parameter 7
(slot5)
Command
64 - 67 W082 Command parameter 8
parameter 8

Command
68 - 71 W084 Command parameter 9
parameter 9

Command
72 - 75 W086 Command parameter 10
parameter 10

Command
76 - 79 W088 Command parameter 11
parameter 11

Command
80 - 83 W08A Command parameter 12
parameter 12

Command
84 - 87 W08C Command parameter 13
parameter 13

Command
88 - 91 W08E Command parameter 14
parameter 14

Command
92 - 95 W090 Command parameter 15
parameter 15

Command
96 - 99 W092 Command parameter 16
parameter 16

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-43

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Monitor data details

„ Parameter Details (This Unit -> PLC)
Item Contents

Output the error status of the unit.

When ON, the value is stored in “Error code”. When OFF, 0 is stored in “Error code".
Error status
• ON: An error has occurred.
• OFF: No error has occurred.

Output the warning status of the unit.

When ON, the value is stored in “Warning code”. When OFF, 0 is stored in “Warning code".
Warning status
• ON: A warning has occurred.
• OFF: No warning has occurred.

RUN This bit becomes 1 in the case of the measurement mode.

Output the measurement-related status (Emission stop, Measurement stop, Storage in operation, Storage
FULL).
Measurement operation status
• ON: Status is ON
• OFF: Status is OFF

When the measurement value of each OUT is in the judgment standby, range exceeded, or invalid status,
0 will be stored in this bit. If this bit is 1, the measurement value and judgment output of each OUT will be
Enabled status OUT1 to 8 enabled.
• ON: Measurement values are enabled.
• OFF: The measurement value is disabled (in judgment standby, range exceeded, or invalid status).

• Judgment standby status OUT1 to 8 If the measurement value of each OUT is in a status described on the left, this bit will become 1.
• Display range exceeded status OUT1 to 8 • ON: The measurement value is in a status described on the left.
• Invalid status OUT1 to 8 • OFF: The measurement value is not in a status described on the left.

It indicates the status of each signal for the respective OUT.

• Timing status OUT1 to 8
• ON: The left signal is ON.
• Auto zero status OUT1 to 8
• OFF: The left signal is OFF

It indicates the judgment output status of each OUT measurement value.

Judgment output (HI/LO/GO) • ON: Each output is ON.
• OFF: Each output is OFF

7 •
•
•
Command execution completion
Program switching completed
Storage start completed
• Storage stop completed
Communication control

• Clear Storage completed

It indicates whether each processing request has completed (succeeded).
• Measurement stop completed
• ON: The processing request has completed (succeeded).
• Measurement start completed
• OFF: The processing request has not completed (succeeded).
• Emission stop completed
• Emission start completed
• Timing completed OUT1 to 8
• Auto zero completed OUT1 to 8
• Reset completed OUT1 to 8

• Command execution failure

• Program switching failed
• Storage start failure
• Storage stop failure
• Clear Storage failure
It indicates whether each processing request has failed.
• Measurement stop failure
• ON: The processing request has failed.
• Measurement start failure
• OFF: The processing request has not failed.
• Emission stop failure
• Emission start failure
• Timing failed OUT1 to 8
• Auto zero failed OUT1 to 8
• Reset failed OUT1 to 8

Current program number It stores the current program No. (0 to 7). (32 bit DINT type)

Store the number of the actual stored data in the result of using the data storage function. (32 bit DINT
Number of storage data points
type)

Store the number of pulses input to the encoder unit. (32 bit DINT type)
Pulse count value
It is only enabled when using an encoder trigger.

Store the measurement value (32 bit DINT type) of each OUT.
(Example) If “1032” is stored when the minimum display unit is "0.01 mm”, it means that the measurement
value is "10.32 mm".
When in a special status, measurement values are output as described below.
Measured value OUT1 to 8
• Invalid data:
• Judgment standby data: -999998
• + Range exceeded: +999999
• - Range exceeded: -999999

Count up by +1 at the timing when the measurement value is updated for each OUT.
Measurement value update count OUT1 to 8
The count range is 0 to 4294967295 and it will go to 0 when counted up from 4294967295.

Store the reply to the external device after the controller has executed the command received from the
Executed command No. and response
external device.
data
Refer to “Command List” (Page 7-4) for the command format.

7-44 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Control Data Details

„ Parameter Details (PLC -> This Unit)
Item Contents

• ON: Execute the command specified by command No. and command parameters.
Command processing request
• OFF: Set command execution completed/execution failed to OFF.

• ON: Switch the current program to the specified program No.

Program switching request
• OFF: Set program switching completed/switching failed to OFF.

• Storage start request

• Storage stop request
• Clear Storage request
• ON: Execute the process.
• Measurement stop request
• OFF: Set processing completed/processing failed to OFF.
• Measurement start request
• Emission stop request
• Emission start request

• ON: Each control process is executed in the specified status (ON or OFF).
• Timing request OUT1 to 8
• OFF: Set processing completed/processing failed to OFF.
• Auto zero request OUT1 to 8
* The “ON/OFF specification” bit provided for each control process is used to specify the status.

• ON: Execute the process.

Reset request OUT1 to 8
• OFF: Set processing completed/processing failed to OFF.

Specify whether to execute each control process in ON status or OFF status.

• Timing ON/OFF specification OUT1 to 8
• ON: Control processing is ON.
• Auto zero ON/OFF specification
• OFF: Control processing is OFF.
OUT1 to 8
*The process is executed using the “Request” bit provided for each control.

Specify which program No. (0 to 7) to switch to when a program switching is requested.

Specify program number (32 bit DINT type)
* The “Program switching request” bit is used to execute the process.

Store the command No. and its parameters to be sent to the controller.
Command No. and command parameters Refer to “Command List” (Page 7-4) for the command format.
* The “Command processing request” bit is used to execute the command.

Communication control

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-45

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Changing PROFINET Settings Ethernet settings for PROFINET

Perform the PROFINET communication settings in the [Field network] communication
tab of [Environment settings].

The field network settings are implemented after

rebooting controller. IP Address Setting
This unit IP address is set based on the device name.

1 Click [Environment] on the main screen.

2 Select the [Field network] tab, then [PROFINET].

3 Click [Edit] of [Device name].

• [Setting of IP address at the next power on] is [Fixed IP

address].
• In the case of PROFINET connection, CL-3000 series IP
address is written from PLC based on the device name
at connection.

Detection Function of IP Address Conflict

4 Specify [Device name] and click [OK]. Detect the IP address conflict during the normal operation as well, and if

7
the IP address conflicts, it becomes the status of error in the case of the
IP address conflict.
Communication control

Set the device name.

For PROFINET, the device management is conducted by the device
name.
• The device name is configured by multiple labels. It signifies the
character string separated by [.] (dot) with the labels.
• The [device name] needs to be matched with the soft on the
PROFINET controller.
• The initial value is “cl-3000”.

Enter the device name conforming the following

rule:
• The device name should be 240 characters or
less.
• The label should be 63 characters or less.
• Use “a” to “z”, “0” to “9”, and “-” only for the
label.
• Do not use “-” (hyphen) for the beginning and
ending of the characters of the label.
• Do not use “-” (hyphen) for the beginning and
ending of the device name.
• Do not use the expression of port-x (x is a
number) in the device name.
• Do not use the expression of n.n.n.n (n is a
number) in the device name.

5 Click [OK] to restart the controller.

7-46 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Operation example
„ Example 1: Read the measurement value of the controller.
The OUT measurement values of OUT1 to OUT8 can be read.
PLC
OUT1 measurement value update
n n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4
counter

Measured Value of OUT

Controller
Measurement value update counter of
n n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4
OUT1
Measured Value of OUT1
This is an example of reading the measurement value of OUT1 when the measurement mode is set to Normal.
• When the measurement value of OUT1 and the measurement value update counter is updated, it will be input into the IN area using cyclic
communication.

„ Example 2: Handshake processing of a timing request

PLC
(1)
1
Timing ON/OFF specification
0

1 (2) (5)
Timing request
0
Controller (3)
1 (6)
Timing completed
0

1 (4)
Timing failure (7)
0

(8)

7
1
Timing status
0

(1) To insert a Timing ON input, set the “Timing ON/OFF specification” bit corresponding to the desired OUT to 1.
(2) Set the “Timing request” bit corresponding to the OUT from 0 to 1.

Communication control
(3) If the timing input is successful, the “Timing completed” bit will become 1 (Solid line). The bit will remain 0 if failed (Dotted line).
(4) If the timing input fails, the “Timing failed” bit will become 1 (Dotted line). The bit will remain 0 if successful (Solid line).
(5) If “Timing request” bit is changed from 1 to 0, the “Timing completed” and “Timing failed” bits become 0 as well ((6), (7)).
(8) You can check the Timing ON/OFF status in “Timing status”.

„ Example 3: Handshake processing of a program switching request

PLC (1)
1
Specify program number 00H 03H
0

(2) (5)
1
Program change request
0
Controller
1
Program change completed (3) (6)
0

1 (4)
Program change failure (7)
0
(8)
1
Program No. No.0 No.3
0

(1) Enter the program No. to switch to in the “Specify program number” area.
(2) Change the “Program switching request” bit from 0 to 1.
(3) If the program switching is successful, the “Program switching completed” bit will change from 0 to 1 (Solid line). The bit will remain 0 if failed (Dotted
line).
(4) If the program switching fails, the “Program switching failed” bit will change from 0 to 1 (Dotted line). The bit will remain 0 if successful (Dotted line).
(5) If the “Program switching request” bit is changed from 1 to 0, the “Program switching completed” and “Program switching failed” bits will become 0 as
well ((6), (7)).
(8) The “Program No.” will change from No.0 to No.3.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-47

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

„ Example 4: Change the tolerance comparator value.

PLC (1)
1
Command No. 54
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 1 1
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 2 1000
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 3 -500
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 4 20
0

1 (3)
Command processing (9)
request
0
Controller
1
Command execution (4)
(10)
completion 0

1 (5)
Command execution failure (11)
0

(6)
1
Executed command No. 54
0

(7)
1
Command execution result 0

7
0

(8)
Tolerance judgment (Upper 1
limit) 0.1000 mm
0

(8)
Communication control

Tolerance judgment (Lower 1

limit) -0.0500 mm
0

(8)
1
Tolerance comparator
0.0020 mm
(Hysteresis) 0

(1) Enter the desired command No. into the command No. area. The command No. for writing the tolerance comparator value is 54.
(2) Enter the command parameter. When writing the tolerance judgment values, enter the values in the order of OUT No., upper limit, lower limit,
followed by hysteresis.
(3) The command will be executed when “Command processing request” bit is set from 0 to 1.
(4) If the command processing is successful, the “Command execution completed” bit will become 1 (Solid line). The bit will remain 0 if failed (Dotted
line).
(5) If the command processing fails, the “Command execution failed” bit will become 1 (Dotted line). The bit will remain 0 if successful (Solid line).
(6) The executed command No. will be written to the “Executed command No.” area.
(7) The command execution result is written to the “Command execution result” area.
(8) The upper limit, lower limit and hysteresis values of the tolerance comparator are written to their respective areas.
(9) If the “Command processing request “ bit is changed from 1 to 0 in preparation for the next command execution, the “Command execution
completed” and “Command execution failed” bits will become 0 as well ((10), (11)).

7-48 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Alarm communication
The alarm communication function is the function that can perform data communication of the contents etc. when error occurs in the PROFINET controller
equipment and devices.
The alarm sent from this unit is “Alarm Low”.

An alarm communication occurs when occurring the following system error (A) or (B).
The error detail can be confirmed by the error code included in I/O communication.

z Error Handling
Non-procedural
Error level Terminal output Status LED Display panel CL-NavigatorN
communication

Error output ON,

System error (A) Solid (Red) Err+** Error message display Error code response
RUN output OFF

Error output ON,

System error (B) Solid (Red) Err+** Error message display Error code response
RUN output OFF

Setting error - Solid (Green) Err+** Error message display Error code response

Warning Warning output ON Solid (Green) Warn** Warning display -

There are four types of errors and warnings depending on their level.
• System error (A) : Even if the cause of the error is eliminated, the error will not be cleared until the unit is restarted.
• System error (B) : The error is cleared when the cause of the error is eliminated.
• Setting error : If there is an error in the setting, the setting will not be applied and an error notification will be displayed.
• Warning : The warning is cleared when the cause of the warning is eliminated. Measurement will be performed even in warning status.

Communication control

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-49

 Control/Data Output via PLC Link

Control/Data Output via PLC Link

Overview of PLC Link Function

The following function can be realized by utilizing PLC produced by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation and PLC link function by Ethernet interface.
• Output the measurement data
The measurement data of this unit can be output directly to the data register (D) within the PLC.
• Control this unit
This unit can be controlled by reading the command in the PLC data register (D).
PLC link, EtherNet/IP, and PROFINET cannot be used at the same time.

Models Supported for PLC Link Connection

The PLCs of which this unit supports for the PLC link connection is as follows:
• The data memory range that can be used varies depending on the target system. For the details, refer to the manual for each PLC.
• Only the connections via the link unit are supported except some models.

PLC produced by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Series Protocol Target system Link unit

MELSEC iQ-R MC protocol (3E) R04ENCPU * RJ71EN71

FX5U * None **
MELSEC iQ-F MC protocol (3E)
FX5UC * None **

Q00CPU QJ71E71-100

Q02HCPU QJ71E71-100

7
Q02UCPU QJ71E71-100

Q03UDCPU QJ71E71-100

MELSEC-Q MC protocol (3E) Q26UDHCPU QJ71E71-100

Communication control

Q03UDECPU* QJ71E71-100

Q04UDEHCPU* QJ71E71-100

Q100UDEHCPU * QJ71E71-100

Q03UDVCPU* QJ71E71-100

L02CPU * None **
MELSEC-L MC protocol (3E)
L26CPU-BT None **

FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U
FX3U-ENET-L

FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3UC
MELSEC-FX MC protocol (1E) FX3U-ENET-L

FX3G FX3U-ENET-ADP

FX3GC FX3U-ENET-ADP

FX3S FX3U-ENET-ADP

* Supports Ethernet interface connection of this unit as well.

** Does not support the connection via the link unit.

7-50 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via PLC Link

Preparing the PLC z Handshake

Select [Disabled] (initial value) or [Enabled].

z Control data address

Specify the address by even number for storing “operation order
1. Overview of wiring request” that is the leading of the control data to this unit.
Wiring of this unit and PLC is connected by the Ethernet cable as • Data are stored in the order of the control data list (operation order
following figure. request, reservation, command number, ...) with the specified address
(example of not using HUB but connecting directly) set as leading.
• Store the command No. to the specified address by 32 bits binary
PLC Controller with the format of number-specified command (page 7-8 to 7-17),
and store command parameters consecutively from address +2 by 32
bits binary per data.
PLC • Set them so that the area is not duplicated with the monitor data
(CPU built-in port or Ethernet address.
link unit)
The maximum range of data memory that this unit can
write in PLC is as follows:
• MELSEC iQ-R/iQ-F/Q/L series: 00000 to 32767
• MELSEC FX series: 0000 to 7999
2. Settings of this unit The data memory range that can be actually used differs
Change the settings of this unit to the settings to perform data output/ depending on the PLC specifications or settings even in
control by PLC link. the same series. Therefore, it is possible not to be used
until the maximum range.
If the link is established normally, the controller NETWORK
LED turns to light on (green).
3. Wire connection at PLC link and settings on
1 Click [Environment] on the main screen. the PLC side
2 Select the [Field network] tab, then [PLC link]. • Be careful for the IP address not to be duplicated with other devices.
• Use the STP cable with the category 5e or above for the connection.

„ Connecting with MELSEC (link unit)

z iQ-R series
Set it by the unit parameter of GX Works 3.
From the unit list of [Basic Settings] > [Setting Other Party Connection
Environment] > [Detailed Settings], add [UDP Connecting Device] to the
Ethernet configuration, and perform settings as follows:

3 Perform [PLC link connection settings]. Correspondence

method
Select either [Fixed buffer (with procedure)] or
[Random access buffer].

Set port number as a decimal number for both

7
Sequencer
of them within the following range.

Communication control
(port number)/
1025 (0x0401) to 4999 (0x1387)
sensor and device
5010 (0x1392) to 24685 (0x606D)
(port number)
24687 (0x606F) to 65534 (0xFFFE)

Sensor device
Set the IP address of this unit.
(IP address)

Keep Alive Select [No existence confirmation].

Writing enabled/
disabled setting in Select [Enable].
Run mode setting

z Protocol z Q series
Select [MC protocol (3E)] or [MC protocol (1E)]. Set it by the network parameter of GX-Developer or GX Works 2.
• MELSECNET/Ethernet
z Communication destination IP address Network type Select [Ethernet].
Specify the IP address of the communication destination unit.

z Communication destination port Mode Select [Online].

Enter the port number used for the PLC link.
• Operation settings
• Set so that the self port number, communication
Set the IP address specified to the
destination port number, and this device port IP Address
communication destination address in the
number are the same. settings
PLC link settings of this unit.
• The port number that can be used differs
depending on the PLC and link unit to be Set port number as a decimal number within
communicated. the following range.
Local station
1025 (0x0401) to 4999 (0x1387)
port No.
z Communication cycle 5003 (0x138B) to 24685 (0x606D)
Enter the shortest communication interval (ms) to output the 24687 (0x606F) to 65534 (0xFFFE)
measurement value.
Communications
Select [Binary code communication].
z Monitor data address data code settings
Specify the leading address of the data memory by even number where
this unit output to PLC. Writing enabled/
• The specification for the address is only for the leading, and multiple disabled setting in Select [Enable].
addresses cannot be specified at the same time. Run mode setting
• “Operation order response” is assigned to the specified leading
address, and the rests are assigned as monitor data list. Initial timing setting Select [Wait always OPEN].
“Monitor data list (This unit -> PLC)” (Page 7-53)
• Set them so that the area is not duplicated with the control data Send frame setting Select [Ethernet (V2.0)].
address.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-51

 Control/Data Output via PLC Link

z Connecting with MELSEC-FX series (FX3U-ENET-ADP)

Set the communication conditions by FX parameter settings of GX Works2
„ Connecting with MELSEC (built-in Ethernet port)
as follows: • Different from QJ71E71-100, the built-in Ethernet port
• Ethernet port settings is not supported for the automatic open UDP port
(Port number initial setting value: 5000).
CH to be used Select [CH1] or [CH2]. • Do not connect multiple controllers to one port
number. If connecting multiple controllers via hub,
IP Address
This is arbitrary. set different communication destination port number
settings
for each controller, and set multiple self station port
Communications number that corresponds to each one.
Select [Binary code communication].
data code settings

Prohibit the direct

z iQ-R/iQ-F series
Set it by the unit parameter of GX Works 3.
connection with Set this unchecked. • Self node settings
MELSOFT
Set the IP address specified to the
Do not respond IP address communication destination address in the
CPU search on Set this unchecked. PLC link settings of this unit.
network
Communications
• Open settings Select [Binary].
data code settings
Protocol Select [UDP]. Settings of Allow/
Select (SLMP) that is allowed in batch.
Prohibit writing
Open style Select [MC protocol]. (Only in the case of iQ-R)
during RUN
Communication
• Partner device connection configuration setting
destination This is arbitrary. From the unit list of [Basic Settings] > [Setting Other Party Connection
IP address Environment] > [Detailed Settings], add [SLMP Connecting Device] to
the Ethernet configuration, and perform settings as follows:
Set port number as a decimal number within
• Local station
the following range. Protocol Set [UDP].
port No.
1025 (0x0401) to 5548(0x15AC)
• Communication
5560 (0x15B8) to 24685(0x606D) Set port number as a decimal number for
destination port No. Sequencer
24687 (0x606F) to 65534(0xFFFE) both of them within the following range.
(port number)/
1025 (0x0401) to 4999 (0x1387)
sensor device
5010 (0x1392) to 24685 (0x606D)
z Connecting with MELSEC-FX series (FX3U-ENET-L) (port number)
24687 (0x606F) to 65534 (0xFFFE)
Set the communication conditions by FX parameter settings of GX Works2
as follows:

7
Sensor device
• Ethernet port settings Set the IP address of this unit.
(IP address)
CH to be used Select [CH3] or [CH4].

IP Address
z Q/L series
This is arbitrary. Set it by the PC parameter of GX-Developer or GX Works 2.
Communication control

settings • Built-in Ethernet port settings

Communications Set the IP address specified to the
Select [Binary code communication].
data code settings IP address communication destination address in the
PLC link settings of this unit.
• Open settings

Protocol Select [UDP]. Communications

Select [Binary code communication].
data code settings
Open style Select [MC protocol].
Writing enabled/
Communication disabled setting in Check the checkbox.
destination This is arbitrary. Run mode setting
IP address
• Open settings: add the following settings:
Set port number as a decimal number within
• Local station Protocol Select [UDP]
the following range.
port No.
1025 (0x0401) to 5548(0x15AC)
• Communication Open style Select [MC protocol].
5552 (0x15B0) to 24685(0x606D)
destination port No.
24687 (0x606F) to 65534(0xFFFE) Set port number as a decimal number within
the following range.
Local station
1025 (0x0401) to 4999 (0x1387)
port No.
5010 (0x1392) to 24685 (0x606D)
24687 (0x606F) to 65534 (0xFFFE)

7-52 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via PLC Link

Memory map
„ Monitor data list (This unit -> PLC)
Monitor data are devices that write responses from the unit to the PLC. If this device is used, the functions of each device will be assigned as shown
below.
Address
Name bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(word)

Command Data Command Data

Operation order
0 execution update execution update
response
failed failed completion completed

Reserved 1

Warning Error
System status 2
status status

Measurement Measurement Storage Storage in Emission

3 RUN
operation status stopped FULL operation stopped

Enabled status 4 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment standby
5 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
status

Display range
6 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
exceeded status

Measurement
7 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
value valid status

Timing status 8 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero status 9 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Reserved 10,11

Judgment output
12 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
(HI)

Judgment output
13 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
(LO)

Judgment output
14 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
(GO)

Reserved 15

Error code 16 Error code

Reserved

Warning code

Reserved
17

18

19
Warning code 7

Communication control
Current
20,21 Current program number
program number

Storage data point 22,23 Storage data point

Encoder
24,25 Pulse count
pulse count

Reserved 26,27

Measured value
28,29 Measured value OUT1
OUT1

Measured value
30,31 Measured value OUT2
OUT2

Measured value
32,33 Measured value OUT3
OUT3

Measured value
34,35 Measured value OUT4
OUT4

Measured value
36,37 Measured value OUT5
OUT5

Measured value
38,39 Measured value OUT6
OUT6

Measured value
40,41 Measured value OUT7
OUT7

Measured value
42,43 Measured value OUT8
OUT8

Reserved 44 - 59

Measurement value
60,61 Measurement value update count OUT1
update count OUT1

Measurement value
62,63 Measurement value update count OUT2
update count OUT2

Measurement value
64,65 Measurement value update count OUT3
update count OUT3

Measurement value
66,67 Measurement value update count OUT4
update count OUT4

Measurement value
68,69 Measurement value update count OUT5
update count OUT5

Measurement value
70,71 Measurement value update count OUT6
update count OUT6

Measurement value
72,73 Measurement value update count OUT7
update count OUT7

Measurement value
74,75 Measurement value update count OUT8
update count OUT8

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-53

 Control/Data Output via PLC Link

Address
Name bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(word)

Reserved 76 - 91

Executed
92,93 Executed command No.
command No.

Command
94,95 Command execution result
execution result

Response data 1 96,97 Response data 1

Response data 2 98,99 Response data 2

Response data 3 100,101 Response data 3

Response data 4 102,103 Response data 4

Response data 5 104,105 Response data 5

Response data 6 106,107 Response data 6

Response data 7 108,109 Response data 7

Response data 8 110,111 Response data 8

Response data 9 112,113 Response data 9

Response data 10 114,115 Response data 10

Response data 11 116,117 Response data 11

Response data 12 118,119 Response data 12

Response data 13 120,121 Response data 13

Response data 14 122,123 Response data 14

Response data 15 124,125 Response data 15

„ Control data list (PLC ->This unit)

Control data are devices that write instructions to the unit from the PLC. If this device is used, the functions of each device will be assigned as shown
below.
Address
Name bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(word)

Command Data
Operation order

7
0 processing update
request
request request

Reserved 1

Command No. 2,3 Command No.

Communication control

Command
4,5 Command parameter 1
parameter 1

Command
6,7 Command parameter 2
parameter 2

Command
8,9 Command parameter 3
parameter 3

Command
10,11 Command parameter 4
parameter 4

Command
12,13 Command parameter 5
parameter 5

Command
14,15 Command parameter 6
parameter 6

Command
16,17 Command parameter 7
parameter 7

Command
18,19 Command parameter 8
parameter 8

Command
20,21 Command parameter 9
parameter 9

Command
22,23 Command parameter 10
parameter 10

Command
24,25 Command parameter 11
parameter 11

Command
26,27 Command parameter 12
parameter 12

Command
28,29 Command parameter 13
parameter 13

Command
30,31 Command parameter 14
parameter 14

Command
32,33 Command parameter 15
parameter 15

Command
34,35 Command parameter 16
parameter 16

7-54 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via PLC Link

Monitor data details

„ Parameter Details (This Unit -> PLC)
Item Contents

It indicates whether each processing request has completed (succeeded).

• Data update completed
• ON: The processing request has completed (succeeded).
• Command execution completion
• OFF: The processing request has not completed (succeeded).

It indicates whether each processing request has failed.

• Data update failed
• ON: The processing request has failed.
• Command execution failed
• OFF: The processing request has not failed.

Output the error status of the unit.

When ON, the value is stored in “Error code”. When OFF, 0 is stored in “Error code”.
Error status
• ON: An error has occurred.
• OFF: No error has occurred.

Output the warning status of the unit.

When ON, the value is stored in “Warning code”. When OFF, 0 is stored in “Warning code”.
Warning status
• ON: A warning has occurred.
• OFF: No warning has occurred.

RUN This bit becomes 1 in the measurement mode.

Output the measurement-related status (Emission stop, Measurement stop, Storage in operation, Storage
FULL).
Measurement operation status
• ON: Status is ON
• OFF: Status is OFF

When the measurement value of each OUT is in the judgment standby, range exceeded, or invalid status,
0 will be stored in this bit. If this bit is 1, the measurement value and judgment output of each OUT will be
Enabled status OUT1 to 8 enabled.
• ON: Measurement values are enabled.
• OFF: The measurement value is disabled (in judgment standby, range exceeded, or invalid status).

• Judgment standby status OUT1 to 8 When the measurement value of each OUT is in a status described on the left, this bit will become 1.
• Display range exceeded status OUT1 to 8 • ON: The measurement value is in a status described on the left.
• Invalid status OUT1 to 8 • OFF: The measurement value is not in a status described on the left.

• Timing status OUT1 to 8

• Auto zero status OUT1 to 8
It indicates the status of each signal for the respective OUT.
• ON: The left signal is ON.
• OFF: The left signal is OFF
7

Communication control
It indicates the judgment output status of each OUT measurement value.
Judgment output (HI/LO/GO) • ON: Each output is ON.
• OFF: Each output is OFF

Current program number It stores the current program No. (0 to 7). (32 bit DINT type)

Store the number of the actual stored data in the result of using the data storage function. (32 bit DINT
Storage data point
type)

Store the number of pulses input to the encoder unit. (32 bit DINT type)
Pulse count value
It is only enabled when using an encoder trigger.

Store the measurement value (32 bit DINT type) of each OUT.
(Example) If “1032” is stored when the minimum display unit is “0.01 mm”, it means that the measurement
value is "10.32 mm".
When in a special status, measurement values are output as described below.
Measured value OUT1 to 8
• Invalid data:
• Judgment standby data: -999998
• + Range exceeded: +999999
• - Range exceeded: -999999

Count up by +1 at the timing when the measurement value is updated for each OUT.
Measurement value update count OUT1 to 8
The count range is 0 to 4294967295 and it will go to 0 when counted up from 4294967295.

Store the reply to the external device after the controller has executed the command received from the
Executed command No. and response data external device.
Refer to “Command List” (Page 7-4) for the command format.

Control Data Details

„ Parameter details (PLC -> This Unit)
Item Contents

• ON: Update the measurement value.

Data update request
• OFF: Set data update completed/data update failed to OFF.

• ON: Execute the command specified by command No. and command parameters.
Command processing request
• OFF: Set command execution completed/execution failed to OFF.

Store the command No. and its parameters to be sent to the controller.
Command No. and command parameters Refer to “Command List” (Page 7-4) for the command format.*The “Command processing request”
bit is used to execute the command.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-55

 Control/Data Output via PLC Link

Outputting the Measurement Data with PLC Link

This unit outputs data by PLC link with the following procedure.

Operation example
„ Example 1: when the handshake is [Disabled]
After writing the measurement value to the data register by the cyclic communication, write the measurement value update count to the data register.
PLC
Measured value OUT1 to 8
Measurement value update count OUT1 to 8

Controller
Measured value OUT1 to 8
Measurement value update count OUT1 to 8
* The synchronization between the measurement value and update count is not guaranteed.

„ Example 2: when the handshake is [Enabled]

PLC
1 (1) (4) (1)
Data update request (bit)
0

(2) (2)
Measured value OUT1 to 8
Measurement value update count OUT1 to 8

Controller
1 (3) (5) (3)
Data update completed (bit)
0

7 Measured value OUT1 to 8

Measurement value update count OUT1 to 8
Communication control

(1) Set the data update request (bit) from 0 to 1 to request the measurement value update.
(2) This unit writes the measurement value OUT1 to 8, and measurement value update count OUT1 to 8 to the data register.
(3) After this unit finishes writing the measurement value and measurement update count, set the data update completed (bit) from 0 to 1.
(4) Set the data update request (bit) from 1 to 0 after referring the measurement value or update count.
(5) After this unit detects the data update request (bit) from 1 to 0, set the data update completed (bit) from 1 to 0.

7-56 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output via PLC Link

„ Example 3: Change the tolerance judgment value.

PLC (1)
1
Command No. 54
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 1 1
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 2 1000
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 3 -500
0

(2)
1
Command parameter 4 20
0

1 (3)
Command processing (9)
request
0
Controller
1
Command execution (4)
(10)
completion 0

1 (5)
Command execution failure (11)
0

(6)
1
Executed command No. 54
0

(7)
1
Command execution result 0

7
0

(8)
Tolerance judgment (Upper 1
limit) 0.1000 mm
0

(8)

Communication control
Tolerance judgment (Lower 1
limit) -0.0500 mm
0

(8)
1
Tolerance comparator
0.0020 mm
(Hysteresis) 0

(1) Enter the desired command No. into the command No. area. The command No. for writing the tolerance comparator value is 54.
(2) Enter the command parameter. When writing the tolerance judgment values, enter the values in the order of OUT No., upper limit, lower limit,
followed by hysteresis.
(3) The command will be executed when “Command processing request” bit is set from 0 to 1.
(4) If the command processing is successful, the “Command execution completed” bit will become 1 (Solid line). The bit will remain 0 if failed (Dotted
line).
(5) If the command processing fails, the “Command execution failed” bit will become 1 (Dotted line). The bit will remain 0 if successful (Solid line).
(6) The executed command No. will be written to the “Executed command No.” area.
(7) The command execution result is written to the “Command execution result” area.
(8) The upper limit, lower limit and hysteresis values of the tolerance comparator are written to their respective areas.
(9) If the “Command processing request “ bit is changed from 1 to 0 in preparation for the next command execution, the “Command execution
completed” and “Command execution failed” bits will become 0 as well ((10), (11)).

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-57

 Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Overview of EtherCAT
The EtherCAT unit operates as an EtherCAT slave and supports data communications by using process data object (PDO) communications and mailbox
communications.

Process data object communications

Process data object communication enables cyclic communications between the slave and the master.
It communicates by assigning some of the data in an object dictionary to process data objects.
The following are the types of process data objects:
• RxPDO: Sends data from the master to the slave.
• TxPDO: Sends data from the slave to the master.

What process data object communications can do

z Check the controller status
• Read the system status
• Read the system error code
• Read the status of the measuring devices (Laser ON/OFF, Stop measurement, and so on)

z Output the measurement result

• Read the OUT measured value status (Judgment standby, invalid, etc.)
• Read OUT measurement value
• Read judgment result

z Controlling the controller

• Execute various communication commands
• Start/stop/initialize the data storage
• Read the storage status and points of the data storage
• Control the inputs (Timing, auto zero, reset, etc.)
• Read the control status of the measuring devices (Timing, auto zero, reset, etc.)

7
• Switch programs
• Read the current program No.
Communication control

7-58 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Memory map
There are two types of memory maps available: TxPDO and RxPDO.
For details of operations, refer to “Operation example” (Page 7-47).

„ Monitor data list (Controller -> PLC)

z TxPDO 90 bytes
Address
Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Measurement Laser emission

System status No. 0 Storage FULL Storage in operation RUN output Warning status Error status
processing disabled stopped

Enabled status No. 1 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment standby status No. 2 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Range exceeded status No. 3 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Disabled status No. 4 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment output (HI) No. 5 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment output (LO) No. 6 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment output (GO) No. 7 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Program switching Command execution

No. 8
completed completion
Operation order completed
Measurement Measurement
Clear storage Storage stop Storage start
No. 9 Laser on completed Laser off completed processing processing
completed completed completed
enabled disabled

Timing completed No. 10 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero completed No. 11 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Reset completed No. 12 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Program switching Command execution

No. 13
failed failed
Operation order failure
Measurement Measurement
Clear storage
No. 14 Laser on failed Laser off failed processing processing Storage stop failure Storage start failure
failed
enable failed disable failed

Timing failure No. 15 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

7
Auto zero failure No. 16 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Reset failed No. 17 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Error code 18, 19 Error code

Warning code 20, 21 Warning code

Communication control
Trigger count 22 to 25 Trigger count

Measured value OUT1 26 to 29 Measured value OUT1

Measured value OUT2 30 to 33 Measured value OUT2

Measured value OUT3 34 to 37 Measured value OUT3

Measured value OUT4 38 to 41 Measured value OUT4

Measured value OUT5 42 to 45 Measured value OUT5

Measured value OUT6 46 to 49 Measured value OUT6

Measured value OUT7 50 to 53 Measured value OUT7

Measured value OUT8 54 to 57 Measured value OUT8

Measurement value update

58 to 61 Measurement value update count OUT1
count OUT1

Measurement value update

62 to 65 Measurement value update count OUT2
count OUT2

Measurement value update

66 to 69 Measurement value update count OUT3
count OUT3

Measurement value update

70 to 73 Measurement value update count OUT4
count OUT4

Measurement value update

74 to 77 Measurement value update count OUT5
count OUT5

Measurement value update

78 to 81 Measurement value update count OUT6
count OUT6

Measurement value update

82 to 85 Measurement value update count OUT7
count OUT7

Measurement value update

86 to 89 Measurement value update count OUT8
count OUT8

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-59

 Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

z TxPDO 44 bytes
Address
Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

System status No. 0 Warning status Error status

Enabled status No. 1 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment standby status No. 2 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Range exceeded status No. 3 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Disabled status No. 4 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment output (HI) No. 5 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment output (LO) No. 6 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment output (GO) No. 7 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Trigger count 8 to 11 Trigger count

Measured value OUT1 12 to 15 Measured value OUT1

Measured value OUT2 16 to 19 Measured value OUT2

Measured value OUT3 20 to 23 Measured value OUT3

Measured value OUT4 24 to 27 Measured value OUT4

Measured value OUT5 28 to 31 Measured value OUT5

Measured value OUT6 32 to 35 Measured value OUT6

Measured value OUT7 36 to 39 Measured value OUT7

Measured value OUT8 40 to 43 Measured value OUT8

„ Control data list (PLC ->This unit)

z RxPDO 76 bytes
Address
Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Program switching Command

No. 0
request processing request
Operation order request
Measurement processing Measurement processing Clear Storage Storage stop Storage start
No. 1 Laser on request Laser off request
enable request disable request request request request

7
Timing request No. 2 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero request No. 3 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Reset request No. 4 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Timing ON/OFF specification No. 5 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
Communication control

Auto zero ON/OFF specification No. 6 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Program No. specification No. 7 Program No. specification

Command No. 8 to 11 Command No.

Command parameter 1 12 to 15 Command parameter 1

Command parameter 2 16 to 19 Command parameter 2

Command parameter 3 20 to 23 Command parameter 3

Command parameter 4 24 to 27 Command parameter 4

Command parameter 5 28 to 31 Command parameter 5

Command parameter 6 32 to 35 Command parameter 6

Command parameter 7 36 to 39 Command parameter 7

Command parameter 8 40 to 43 Command parameter 8

Command parameter 9 44 to 47 Command parameter 9

Command parameter 10 48 to 51 Command parameter 10

Command parameter 11 52 to 55 Command parameter 11

Command parameter 12 56 to 59 Command parameter 12

Command parameter 13 60 to 63 Command parameter 13

Command parameter 14 64 to 67 Command parameter 14

Command parameter 15 68 to 71 Command parameter 15

Command parameter 16 72 to 75 Command parameter 16

z RxPDO 8 bytes
Address
Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Program switching
No. 0
request
Operation order request
Measurement processing Measurement processing Clear Storage Storage stop Storage start
No. 1 Laser on request Laser off request
enable request disable request request request request

Timing request No. 2 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero request No. 3 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Reset request No. 4 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Timing ON/OFF specification No. 5 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero ON/OFF specification No. 6 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Program No. specification No. 7 Program No. specification

7-60 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Changing EtherCAT Settings Mailbox Communications

Configure the EtherCAT communication settings on the [Field network] For details about the object index used in mailbox communications,
tab under [Environment settings]. refer to “Object Dictionary” (Page 7-62).

The field network settings are implemented after

rebooting controller.

1 Click [Environment] on the main screen.

2 Select the [Field network] tab and then [EtherCAT].

3 Edit [EtherCAT settings].

z Synchronization trigger
• Disable
Communicates at the time of process data communications based
on the results of the latest sampling results.
• Enable
Synchronizes with the process data communication cycle to
perform sampling.
7

Communication control
• To use [Synchronization trigger] to continuously
retrieve all data, set the trigger cycle to
[Communication cycle + 125 µs or more] and use the
measurement value refresh count or trigger count.
• [Synchronization trigger] cannot be used in CL-S015EX.

4 Click [OK] to restart the controller.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-61

 Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Object Dictionary
Index (HEX) Name Index (HEX) Name

No. 1000 Device type 1A01 TxPDO_90byte

No. 1001 Error register 1C00 Sync. Manager type

No. 1008 Device name 1C12 RxPDO assign

No. 1009 Hardware version 1C13 TxPDO assign

100 A Software version 1C32 Sync. Manager output parameter

No. 1018 Identity 1C33 Sync. Manager input parameter

10F1 Error Settings No. 2000 Input Data

No. 1600 RxPDO_8byte No. 2001 Output Data

No. 1601 RxPDO_76byte No. 6000 TxPDO

1A00 TxPDO_44byte No. 7000 RxPDO

„ Input Data
Address
Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

No. 0 Warning status Error status

System status
No. 1

Measurement Laser emission

No. 2 Storage FULL Storage in operation RUN output
processing disabled stopped
Measurement operation status
No. 3

No. 4 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Enabled status
No. 5

No. 6 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment standby status
No. 7

7
No. 8 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
Range exceeded status
No. 9

No. 10 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Disabled status
No. 11
Communication control

No. 12 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Timing status
No. 13

No. 14 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero status
No. 15

Reserved 16 to 19

No. 20 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment output (HI)
No. 21

No. 22 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment output (LO)
No. 23

No. 24 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Judgment output (GO)
No. 25

Reserved 26, 27

Program switching Command execution

No. 28
completed completion
Operation order completed
Measurement Measurement
Clear storage Storage stop Storage start
No. 29 Laser on completed Laser off completed processing processing
completed completed completed
enabled disabled

Reserved 30, 31

No. 32 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Timing completed
No. 33

No. 34 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero completed
No. 35

No. 36 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Reset completed
No. 37

Reserved 38, 39

Program switching Command execution

No. 40
failed failed
Operation order failure
Measurement Measurement
Clear storage
No. 41 Laser on failed Laser off failed processing processing Storage stop failure Storage start failure
failed
enable failed disable failed

Reserved 42, 43

No. 44 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Timing failure
No. 45

7-62 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Address
Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

No. 46 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero failure
No. 47

No. 48 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Reset failed
No. 49

Reserved 50, 51

No. 52
Error code Error code
No. 53

Reserved 54, 55

No. 56
Warning code Warning code
No. 57

Reserved 58, 59

Current program No. 60 to 63 Current program No.

Number of storage data points 64 to 67 Number of storage data points

Trigger count 68 to 71 Trigger count

Reserved 72 to 75

Measured value OUT1 76 to 79 Measured value OUT1

Measured value OUT2 80 to 83 Measured value OUT2

Measured value OUT3 84 to 87 Measured value OUT3

Measured value OUT4 88 to 91 Measured value OUT4

Measured value OUT5 92 to 95 Measured value OUT5

Measured value OUT6 96 to 99 Measured value OUT6

Measured value OUT7 100 to 103 Measured value OUT7

Measured value OUT8 104 to 107 Measured value OUT8

Reserved 108 to 139

Measurement value update count

140 to 143 Measurement value update count OUT1
OUT1

7
Measurement value update count
144 to 147 Measurement value update count OUT2
OUT2

Measurement value update count

148 to 151 Measurement value update count OUT3
OUT3

Communication control
Measurement value update count
152 to 155 Measurement value update count OUT4
OUT4

Measurement value update count

156 to 159 Measurement value update count OUT5
OUT5

Measurement value update count

160 to 163 Measurement value update count OUT6
OUT6

Measurement value update count

164 to 167 Measurement value update count OUT7
OUT7

Measurement value update count

168 to 171 Measurement value update count OUT8
OUT8

Reserved 172 to 203

Executed command No. 204 to 207 Executed command No.

Command execution result 208 to 211 Command execution result

Response data 1 212 to 215 Response data 1

Response data 2 216 to 219 Response data 2

Response data 3 220 to 223 Response data 3

Response data 4 224 to 227 Response data 4

Response data 5 228 to 231 Response data 5

Response data 6 232 to 235 Response data 6

Response data 7 236 to 239 Response data 7

Response data 8 240 to 243 Response data 8

Response data 9 244 to 247 Response data 9

Response data 10 248 to 251 Response data 10

Response data 11 252 to 255 Response data 11

Response data 12 256 to 259 Response data 12

Response data 13 260 to 263 Response data 13

Response data 14 264 to 267 Response data 14

Response data 15 268 to 271 Response data 15

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 7-63

 Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

„ Output Data
Address
Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(byte)

Program switching Command

No. 0
request processing request
Operation order request
Measurement Measurement
Clear Storage Storage stop Storage start
No. 1 Laser on request Laser off request processing processing
request request request
enable request disable request

Reserved 2, 3

No. 4 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Timing request
No. 5

No. 6 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero request
No. 7

No. 8 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Reset request
No. 9

Reserved 10 to 15

No. 16 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Timing ON/OFF specification
No. 17

No. 18 OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

Auto zero ON/OFF specification
No. 19

Reserved 20 to 23

Program No. specification 24 to 27 Program No. specification

Reserved 28 to 31

Command No. 32 to 35 Command No.

Command parameter 1 36 to 39 Command parameter 1

Command parameter 2 40 to 43 Command parameter 2

Command parameter 3 44 to 47 Command parameter 3

Command parameter 4 48 to 51 Command parameter 4

Command parameter 5 52 to 55 Command parameter 5

7
Command parameter 6 56 to 59 Command parameter 6

Command parameter 7 60 to 63 Command parameter 7

Command parameter 8 64 to 67 Command parameter 8

Communication control

Command parameter 9 68 to 71 Command parameter 9

Command parameter 10 72 to 75 Command parameter 10

Command parameter 11 76 to 79 Command parameter 11

Command parameter 12 80 to 83 Command parameter 12

Command parameter 13 84 to 87 Command parameter 13

Command parameter 14 88 to 91 Command parameter 14

Command parameter 15 92 to 95 Command parameter 15

Command parameter 16 96 to 99 Command parameter 16

7-64 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 8
Specifications

Specifications........................................................... 8-2
Sensor Head and Optical Unit Specification........................ 8-2
Controller Specifications....................................................... 8-4
Expansion Cable Specification............................................. 8-4
Head Extension Cable Specification.................................... 8-4
Expansion Unit/Relay Unit Specifications............................ 8-4
Display Panel Specification.................................................. 8-4
Encoder Input Specification.................................................. 8-4
EtherCAT Unit Specifications............................................... 8-4

Status Table.............................................................. 8-6

Dimensions............................................................... 8-8
Controller (CL-3000)............................................................. 8-8
Optical unit (CL-P***N/CL-L***N)......................................... 8-8
Optical unit (CL-S***N/CL-V***N)......................................... 8-8
Head..................................................................................... 8-9
Option................................................................................. 8-11

Characteristics Chart............................................. 8-16

Light-Axis Region Diagram................................................. 8-16
Mutual Interference............................................................ 8-17
8

Specifications

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 8-1

 Specifications

Specifications

Sensor Head and Optical Unit Specification

8 mm diameter
Head type 15 mm head 30 mm head 70 mm head 150 mm head
compact head

Head CL-P007 CL-L007 CL-P015 CL-L015 CL-P030 CL-L030 CL-P070 CL-L070 CL-P150 CL-L150
Model *1
Optical unit CL-P007N CL-L007N CL-P015N CL-L015N CL-P030N CL-L030N CL-P070N CL-L070N CL-P150N CL-L150N

Type Spot type Quad type Spot type Quad type Spot type Quad type Spot type Quad type Spot type Quad type

Reference distance 7 mm 15 mm 30 mm 70 mm 150 mm

Standard Measurement range ±1.5 mm ±1.3 mm ±3.7 mm ±10 mm ±35 mm

measurement
*2
range Linearity ±0.96 µm ±2.1 µm ±0.49 µm ±0.94 µm ±2.2 µm ±5.65 µm

High precision Measurement range ±0.5 mm ±0.5 mm ±1.0 mm ±3.0 mm ±15 mm

measurement
*2
range Linearity ±0.55 µm ±0.91 µm ±0.41 µm ±0.72 µm ±2.0 µm ±4.65 µm
*3
Resolution 0.25 µm 0.25 µm 0.25 µm 0.25 µm 0.25 µm

Spot diameter φ50 µm φ750 µm φ25 µm φ300 µm φ38 µm φ500 µm φ50 µm φ600 µm φ75 µm φ1000 µm

Laser class Head Class 1

Sampling cycle 100/200/500/1000 μs

Protection
Head IP67 (IEC60529)
mechanism

Ambient light Object surface light 30000 lx (incandescent light)

Head 0 to 50°C
Ambient
temperature
Optical unit 0 to 50°C

Environmental Head 85% RH or less (no condensation)

Relative

8
resistance
humidity
Optical unit 85% RH or less (no condensation)

Head 10 to 57 Hz Double amplitude 1.5 mm 2 hours in X, Y, and Z directions

Vibration
resistance
Optical unit 10 to 57 Hz Double amplitude 0.3 mm 2 hours in X, Y, and Z directions
Specifications

Impact resistance 15 G 6ms

Vacuum None

Head 0.005 % of F.S. /°C

Temperature
characteristic
Optical unit 0.015 % of F.S. /°C

Head SUS Front: SUS, Rear: Aluminum

Material
Optical unit Polycarbonate

Head Approx. 140 g Approx. 180 g Approx. 200 g Approx. 280 g Approx. 380 g
Weight
Optical unit Approx. 1600 g

*1 The head and optical unit have been calibrated in pairs. Not compatible with other units.
*2 The value which is measured by KEYENCE standard target (Mirror target) with the displacement mode.
*3 The value which is measured by KEYENCE standard target (Mirror target) with the average count of 16384 times.
CL-PT010/CL-PT010N only: The value is measured by KEYENCE standard target (Mirror target) with the average count of 4096 times.

8-2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Specifications

20 mm 50 mm
Profile measuring
Head type Vacuum and high Vacuum and high High precision head
head
temperature head temperature head

Head CL-V020 CL-V050 CL-S015 CL-PT010

Model *1
Optical unit CL-V020N CL-V050N CL-S015N CL-PT010N

Type Spot type

Reference distance 20 mm 50 mm 15 mm 10 mm

Standard Measurement range ±1.3 mm ±4 mm ±1.0 mm ±0.3 mm

measurement
*2
range Linearity ±0.45 µm ±1.4 µm ±0.35 µm ±0.22 µm

High precision Measurement range ±0.5 mm ±1.6 mm -0.2 mm/-1.0 mm ±0.15 mm

measurement
range Linearity *2 ±0.38 µm ±1.3 µm ±0.25 µm ±0.20 µm
*3
Resolution 0.25 µm 0.25 µm 0.25 µm 0.25 µm

Spot diameter φ20 µm φ40 µm φ10 µm φ3.5 µm

Laser class Head Class 1

Sampling cycle 100/200/500/1000 µs

Protection IP40
Head IP50 IP64 (IEC60529)
mechanism Vacuum degassing structure *4

Ambient light Object surface light 30000 lx (incandescent light)

Head -20 to 200°C -20 to 70°C 0 to 50°C

Ambient
temperature
Optical unit 0 to 50°C

Head 85% RH or less (no condensation)

Relative
Environmental humidity
Optical unit 85% RH or less (no condensation)
resistance
10 to 57 Hz
Double amplitude 0.45 mm
Head 10 to 57 Hz Double amplitude 1.5 mm 2 hours in X, Y, and Z directions
Vibration 2 hours in X, Y, and Z
resistance directions

8
Optical unit 10 to 57 Hz Double amplitude 0.3 mm 2 hours in X, Y, and Z directions

Impact resistance 15 G 6ms

Vacuum rating Super high vacuum *5 Vacuum None

Specifications
Head 0.013% of F.S./°C *6 0.015% of F.S./°C *6 0.005 % of F.S. /°C *6 0.1% of F.S. /°C
Temperature
characteristic
Optical unit 0.015 % of F.S. /°C

Front: SUS,
Head SUS304 SUS303/304
Material Rear: Aluminum

Optical unit Polycarbonate

Head Approx. 100 g Approx. 350 g Approx. 1100 g

Weight
Optical unit Approx. 1600 g

*1 The head and optical unit have been calibrated in pairs. Not compatible with other units.
*2 The value which is measured by KEYENCE standard target (Mirror target) with the displacement mode.
*3 The value which is measured by KEYENCE standard target (Mirror target) with the average count of 16384 times.
CL-PT010/CL-PT010N only: The value is measured by KEYENCE standard target (Mirror target) with the average count of 4096 times.
*4 By applying the attached sticker, it becomes equivalent to IP50.
*5 Operation verified in 10-6 PA environment.
*6 These are the values when the head and the target are fixed by the fixture made of SUS303 (or SUS304).

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 8-3

 Specifications

Controller Specifications Expansion Unit/Relay Unit Specifications

Model CL-3000 Expansion Expansion
Relay unit
Model analog unit unit
Number of connected Controller (stand alone): 2 units
heads CL-H150 CL-H100 CL-H200
When head expansion units/relay units are used: 6 units
Number of connected heads 2 relay units can be added 2
Supports cyclic and message communications
RPI: 1 to 10000 ms (in 0.5 ms increments) ±10 V × 4
Maximum connection count: 8 outputs
EtherNet/IP Terminal Analog voltage
Compliant with the conformance test Version.CT14 Output None None
block output
Use exclusively from PROFINET, PLC-Link, impedance:
100Ω
EtherCAT

Conformance Class A compatible Environmental Ambient temperature 0 to 50°C

resistance Relative humidity 85% RH or less (no condensation)
PROFINET Use exclusively from EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link,
and EtherCAT Weight Approx. 300 g
Supported for Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
products of MELSEC iQ-R series,
PLC-Link iQ-F series, Q series, L series, and FX series Display Panel Specification
Use exclusively from EtherNet/IP, PROFINET,
and EtherCAT
Model CL-D500
Measurement data output and control input/
Interface Minimum display unit 0.001 µm
output are possible using non-procedural
Ethernet command communication with the PC and PLC. Display range ±999.999 μm to ±9999.99 mm
Can communicate with CL-NavigatorN Display cycle About 10 times/second
100Base-TX
Environmental Ambient temperature 0 to 50°C
Can communicate with CL-NavigatorN resistance
USB Relative humidity 85% RH or less (no condensation)
USB 2.0 HighSpeed compliant
Weight Approx. 100 g
Measurement data output and control input/
output are possible using non-procedural
command communication with the PC and PLC.
RS-232C Baud rate : 9600 to 11520 bps Encoder Input Specification
Data length : 8 bit
Stop bit : 1 bit
Model CL-E100
Parity: none/even number/uneven number
Supported encoders Incremental mode (A/B/Z-phase)
Terminal (IN) 13 (functions switched by software)
Encoder minimum input time 100 ns to 20 µs
Terminal (OUT) 11 *1 (functions switched by software)

8
Max. current consumption 0.18 A
Power voltage 24 VDC ± 10%
Service power supply 5V DC±10% Maximum supply current 200 mA
Rating When one optical unit is connected: 0.86 A
Max. current NPN/PNP open collector output
When four optical units are connected: 3.3 A
consumption Input terminal (5 V/12 V/24 V) supported
When six optical units are connected: 4.5 A
Specifications

Line driver output supported

Ambient
0 to 50°C Environmental Ambient temperature 0 to 50°C
temperature
resistance Relative humidity 85% RH or less (no condensation)
Environmental Relative 85% RH or less (no condensation)
resistance humidity Weight Approx. 300 g
* Encoder unit is not available with EtherCAT unit.
Vibration 10 to 57 Hz Double amplitude 0.3 mm
resistance 2 hours in X, Y, and Z directions

Monitor/Setting support
software
CL-NavigatorN EtherCAT Unit Specifications
Weight Approx. 600 g
Model CL-EC100
*1  ither positive common connecting which is compatible with NPN input
E Compliant
devices, or negative common connecting which is compatible with PNP IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
standards
input devices is feasible.
Transmission speed 100Mbps (100BASE-TX)
Communication
Minimum 125μs
Expansion Cable Specification cycle
Transmission
Category 5e STPe
interface
Model CL-AC1 CL-AC2 EtherCAT
communication Distance
Length 1m 2m specifications between nodes 100m
Weight Approx. 200 g Approx. 400 g Communications port RJ45 x2
Process data object communication
Head Extension Cable Specification Compatible
(cyclic communication)
Mailbox communication
functions (message communication)
Model CL-C5 CL-C10 CL-C30 CoE compatible
Distributed Clock
Length 5m 10 m 30 m
Environmental Ambient temperature 0 to 50°C
Weight Approx. 450 g Approx. 850 g Approx. 2,500 g
resistance Relative humidity 85% RH or less (no condensation)
Model CL-CV2 CL-CV5 CL-CV15 Weight Approx. 330g
Length 2m 5m 15 m * Use exclusively from EtherNet/IP, PROFINET and PLC-Link
Weight Approx. 100 g Approx. 150 g Approx. 250 g * EtherCAT unit is not available with Encoder unit.

8-4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Specifications

MEMO

Specifications

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 8-5

 Status Table

Status Table
Status UI display Data output

EtherNet/IP, PROFINET,
Measurement value

Measurement value

(Ethernet/RS-232C)
Judgment result
(CL-NavigatorN)

Saved CSV data

Non-procedural
communication
CL-NavigatorN/
(Display panel)

Display panel)
(Common for

PLC-Link
Operation Measurement
Overview Emission
mode value

Judgment HI/GO/LO
------ ------ -999998
standby All OFF

HI/LO
Invalid data -FFFFFF +FFFFFF Simultaneously -999999
Measurement ON
Measurement is in progress. ON
mode Display
-FFFFFF/ +FFFFFF/
range LO or HI -999999/999999
FFFFFF FFFFFF
exceeded

Other than -999999 to +999999 to Judgment

-999999 - 999999
those above 999999 999999 result

The measurement is stopped;

and the settings cannot Settings
Setup Mode - - -
be changed via network screen
communication. OFF
The measurement is stopped;
Mode and the settings cannot be - - ++COM++ -
changed from the display panel.

The light intensity tuning,

Special
calibration of light quantity, or - × ×
communication ON - - ++COM++ *4 -
head alignment guide function
mode
is being used.

8 System error System error occurring.

The period from when the

- - Err+XX -

power is switched ON until OFF

Starting
Specifications

the controller goes into the - - ++++++ -

(At power ON)
measurement mode (or system
error).

(1) It will be ON when the specified amount of storage data has accumulated. It will otherwise be OFF.
(2) It will be ON in “Storage in operation” (Storing) status, and OFF in “Stop” status.
(3) It will be OFF while the internal measurement value is in judgment standby status, and will be ON when the internal measurement value is no longer
in judgment standby status.
(4) It will be ON for 100 ms when the encoder trigger is input earlier than the allowed input cycle.

*1 : It indicates the status of the input terminal/communication command.

The status is the same for the display panel/CL-NavigatorN for some measurement control requests.
*2 : See “ “Timing Charts” (Page 6-7)” for the ON/OFF status.
*3 : Each terminal will become OFF when the mode is changed. (If a pulse is being output, the terminal will still go OFF aborting these outputs.)
*4 : If calibration of light quantity is being executed from the display panel, it will indicate that calibration of light quantity is in progress.

8-6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 (1)
Storage FULL

OFF *3
(2)
Storage in operation

OFF *3
Measurement value valid

(3)
status

OFF *3
Depends on measurement *2 Judgment output

OFF *3
Depends on measurement *2 Strobe

OFF *3
Output terminal

Error

ON
OFF
Depends on warning status Warning

Released status (Equivalent to OFF status in N.O.)

RUN
ON

OFF *3
(4)

Trigger error

OFF *3

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

×
∆

ü
are

Auto zero
requests

accepted
Only clear

×
ü

× Reset
ü

Timing
×
ü

Storage start/stop
×
ü

Clear Storage
×
ü

Switch programs
Measurement control request *1

×
×

ü
ü

Emission stop
×
ü

Stop Measurement

8-7
Status Table

Specifications
 Dimensions

Dimensions

Controller (CL-3000) Optical unit (CL-P***N/CL-L***N)

13.1 142 15 137.9
65 115.4

DIN DIN
143

124 36.1
36.1

62.2
62.2

Optical unit (CL-S***N/CL-V***N)

10
142 137.9

8 143
DIN

36.1
Specifications

62.2

8-8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Dimensions

Head

8 mm diameter compact head (CL-P007/L007)

7±0.15 48.7 1750±30
(Standard 19.2
distance) 13.5
7.5
3
A

φ7

φ14.8

14.9
φ7.96±0.03 φ7.94±0.03
φ0.1 A
82.5 85±5 40

15 mm head (CL-P015/L015)
15±0.13 (83.3) 1750±30
(Standard (54)
distance) (31)
20
6.5
φ7
φ8

φ14.8
φ15 -0.05

14.9
82.5 85±5 40
0
φ26 -0.05
0

30 mm head (CL-P030/L030)
30±0.3 (96.3) 1750±30
(Standard (67)
distance) (43.8)
24.2
8
φ7
φ8

φ14.8

14.9
φ15 -0.05

82.5 85±5 40
0
φ29 -0.05
0

70 mm head (CL-P070/L070)
70±0.5 (137) 1750±30
(Standard distance) (107.7)
(84.5)

8
(53.5)
(48.5)
(36.7)
(30.9)
26.6
10.5

Specifications
φ46 -0.05
0

φ7
φ8

14.9
φ14.8
φ15 -0.05

82.5 85±5 40
0
φ28.95
φ45
φ46

150mm head (CL-P150/L150)

150±0.5 (135.5) 1750±30
(Standard distance)
(82.6)

(61.6)

(30.7)
φ47 -0.05

φ8
0

φ7

14.9
φ14.8
φ15 -0.05

82.5 85±5 40
0
φ28.95
φ46

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 8-9

 Dimensions

20 mm vacuum and high temperature head (CL-V020)/

50 mm vacuum and high temperature head (CL-V050)
CL-V020 20±0.14
CL-V050 50±0.4
(Standard distance)

2
Reference plane

12
32.5 6

4x
φ2
16

.5
8

(φ10)
16
8

(28) (28)
4

Reference plane
47.35 1500 -0
+100

High precision head (CL-S015)

15±0.15
(Standard distance)

(φ10)
φ21±0.05
φ33 -0.01
-0.05

55 (28) (28)
68.9 1500 -0
+100

Profile measuring head (CL-PT010)

10±0.05 178.4 1750±30
(Standard 148.7
distance) 128.6
102.5
52.8
51.8

8
25
15
6
2.5
Specifications

φ53.8
φ43.3

φ7

φ14.8

14.9
φ12

82.5 85±5 40
φ36
φ58
φ61 -0.05
0

8-10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Dimensions

Option

Head extension cable (CL-C5 (5 m)/CL-C10 (10 m)/CL-C30 (30 m))

110±10 X 250±50
*X = 5m/10m/30m

(32)
φ10.5
φ8

25
Optical Unit side Head side 14
32

Head extension cable Encoder unit (CL-E100)

(CL-CV2 (2m)/CL-CV5 (5m)/CL-CV15 (15m)) 26.3
14.2
115.3
2xφ2.2
Spot facing φ4 (26.3)
(28)

DIN

(φ10)
9.5
15

(φ10)

124
9.5 36.1
X
15
Model X (mm)
CL-CV2 2000 + 100/-0 62.2
CL-CV5 5000 + 100/-0
CL-CV15 15000 + 1000/-0

6
Expansion cable (CL-AC1/CL-AC2)
11.5

Relay unit (CL-H200)

26.3 90 115
φ7.2

8
φ12.5

29.6

32
DIN
41 L 42

Specifications
Model L (m)
124
CL-AC1 1 36.1
CL-AC2 2

62.2
Expansion unit (CL-H100/CL-H150)
26.3 85 115
13.1
6

DIN

124
36.1 EtherCAT unit (CL-EC100)
26.3 115
62.2

6 DIN

124
Dotted line part: CL-H150 36.1

62.2

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 8-11

 Dimensions

Display Panel (CL-D500)

Panel cutout 62 min.
62 Panel thickness:
46 0.5 to 5mm 13 Panel mounting ring

75 +0.6
0
74.5
91
80

100 min.
45

8.5
25

Head fixture (For 15 mm/30 mm/70 mm/150 mm

heads) (OP-88283) Head fixture (For Profile measuring heads)
22.5
φ15
+0.05
0
12 (OP-88289)
2xM4
Effective screw depth:6
37

25

70
8

20 17
2xφ4.5 30 22
Spot facing φ8 d=4

27.5 2xφ5.5

8
Head fixture (for high precision head) 4 7.5
(OP-88863)
C25 C25
Specifications

2xφ4.5
Spot facing φ8 d=4
72.5
78

R1
0.5 -0
+0 6
2x .05
M4
39
33.5
20

78 φ61.05 +0.05
0 15
7

40
20 18.5
33 23

8-12 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Dimensions

Head fixture A Side view fixture

(For 8 mm diameter compact head) (OP-88353) (for 8 mm diameter compact head)(OP-88860)

11.6
8
12
12 R6.5
Mounting hole
.1 5
+0 0.00 9.8
0+ 2xM2 depth 3mm
φ8 φ1

φ10 21.5 2xM2 depth 3mm

12.3
7.8 8.5

C1.5
16.3

C0.5 to C1.0

10.5
5

7
7.1

2
(Standard
1.8

1.32
distance)
5.5 to 11.3
Side view fixture (for 30 mm head)
Head fixture B (OP-88861)
4xM3 depth 6
(For 8 mm diameter compact head) (OP-88354)
6.5

33
28
10.5

4-C2
R8

36 10
32
.8
R3
(0.2)

(65.5)
12.1
2 2 24 14
φ4.
20
6.3

4xM3 depth 6
11
16.3

22
15
3.5

29

4
6.5

distance)

4
(Standard
φ8 12.5
(120.3)

Head fixture C

8
(For 8 mm diameter compact head) (OP-88355) Side view fixture
9.8
φ4.4
Mounting hole
M4,P=0.7
(For vacuum and high temperature head
φ8 φ8 +0.200
+0.005
CL-V020/ CL-V050)(OP-88862)

Specifications
A
11.1 8.5
23.4

16
8.5

(0.2)

M4,P=0.7
(Standard
distance)

Spacer block
13.9
12

t ≥ 5.0
6

7 B 6

Block Number A B Standard distance Sensor head

0 15 40.5 4 CL-V020
1 23 48.5 26 CL-V050
2 31 56.5 18 CL-V050

Pass through fixture

(for high precision head/vacuum and high
temperature head) (OP-88859)
(φ9)

(φ9)
M8x0.75
M8x0.75

(18) (17.8)
(φ27)
(7.6) CF16
φ4

(φ34)
.3

(43.4)

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 8-13

 Dimensions

Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement: For 15 mm head (OP-88284)

98
28xφ4.5

70
10x6=60
80

10

5 70 70 5
90

30
73

8
13

100 (79) 100

Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement: For 30 mm head (OP-88285)

98

28xφ4.5
70
10x6=60
80

10

5 70 70 5
90

8
60
Specifications

73

100 (134) 100

8
13

Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement: For 70 mm head (OP-88286)

98

28xφ4.5
70
10x6=60
80

10

5 70 70 5
90

140
73

13
8

100 (296) 100

8-14 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Dimensions

Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement:

For high precision head (OP-88864)
Reference plane
Reference plane 5 40 3xM4 depth 8

85
76
42.5
25
5
50 Reference plane

28
61.5
(15) (15)
70

28

3xM4 depth 8
50
25
5

Reference plane
42.5

8
85
76

Specifications
Reference plane 5 40 Reference plane

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 8-15

 Characteristics Chart

Characteristics Chart

Light-Axis Region Diagram

Detections will not be affected by an obstacle if it is outside the colored area in the figure below.
8 mm diameter compact head 15 mm head 30 mm head 70 mm head 150 mm head
(CL-P007) (CL-P015/L015) (CL-P030/L030) (CL-P070/L070) (CL-P150/L150)
9

φ1
16.5

Spot φ3
range

8 mm diameter compact head

(CL-L007)
16.5

φ1
34

Spot
range φ15

φ1

80.5
Spot
φ22
range

φ3

8
9

φ1
10

185
φ2
φ3.2 Spot
Specifications

range φ38

Profile measuring head

(CL-PT010)

20mm 50mm
Vacuum and high Vacuum and high
temperature head temperature head High precision head
(CL-S015) φ6
(CL-V020) (CL-V050)
Spot
range φ36
16
21.3

φ1
φ1 Spot
54

Spot range φ18

range φ11
10.5

φ1 φ0.5
Spot Spot
φ11 φ21.5
range range

8-16 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Characteristics Chart

Mutual Interference
No interference will occur if the other head spots are outside the colored area in the figure below.
8 mm diameter compact head 15 mm head 30mm head 70mm head 150mm head
(CL-P007/L007) (CL-P015/L015) (CL-P030/L030) (CL-P070/L070) (CL-P150/L150)

φ3
7

φ1

18.4°

φ22 φ38 φ36

φ15
15

29
φ3

φ4

68
61°

126
φ8
47°

φ7

37°
8

Specifications
20mm 50mm
Vacuum and high Vacuum and high Profile measuring head
temperature head temperature head High precision head (CL-PT010)
(CL-V020) (CL-V050) (CL-S015)

17°

φ11 φ11 φ18

14

φ2
22

φ1
46

64°

φ1
28°

φ21.5
10

φ0.5

90°

17°

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - 8-17

 Characteristics Chart

MEMO

8
Specifications

8-18 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

Appendix

How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness

Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm
head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)...................A-2
Overall Flow.........................................................................A-2
Installation Restrictions........................................................A-3
Return Fixture to Original Orientation...................................A-3
Mounting on the Fixture........................................................A-4
Mounting Head 1..................................................................A-4
Angle Adjustment of the Reference Target and
Measurement Target............................................................A-5
Mounting Head 2..................................................................A-5
Adjusting the Position of the Head Relative to
the Reference Target (STEP 1)............................................A-6
Adjusting the Angle of the Head Relative to
the Reference Target (STEP 2)............................................A-6
Rough Head Alignment Between Head 1/2 (STEP 3)..........A-7
Precise Head Alignment Between Head 1/2 (STEP 4).........A-8

How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness

Measurement (For High Precision Head CL-S015)
(OP-88864)...............................................................A-10
Overall Flow.......................................................................A-10
Installation Restrictions...................................................... A-11

A
Mounting head 1................................................................. A-11
Mounting head 2................................................................. A-11
Adjusting the distance between the target and the head
(STEP 1).............................................................................A-12
Rough head alignment between heads 1 and 2
(STEP 2).............................................................................A-12
Precise head alignment between heads 1 and 2
(STEP 3).............................................................................A-12

Troubleshooting.....................................................A-13
When the Measurement Value is Unstable or Incorrect.....A-13
Troubleshooting..................................................................A-13

Error Messages......................................................A-16
Error Handling....................................................................A-16
Error Message List.............................................................A-16

License Information...............................................A-18
Index........................................................................A-32

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-1

 How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)

How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness

Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)

Overall Flow

Mounting restrictions check

Some restrictions are applicable to the mounting.

Be sure to check “Installation Restrictions” (Page A-3) beforehand.

Return fixture to original orientation

If reusing the fixture, return the fixture to its original orientation before mounting.
Skip this step if using the fixture for the first time.

Mounting on the fixture

Mount the head to the fixture.

Mounting head 1

Mount Head 1.

Angle adjustment of the reference target and measurement target

Align the reference target and measurement target such that both are parallel.
Adjust the angle between the reference target and the measurement target, and install them so
that they are parallel to each other.

A
▼

Mounting Head 2

Mount Head 2.

Adjusting the position of the head relative to the reference target (STEP 1) Estimated working time is
Approx. 30 mins to 1 hour
Perform precise head alignment using CL-NavigatorN.

Adjusting the angle of the head relative to the reference target (STEP 2)

Perform precise head alignment using CL-NavigatorN.

Head alignment between Head 1 and 2 (STEP 3/4)

Perform precise head alignment using CL-NavigatorN.

Measurement target installation

Mount the measurement target.

A-2 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)

Installation Restrictions
The adjustable fixture for thickness measurement is a tool for precisely adjusting the “head alignment” during thickness measurement.
If the mounting error exceeds the values shown in the figure below, it may be impossible to perform head alignment within the adjustable range.
Check the installation environment.

Mounting surface
Tilt with reference to the
measurement target:
0.5° or less

Distance between the center of

the measurement target and the edge Mounting surface
surface of the fixture:
• CL-P015/L015 : 39±0.5 mm
• CL-P030/L030 : 66±0.5 mm
• CL-P070/L070 : 147±0.5 mm Measurement target Measurement target

Distance between upper and lower Offset: 0.5 mm or less

edge surfaces of the adjustable fixtures
(Secure the range for reference target)
• CL-P015/L015 : 79 mm or more
• CL-P030/L030 : 134 mm or more
• CL-P070/L070 : 296 mm or more

Mounting surface Mounting surface

Return Fixture to Original Orientation

If reusing the fixture, return the fixture to its original orientation before mounting.
It will make the subsequent adjustments easier. Skip this step if using the fixture for the first time.

1. Rough originating in XY directions 3. Rough rotation originating

Turn the knobs to adjust such that the blue and gray sections are Loosen the set screw, and adjust such that the gray section of the figure
positioned above the concentric circles. becomes horizontal.
After adjustment, secure it by tightening the set screw.

A
Adjust by turning this knob
Set screw

2. Rough tilt originating 4. Rough originating of the reference target angle

Make adjustments by turning the knob, such that the gap inside the
Loosen the knurling screws on the left and right sides, and adjust the
area surrounded by the red dotted lines is even.
fixture with a carpenter square or other tool such that the section shown
Make adjustments such that it will be even in both X and Y directions.
in the figure is at a right angle.

Knurled screw

Adjust by turning this knob

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-3

 How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)

Mounting on the Fixture Mounting Head 1

Loosen the two screws and mount the head to the fixture. Mount head 1 in the environment where it will be used, and then mount
Pass the head from the connector side of the head cable. the reference target.
After mounting, secure the head by tightening the screws while pushing
the head in the arrow direction in the figure. Be sure to mount the head within the restrictions
described in “Installation Restrictions” (Page
• Mount the head with the HEAD LED facing up. It will A-3). You may not be able to complete the
serve as a guide during adjustment. adjustment if the restrictions are not met.
• Mount both Head 1 and Head 2 on the fixture.

Screw

HEAD LED Fix 2 portions or more

by M4 screws on the
upper and lower rows
respectfully

Push

Secure with two knurled

screws while pushing in the
arrow direction

A Push

Reference
target.

A-4 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)

Angle Adjustment of the Reference Mounting Head 2

Target and Measurement Target Mount head 2.
Secure Head 2 while pressing it lightly against the side surface of the
Precisely align the angles of the reference target and the actual reference target.
measurement target. (Even if there is a little gap between the edge surface of the fixture
and the side surface of the reference target, there is no effect on the
measurement.)
Adjustment in the vertical direction
Measure the angle of the actual measurement target using a level (set
zero), and then adjust the angle of the reference target and Head 1 in
reference to it.
The “Reference target + Head 1” angle should be adjusted by loosening
the fixing screws and adjusting the angle within the margin of the
screws (0.1 degrees or less).

Loosen the fixing

screw and adjust
within the allowable
range

Level Level

Actual measurement
target,
or an equivalent surface Push

Fix 2 portions or more

by M4 screws on the
Adjustment in the horizontal direction upper and lower rows
respectfully
Measure the angle of the actual measurement target using a level (set
zero), and then adjust the angle of the reference target in reference to
it.
Loosen the left and right knurled screws and adjust the angle of the
reference target (0.1 degrees or less).

Level Level

Actual measurement target,

or an equivalent surface
Loosen the knurled screw
and adjust the angle

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-5

 How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)

Adjusting the Position of the Head Adjusting the Angle of the Head Relative
Relative to the Reference Target (STEP 1) to the Reference Target (STEP 2)

1 Set the head distance to the reference target.

Adjust the distance between each head and the reference target so that
1 Adjust the optical axis to be perpendicular to the
reference target.
the received light waveform from the work is within the green frame. Adjust the horizontal/vertical angle adjustment knob [α/β] alternately,
Adjust by turning the “Z-axis adjustment knob [Z]”. and adjust so that the current value of each head is largest.

<Purpose of alignment>
First, adjust only one knob to find the point where the
Adjusting the distance/direction will eliminate the need for
current value becomes maximum. Next, adjust only
range adjustment because the range of the two heads will
the other knob to find the point where the current
almost overlap after the distance/direction adjustment.
value becomes maximum.
Head 1 range Repeat this operation approximately twice.
As a guide to finish the adjustment, confirm that the
current value is 95% or more of the maximum value.

<Adjustment principle: Quad type>

Head 2 range The height is measured individually by four optical axes.
Points with no difference in height will become points with

2
matching angles; and the graph values will be maximized.
After adjusting, tighten the screw next to the “Z-axis
adjustment knob” to secure the position of the head.

A
Screw Screw <Adjustment principle: Spot type>
The light quantity returning from the work is being
observed using a special processing.
The graph value becomes maximum at the point where the
light quantity is the greatest.

A-6 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)

Rough Head Alignment Between Head 3 Align the optical axes of the two heads.
Insert a screen and turn the “X/Y/θ adjustment knobs” while checking
1/2 (STEP 3) the spots visually, such that the spots overlap as much as possible.

1 Remove the reference target.

Loosen the two knurled

screws.

Remove the
reference
target
In the case of quad type, you can see four spots
because there are four optical axes.
Aligning the rotation direction of the four spots and
making them overlap as much as possible by turning
the “θ rotation knob” will make the precise adjustment
in STEP 4 easier to perform.

2 Mount the L shaped fixture for fixing the screen.

The Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement includes
a magnifier (3x), screen, and L shaped fixtures for fixing
the screen.

A
The adjustment can be made easily by using them as
shown in the figure below.

Fix by knurled
screws (2x) by
pressing in the arrow
direction.

Press L shaped fixture for

fixing the screen

By using screen, the

beam spots are visible
on the screen

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-7

 How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)

Precise Head Alignment Between

z What to do when adjustment is not possible
If the optical axis cannot be adjusted, perform the adjustment again by
Head 1/2 (STEP 4) following the procedure below.

Perform a more precise head alignment. 1 Return to STEP 3 and visually adjust the four optical
axes such that they overlap as much as possible.

For quad type If the spots cannot be checked visually due to

restrictions by the mounting conditions, return to
Align the four light axes accurately.
“Mounting on the Fixture” (Page A-4) and perform
Adjust the “X-axis adjustment knob” and “Y-axis adjustment knob”
STEP 1 to 3 again after adjusting the orientation of the
alternately such that the total of the current values of all optical axes is
HEAD LED.
maximized.

If there are differences among the values of the four

optical axes, go back to STEP 3 to visually align the 2 Perform the following adjustments in STEP 4.
spots using a magnifier and perform STEP 4 again.

The four light axes are not aligned.

(Start position)

Turn the “X/Y-axis adjustment knob” to increase

the value of Opt-axis1.
It does not matter if the values of other optical
axes get smaller or larger.

<Adjustment principle>
The adjustment is being made in search of a specific point ▼
where the light emitted from Head 1 can be received by
Head 2. Turn the “θ rotat.knob” slowly to rotate the head
Extremely precise optical axis adjustment can be on one side clockwise.
performed based on the confocal principle. The values in Stop the rotation when the value of Opt-axis1
the graph will increase as the light quantity that can be graph drops by about 20%.
received increases. It does not matter if the values of other optical
axes get smaller or larger.
Head 1

Head 2

A No light can be received if the optical

▼

axes are not aligned.

Adjust the “X/Y-axis adjustment knob” again such

that the value of Opt-axis1 becomes larger.

Light can be received if the optical axes

are aligned.

Repeat the procedure to adjust the angle such

that all four optical axis values will rise.
The head on one side rotates up to 360 degrees.

<Purpose of alignment>
If the optical axes are not aligned, a slight tilting of the
work will lead to an error in the thickness measurement.

Error

A-8 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) (OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286)

For spot type

Align the light axes accurately.
Adjust the “X-axis adjustment knob” and “Y-axis adjustment knob”
alternately such that the current value of the optical axis is maximized.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-9

 How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For High Precision Head CL-S015) (OP-88864)

How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness

Measurement (For High Precision Head CL-S015) (OP-88864)

Overall Flow

Mounting restrictions check

Some restrictions are applicable to the mounting.

Be sure to check “Installation Restrictions” (Page A-11) beforehand.

Pre-installation fixture check

If the fixture is to be reused, it is recommended that the adjustment and fixing screws for the
fixture be checked in advance.
Skip this step if using the fixture for the first time.

Mounting head 1

Mount head 1 to the fixture.

Mounting head 2

Mount head 2 to the fixture.

Adjusting the distance between the target and the head (STEP 1)

Use CL-NavigatorN to adjust the distance between the actual target and the sensor head.

▼ Estimated working

A
time is approx. 20
Rough head alignment between heads 1 and 2 (STEP 2) to 30 minutes.

Using the provided screen, adjust the light axes of head 1 and head 2 so that they overlap as
much as possible.

Head alignment between heads 1 and 2 (STEP 3)

Using CL-NavigatorN, precisely align and fix heads 1 and 2.

Measurement target installation

Place the target and check that it is correctly placed relative to the thickness and path line of the
workpiece.

A-10 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For High Precision Head CL-S015) (OP-88864)

Installation Restrictions Mounting head 1

1
The adjustable fixture for thickness measurement is a tool for precisely
adjusting the “head alignment” during thickness measurement. Loosen the head fixing screw and insert head 1.
If the mounting error exceeds the values shown in the figure below, Tighten the screws to temporarily secure the sensor
it may be impossible to perform head alignment within the adjustable
head in a position where it can be fixed (cylindrical part).
range.
Recommended tightening torque: 2.0 N·m
Check the installation environment.

Head fixing screw

Tilt with reference to

the measurement target:
0.2° or less
61.5

2 Mount the dropout prevention ring and temporarily fix

(15)

with screws.
Recommended tightening torque: 1.0 N·m
(15)

Dropout prevention
70

ring

Tilt with reference to

the measurement target:
0.2° or less

When measuring thickness at multiple places, the adjustable fixture for

Mounting head 2
thickness measurement (OP-88864) can be installed in close contact.

1 Loosen the head fixing screw and insert head 2.

Tighten the screws to temporarily secure the sensor

A
head in a position where it can be fixed (cylindrical
part).
Recommended tightening torque: 0.6 N·m

Min. 50 mm Min. 50 mm
pitch pitch

Head fixing screw

2 Attach the dropout prevention ring and temporarily fix

with screws.
Recommended tightening torque: 1.0 N·m

Dropout
prevention ring

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-11

 How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement (For High Precision Head CL-S015) (OP-88864)

Adjusting the distance between the Precise head alignment between

target and the head (STEP 1) heads 1 and 2 (STEP 3)

1 Set the actual target and adjust the distance between

the target and the head.
1 Align the two head light axes precisely.
Adjust the X-axis/Y-axis adjustment screws alternately to the point
Loosen the head fixing screws and the screw for the dropout prevention where the current value of the graph is the largest. After adjustment,
ring to adjust the head position, and then tighten the screws to secure tighten the fixing screws alternately.
the head where the measured value is near zero.

The closer to zero the distance from each sensor head to the surface The spot diameter of CL-S015 is 10 µm.
and back of the reference target, the greater the measurement If the spots on the top and bottom are off by more than 10 µm, the value
tolerance when the actual target variation or height changes. will be very small. In that case, return to Step2 and redo the rough
adjustment.

Rough head alignment between heads

1 and 2 (STEP 2)

1 Place the provided screen and adjust the X/Y axis

adjustment screw so that the two spots overlap as
closely as possible.
As the head position is fixed in the lower fixture, X and Y axis alignment
are made in the upper fixture.

A-12 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

When the Measurement Value is Unstable or Incorrect

Symptom Inspection content Fix

Is the averaging times set correctly? Configure the averaging times correctly.

Is there any dust or dirt on the front glass? Remove the dust and dirt.

The front glass must be replaced. Contact your nearest

Are there any scratches or cracks on the front glass?
KEYENCE office for repair.

If the surface is dirty, wipe with a cotton swab and replenish

Is the surface of the fiber connector greased? Is there
grease on the surface by inserting the fiber connector in the
any dirt on the surface?
included connector cap.

The measurement Are there water and/or oil droplets in the operating
Remove the droplets using an air purge or other device.
values are fluctuating. ambient environment?

• Use the mutual interference prevention function or the

Is there any mutual interference? emission control function.
• Mount the measuring part to a different position.

• Set the ambient light filter to ON.

Is there a strong ambient light?
• Block the ambient light.

Is the target or the measuring part vibrating? Put anti-vibration measures in place.

Are the head settings configured correctly? Configure the settings correctly.

Is the measurement target tilted or displaced? Place the measurement target in the measurement range.

Are the scaling and refractive index correction settings

Configure the settings correctly.
Measurement value correct?
display is incorrect. Is auto zero or offset enabled? Clear auto zero or set the offset to 0.

Are there rapid temperature changes in the operating

Keep the operating ambient temperature constant.
ambient environment?

Troubleshooting
Symptom Inspection content

Is the power cable connected properly?

Fix

Connect the power cable correctly.

Ref.

-
A
The PWR/ERR LED do not light
after switching ON the controller. Are you using a power supply that meets the Be sure to use a power supply that meets the
8-4
specification range? specification range.

• Does an error message appear when using

The PWR/ERR LED of the CL-NavigatorN for the communication? Take the necessary measures by following the
A-16
controller is lit (Red). • If you are using a display panel, is an error displayed error information.
No. displayed on the screen?

An error is displayed on the Take the necessary measures by following the

- A-16
screen. displayed error information.

Is the head cable firmly connected to the fiber

Plug the head cable firmly into the fiber adapter. 1-18
adapter?
The HEAD LED does not light.
Is the head cable or head extension cable
Try again with a different head or head cable. -
broken?

• Does an error message appear when using

CL-NavigatorN for the communication? Take the necessary measures by following the
A-16
• If you are using a display panel, is an error displayed error information.
No. displayed on the screen?

The sensor does not emit while in setting mode.

5-7
No light is being emitted. Is the system in setting mode? Exit setting mode and switch to measurement mode.
7-8
setting mode, and move to the measurement mode.

Is the encoder pulse signal coming in when the

operation mode of the encoder unit is set to Enter the encoder pulse signal correctly. 4-4
“TRIGGER”?

Is the emission stop input ON? Set the emission stop input to OFF. 6-2

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-13

 Troubleshooting

Symptom Inspection content Fix Ref.

• Turn OFF emission stop if it is ON.

Is light being emitted from the sensor head? • Check that the encoder pulse signal is entered 4-4
correctly.

Is the target object is inside the measurement

Place the target inside the measurement range. A-3
range?

Check the waveform data. Clear the mask setting, or move the target to a position
7-12
• Is the mask setting enabled? outside the masked area.

• If the light quantity control is set to [MANUAL],

change it to [AUTO].
• Check if some of the reflection light intensity is being
blocked by an obstacle.
• Try setting the detection threshold to [AUTO], or
Check the waveform data.
changing it to a smaller number in [MANUAL]. 3-14
• Is the peak too low?
• Try making the sampling cycle longer.
• The calibration of light intensity may have been
performed incorrectly. Perform a calibration of
light intensity again, or reset the calibration of light
intensity to the factory default settings.

• If the light quantity control is set to [MANUAL],

The measurement value becomes change it to [AUTO].
-FFFFFF. Check the waveform data. • The calibration of light intensity may have been
3-14
• Is the peak too high and saturated? performed incorrectly. Perform a calibration of
light intensity again, or reset the calibration of light
intensity to the factory default settings.

For example, when the minimum display unit is

“0.00001 mm”, “±9.99999mm” will be the upper
and lower limits of the measurements that can be
displayed. When the measurement value exceeds
Check the minimum display unit, offset, and
these limits, “+ FFFFFF” or “-FFFFFF” will be displayed 3-16
scaling settings.
(Display range exceeded).
Change the minimum display unit or adjust the offset/
scaling settings, such that the measurement value will
be in a displayable range.

[Target peak] is specified when performing the

measurement described on the left, but the
measurement value will be -FFFFFF if the specified
Have you selected [Displacement (Transparent peak does not exist.
object]) or [Thickness (Transparent object)] as (For example, If +1P and +2P (Two reflection lights) 3-5
the measurement method? are specified in [Thickness (Transparent object)]

A
but the target is non-transparent and only +1P (One
reflection light) exists, the measurement value will be
-FFFFFF.)

Is the stop measurement input ON? Set the stop measurement input to OFF. 6-2

Is the light off input turn ON? Turn OFF the light off input. 6-2

If set to other than [Normal], [Auto Peak hold] or [Auto

bottom hold], the measurement value is finalized
Check the hold mode settings. according to the external timing or internal timing. 3-17
The measurement value is Change the hold processing or follow the timing
displayed as “++++++”. process correctly.

If the averaging times is high, time will be needed

for “Sampling cycle x Averaging “ before the
Is measurement value displayed after waiting
measurement value can be finalized. The smaller the 3-16
for a while?
averaging times, the shorter it will take to display the
measurement values.

The control input is not taking Check in [I/O Monitor]. Re-wire the input terminals that
Is the input cable wired correctly? 4-9
effect correctly. do not change correctly.

The judgment output is not output Check in [I/O Monitor]. Re-wire the output terminals
Is the output cable wired correctly? 4-9
correctly. that do not change correctly.

Nothing appears in the display Is the display panel cable connected correctly? Connect the display panel cable correctly. 1-18
panel. Is the display panel cable broken? Try using another display panel cable. 1-18

Button operation does not work

Is the panel lock ON? Switch the panel lock to OFF. 4-5
on the display panel.

The PC freezes while using CL- Does the system environment of the PC meet Be sure to use it under a system environment that
1-9
NavigatorN. the specification range? meets the specification range.

A-14 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Troubleshooting

Symptom Inspection content Fix Ref.

Is USB selected in the [PC Connection

Select USB in [PC Connection Settings]. 4-12
Settings]?

USB connection to the controller Check that the CL-3000 Series is recognized correctly
fails when CL-NavigatorN is in the [Device Manager] screen.
Is the USB driver installed correctly? 7-2
started. If it is recognized as an unknown device or if the “!”
icon is shown, reinstall the USB driver.

Is the USB cable connected correctly? Connect the USB cable properly. -

Is Ethernet selected in the [PC Connection Select Ethernet in [PC Connection Settings] and set
Ethernet connection to the 4-12
Settings]? the IP address correctly.
controller fails when CL-
NavigatorN is started. Is the Ethernet cable connected correctly? Connect the Ethernet cable properly. -

Is the communication cable connected Connect the communication cable properly.

4-2
correctly? Check in the “Communication monitor” afterwards.

Check the wire connection of the communication

Are the wire connection specifications of the
cable. 4-10
communication cable correct?
Check in the [Communication monitor] afterwards.
RS-232C communication with Configure the settings such that the communication
external devices does not work. Are the communication condition configured specifications of this unit and the external instrument
4-10
correctly? are the same.
Check in the [Communication monitor] afterwards.

Check in the [Communication monitor] afterwards.

Is the communication program correct? Send the next command after confirming the reply 4-10
command from the controller.

Connect via USB to check the IP address setting of the

Is the IP address set correctly? controller in [Environment settings], and then configure 4-12
Ethernet communication with the settings correctly.
external devices does not work.
Is the Ethernet cable connected correctly? Connect the Ethernet cable properly. -

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-15

 Error Messages

Error Messages

Error Handling
Non-procedural
Error level Terminal output Status LED Display Panel CL-NavigatorN
communication

Error output ON,

System error (A) Solid (Red) Err+** Error message display Error code response
RUN output OFF

Error output ON,

System error (B) Solid (Red) Err+** Error message display Error code response
RUN output OFF

Setting error - Solid (Green) Err+** Error message display Error code response

Warning Warning output ON Solid (Orange) Warn** Warning display -

There are four types of errors and warnings depending on their level.
• System error (A) : Even if the cause of the error is eliminated, the error will not be cleared until the unit is restarted.
• System error (B) : The error is cleared when the cause of the error is eliminated.
• Setting error : If there is an error in the setting, the setting will not be applied and an error notification will be displayed.
• Warning : The warning is cleared when the cause of the warning is eliminated. Measurement will be performed even in warning status.

Error Message List

Warning
Error code Error name Cause Fix

• Check that the fiber connector is inserted all the way.

• If the warning persists, perform a calibration on the
target head.
Head 01 to Head 06 The waveform is not normal due to an error in
• If the warning still persists, replenish grease on
War-1 to 6 Reflection light intensity the connection of Head n (n: Head No.) and the
the fiber connector by inserting into the included
error optical unit.
connector cap, and then re-insert it into the adapter.
If you have lost the connector cap, contact your local
KEYENCE office.

Head 01 to Head 06 The operation of the fan mounted in the optical The fan must be replaced. Contact your nearest
War-7 to 12
FAN driving error unit for Head n (n: Head No.) is abnormal. KEYENCE office for repair.

A Setting error
Error code Error name Cause Fix

Err-71 Command format error The command length or format is incorrect. Check that the command is configured correctly.

• Check the correct communication cable is being

5 seconds passed for the receive interval per used.
Err-72 Timeout error
character of the ASCII command. • Check that the command is sent/received correctly
in the communication log monitor.

The command length of the communication

Err-73 Command length error Set the command length correctly.
command is invalid.

Undefined command
Err-74 An undefined command was received. Check that the command is configured correctly.
error

The controller can not receive communication Change the state of the controller or send a command
Err-81 Status error
commands. that can be received.

The parameter count of the communication

Err-82 Parameter count error Set the parameter count correctly.
command is invalid.

The setting value is outside the permitted

Err-83 Parameter range error Configure the setting value correctly.
range.

Send the correct command by referring to the

Err-84 or higher Command-specific error A command-specific error has occurred. description page of each command.
“Control/Data Output via Commands” (Page 7-4)

A-16 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Error Messages

System error
If a device replacement is needed or if you do not have spare parts at hand, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

z System error (A)

Error code Error name Cause Fix

• Check the connection of the optical unit and switch

the power back ON.
Head 01 to Head 06 Failed to communicate with the optical unit for
Err-01 to 06 • If errors continue to occur after restoring power, the
error Head n (n: Head No.).
optical unit may be damaged. Replace the optical
unit and switch the power back ON.

Head not connected Check the connection of the optical unit and switch the
Err-11 No optical unit is found.
error power back ON.

Connected head count Number of connected optical units has Check the connection of the optical unit and switch the
Err-13
error exceeded the maximum connection limit. power back ON.

• Check the connection of the add-on unit and switch

the power back ON.
Failed to communicate with the add-on unit • If errors continue to occur after switching the power
Err-16 to 17 Add-on unit error
(such as the encoder unit). back ON, the add-on unit may be malfunctioning.
Replace the add-on unit and switch the power back
ON.

Connected expansion unit Number of connected expansion units has Check the connection of the expansion unit and switch
Err-19
count error exceeded the maximum connection limit. the power back ON.

Same expansion unit The same type of the expansion unit is Check the connection of the expansion unit and switch
Err-20
type error connected. the power back ON.

If errors continue to occur after switching the power

An error has occurred in the internal device of
Err-21 Controller device error back ON, the controller may be malfunctioning.
the controller.
Replace the controller and switch the power back ON.

If errors continue to occur after switching the power

An error has occurred in the internal memory of
Err-22 to 25 Controller memory error back ON, the controller may be malfunctioning.
the controller.
Replace the controller and switch the power back ON.

The optical unit (CL-***N (end is “N”)) can be

Combination model connected only to the CL-3000 controller. It Change to a connectable combination, and turn on the
Err-27
mismatch error does not work with a controller of a different power again.
model.

Err-31 to 33, An operational error has occurred in the The controller may be malfunctioning.
Controller error
Err-35 controller. Replace the controller and switch the power back ON.

Err-36
Ethernet communication
error
An error has occurred in the Ethernet
communication device of the controller.
The Ethernet communication device of the controller
may be malfunctioning.
Replace the controller and switch the power back ON.
A
The USB communication device of the controller may
USB communication An error has occurred in the USB
Err-37 be malfunctioning.
error communication device of the controller.
Replace the controller and switch the power back ON.

The RS-232C communication device of the controller

RS-232C An error has occurred in the RS-232C
Err-38 may be malfunctioning.
communication error communication device of the controller.
Replace the controller and switch the power back ON.

z System error (B)

Error code Error name Cause Fix

• The head to be measured is not in a normal

status at startup (in “Not connected” or “Error”
Head 01 to Head 06
Err-51 to 56 status). Initialize the settings data and restart the unit.
error
• If the connected and configured head
configurations are different at startup.

• If the expansion unit used in the settings

Start up the unit after initializing the expansion unit
Err-61 to 62 Expansion unit error is not in normal status (“Not connected” or
settings.
“Error”) at startup.

An error has occurred in the settings data of the

Err-65 Setting data error Initialize the settings data and restart the unit.
controller.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-17

 License Information

License Information
Describe the license information on the software used in this product.

[U-Boot]
U-Boot is Free Software. It is copyrighted by Wolfgang Denk and many others who contributed code (see the actual source code for details). You can
redistribute U-Boot and/or modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation. Most
of it can also be distributed, at your option, under any later version of the GNU General Public License -- see individual files for exceptions.
NOTE! This license does *not* cover the so-called “standalone” applications that use U-Boot services by means of the jump table provided by U-Boot
exactly for this purpose - this is merely considered normal use of U-Boot, and does *not* fall under the heading of “derived work”.
The header files “include/image.h” and “include/asm-*/u-boot.h” define interfaces to U-Boot. Including these (unmodified) header files in another file is
considered normal use of U-Boot, and does
*not* fall under the heading of “derived work”.
Also note that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it refers to (the U-Boot source code) is
copyrighted by me and others who actually wrote it. -- Wolfgang Denk

======================================================================
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the
freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can
change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually

A
obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s
free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms
of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is
not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the
Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in
the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else,
saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of
this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is
not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must
be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who
wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to
control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a

A-18 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 License Information

storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software interchange;
or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing
source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all
the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source
code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the
Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program
(or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or
modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor
to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution
of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section
has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people
have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is
up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright
holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is
permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
A
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later
version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions
for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and
reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE
THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

======================================================================

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-19

 License Information

[newlib]
The newlib subdirectory is a collection of software from several sources.
Each file may have its own copyright/license that is embedded in the source file. Unless otherwise noted in the body of the source file(s), the following
copyright notices will apply to the contents of the newlib subdirectory:
(1) Red Hat Incorporated
Copyright (c) 1994-2009 Red Hat, Inc. All rights reserved.
This copyrighted material is made available to anyone wishing to use, modify, copy, or redistribute it subject to the terms and conditions of the BSD
License. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY expressed or implied, including the implied
warranties of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. A copy of this license is available at http://www.opensource.org/
licenses. Any Red Hat trademarks that are incorporated in the source code or documentation are not subject to the BSD License and may only be used or
replicated with the express permission of Red Hat, Inc.
(2) University of California, Berkeley
Copyright (c) 1981-2000 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(3) David M. Gay (AT&T 1991, Lucent 1998)
The author of this software is David M. Gay.
Copyright (c) 1991 by AT&T.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all
copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software.
THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHOR
NOR AT&T MAKES ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

-------------------------------------------------------------------
The author of this software is David M. Gay.
Copyright (C) 1998-2001 by Lucent Technologies
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the

A
above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of Lucent or any of its entities not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without
specific, written prior permission.
LUCENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL LUCENT OR ANY OF ITS ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
(4) Advanced Micro Devices
Copyright 1989, 1990 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
This software is the property of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc (AMD) which specifically grants the user the right to modify, use and distribute this software
provided this notice is not removed or altered. All other rights are reserved by AMD.
AMD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMD BE LIABLE
FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE.
So that all may benefit from your experience, please report any problems or suggestions about this software to the 29K Technical Support Center at
800-29-29-AMD (800-292-9263) in the USA, or 0800-89-1131 in the UK, or 0031-11-1129 in Japan, toll free. The direct dial number is 512-462-4118.
Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
29K Support Products
Mail Stop 573
5900 E. Ben White Blvd.
Austin, TX 78741
800-292-9263
(5)
(6)
(7) Sun Microsystems
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is preserved.
(8) Hewlett Packard
(c) Copyright 1986 HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
To anyone who acknowledges that this file is provided “AS IS” without any express or implied warranty:
permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this file for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice and
this notice appears in all copies, and that the name of Hewlett-Packard Company not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.

A-20 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 License Information

Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose.
(9) Hans-Peter Nilsson
Copyright (C) 2001 Hans-Peter Nilsson
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that the above copyright notice, this notice and the following
disclaimer are preserved with no changes.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
(10) Stephane Carrez (m68hc11-elf/m68hc12-elf targets only)
Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Stephane Carrez ([email protected])
The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that
existing copyright notices are retained in all copies and that this notice is included verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty
fee is required for any of the authorized uses.
Modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their authors and need not follow the licensing terms described here, provided that the new terms are
clearly indicated on the first page of each file where they apply.
(11) Christopher G. Demetriou
Copyright (c) 2001 Christopher G. Demetriou
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(12) SuperH, Inc.
Copyright 2002 SuperH, Inc. All rights reserved
This software is the property of SuperH, Inc (SuperH) which specifically grants the user the right to modify, use and distribute this software provided this
notice is not removed or altered. All other rights are reserved by SuperH.
SUPERH MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUPERH BE
LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING FROM
THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
So that all may benefit from your experience, please report any problems or suggestions about this software to the SuperH Support Center via e-mail at
[email protected] .
SuperH, Inc.
405 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose

A
CA 95134
USA
(13) Royal Institute of Technology
Copyright (c) 1999 Kungliga Tekniska H?gskolan
(Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden).
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of KTH nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY KTH AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL KTH OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(14) Alexey Zelkin
Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 Alexey Zelkin <[email protected]>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(15) Andrey A. Chernov
Copyright (C) 1997 by Andrey A. Chernov, Moscow, Russia.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-21

 License Information

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(16) FreeBSD
Copyright (c) 1997-2002 FreeBSD Project.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(17) S. L. Moshier
Author: S. L. Moshier.
Copyright (c) 1984,2000 S.L. Moshier
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all
copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software.
THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, THE AUTHOR MAKES
NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
(18) Citrus Project
Copyright (c)1999 Citrus Project,
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

A
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(19) Todd C. Miller

Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller <[email protected]>

All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(20) DJ Delorie (i386)
Copyright (C) 1991 DJ Delorie
All rights reserved.
Redistribution, modification, and use in source and binary forms is permitted provided that the above copyright notice and following paragraph are
duplicated in all such forms.
This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
(21) Free Software Foundation LGPL License (*-linux* targets only)
Copyright (C) 1990-1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This file is part of the GNU C Library.
Contributed by Mark Kettenis <[email protected]>, 1997.
The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.

A-22 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 License Information

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with the GNU C Library; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA.
(22) Xavier Leroy LGPL License (i[3456]86-*-linux* targets only)
Copyright (C) 1996 Xavier Leroy ([email protected])
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details.
(23) Intel (i960)
Copyright (c) 1993 Intel Corporation
Intel hereby grants you permission to copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation. Intel grants this permission provided that the above
copyright notice appears in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. In addition, Intel
grants this permission provided that you prominently mark as “not part of the original” any modifications made to this software or documentation, and that
the name of Intel Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software or the documentation without specific, written
prior permission.
Intel Corporation provides this AS IS, WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Intel makes no guarantee or representations regarding the use of, or the
results of the use of, the software and documentation in terms of correctness, accuracy, reliability, currentness, or otherwise; and you rely on the software,
documentation and results solely at your own risk.
IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL’S TOTAL LIABILITY EXCEED THE SUM PAID TO INTEL FOR THE
PRODUCT LICENSED HEREUNDER.
(24) Hewlett-Packard (hppa targets only)
(c) Copyright 1986 HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
To anyone who acknowledges that this file is provided “AS IS” without any express or implied warranty:
permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this file for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice and
this notice appears in all copies, and that the name of Hewlett-Packard Company not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any
purpose.
(25) Henry Spencer (only *-linux targets)
Copyright 1992, 1993, 1994 Henry Spencer. All rights reserved.
This software is not subject to any license of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company or of the Regents of the University of California.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose on any computer system, and to alter it and redistribute it, subject to the following
restrictions:
1. The author is not responsible for the consequences of use of this software, no matter how awful, even if they arise from flaws in it.
2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented, either by explicit claim or by omission. Since few users ever read sources, credits must appear
in the documentation.
3. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. Since few users ever read sources,
credits must appear in the documentation.

A
4. This notice may not be removed or altered.
(26) Mike Barcroft
Copyright (c) 2001 Mike Barcroft <[email protected]>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(27) Konstantin Chuguev (--enable-newlib-iconv)
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000
Konstantin Chuguev. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
iconv (Charset Conversion Library) v2.0
(28) Artem Bityuckiy (--enable-newlib-iconv)
Copyright (c) 2003, Artem B. Bityuckiy, SoftMine Corporation.
Rights transferred to Franklin Electronic Publishers.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-23

 License Information

other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(29) IBM, Sony, Toshiba (only spu-* targets)
(C) Copyright 2001,2006,
International Business Machines Corporation,
Sony Computer Entertainment, Incorporated,
Toshiba Corporation,
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the names of the copyright holders nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(30) - Alex Tatmanjants (targets using libc/posix)
Copyright (c) 1995 Alex Tatmanjants <[email protected]>
at Electronni Visti IA, Kiev, Ukraine.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(31) - M. Warner Losh (targets using libc/posix)

A
Copyright (c) 1998, M. Warner Losh <[email protected]>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(32) - Andrey A. Chernov (targets using libc/posix)
Copyright (C) 1996 by Andrey A. Chernov, Moscow, Russia.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(33) - Daniel Eischen (targets using libc/posix)
Copyright (c) 2001 Daniel Eischen <[email protected]>.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

A-24 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 License Information

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(34) - Jon Beniston (only lm32-* targets)
Contributed by Jon Beniston <[email protected]>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, NCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(35) - ARM Ltd (arm and thumb variant targets only)
Copyright (c) 2009 ARM Ltd
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the company may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ARM LTD “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL ARM
LTD BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(36) - Xilinx, Inc. (microblaze-* and powerpc-* targets)
Copyright (c) 2004, 2009 Xilinx, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/
or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Xilinx nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

A
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(37) Texas Instruments Incorporated (tic6x-*, *-tirtos targets)
Copyright (c) 1996-2010,2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated
http://www.ti.com/
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(38) National Semiconductor (cr16-* and crx-* targets)
Copyright (c) 2004 National Semiconductor Corporation
The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that
existing copyright notices are retained in all copies and that this notice is included verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty
fee is required for any of the authorized uses.
Modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their authors and need not follow the licensing terms described here, provided that the new terms are
clearly indicated on the first page of each file where they apply.
(39) - Adapteva, Inc. (epiphany-* targets)
Copyright (c) 2011, Adapteva, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-25

 License Information

* Neither the name of Adapteva nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(40) - Altera Corportion (nios2-* targets)
Copyright (c) 2003 Altera Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/
or other materials provided with the distribution.
oN  either the name of Altera Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ALTERA CORPORATION, THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER, AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(41) Ed Schouten - Free BSD
Copyright (c) 2008 Ed Schouten <[email protected]>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
===libgcc===============================================================================
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>

A
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all
its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this
way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the
freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can
change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain
responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake,
the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so.
This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the
area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit
the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future
versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on
general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively
proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

0. Definitions.
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and recipients may be
individuals or organizations.

A-26 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 License Information

To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact
copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.
A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under
applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without
modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer
network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1)
displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided),
that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or
options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
1. Source Code.
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work.
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified
for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging
a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to
implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A Major Component, in this context, means a
major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler
used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run
the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries, or general-
purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For
example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and
dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
subprograms and other parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met.
This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this
License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided
by copyright law.
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You
may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running
those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making
or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any
copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it
unnecessary.

A
3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO
copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is
effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the
work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with
section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4,
provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement
modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore
apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This
License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which
are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an aggregate if the compilation
and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a
covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable
Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding
Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid
for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the
object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-27

 License Information

medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source,
or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only
occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b.
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding
Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with
the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you
or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as
needed to satisfy these requirements.
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of
the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d.
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in
conveying the object code work.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or
household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful
cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of
that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to
use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless
such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.
“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute
modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure
that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a
transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how
the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this
requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work
has been installed in ROM).
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work
that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied
when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the
network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and
with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional
permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under
applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire
Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional
permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material,
added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that

A
material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by
works containing it; or
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as
different from the original version; or
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual
assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any
part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license
document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the
terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply
to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above
requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until
the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable
means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior
to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If
your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely
as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License
grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.

A-28 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 License Information

10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.

Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work,
subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging
organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also
receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of
the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose
a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or
counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of
it.
11. Patents.
A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus
licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.
A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that
would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would
be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant
patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to
make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as
an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make
such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free
of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1)
cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3)
arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means
you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a
country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and
grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the
covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise
of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement
with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of
conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent
license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with
specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28
March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available
to you under applicable patent law.

A
12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse
you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any
other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty
for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain
entirely from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of
the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to
the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a
network will apply to the combination as such.
14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or
any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published
by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version
ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of
acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright
holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED
IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-29

 License Information

If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall
apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of
liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software
which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of
warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program.
If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
<program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program’s
commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary.
For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you
may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public
License instead of this License. But first, please read
<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.

GCC RUNTIME LIBRARY EXCEPTION

Version 3.1, 31 March 2009
Copyright (C) 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
This GCC Runtime Library Exception (“Exception”) is an additional permission under section 7 of the GNU General Public License, version 3 (“GPLv3”). It
applies to a given file (the “Runtime Library”) that bears a notice placed by the copyright holder of the file stating that the file is governed by GPLv3 along
with this Exception.
When you use GCC to compile a program, GCC may combine portions of certain GCC header files and runtime libraries with the compiled program. The

A
purpose of this Exception is to allow compilation of non-GPL (including proprietary) programs to use, in this way, the header files and runtime libraries
covered by this Exception.
0. Definitions.
A file is an “Independent Module” if it either requires the Runtime Library for execution after a Compilation Process, or makes use of an interface provided
by the Runtime Library, but is not otherwise based on the Runtime Library.
GCC means a version of the GNU Compiler Collection, with or without modifications, governed by version 3 (or a specified later version) of the GNU
General Public License (GPL) with the option of using any subsequent versions published by the FSF.
GPL-compatible Software is software whose conditions of propagation, modification and use would permit combination with GCC in accord with the
license of GCC.
Target Code refers to output from any compiler for a real or virtual target processor architecture, in executable form or suitable for input to an assembler,
loader, linker and/or execution phase. Notwithstanding that, Target Code does not include data in any format that is used as a compiler intermediate
representation, or used for producing a compiler intermediate representation.
The “Compilation Process” transforms code entirely represented in non-intermediate languages designed for human-written code, and/or in Java
Virtual Machine byte code, into Target Code. Thus, for example, use of source code generators and preprocessors need not be considered part of the
Compilation Process, since the Compilation Process can be understood as starting with the output of the generators or preprocessors.
A Compilation Process is “Eligible” if it is done using GCC, alone or with other GPL-compatible software, or if it is done without using any work based on
GCC. For example, using non-GPL-compatible Software to optimize any GCC intermediate representations would not qualify as an Eligible Compilation
Process.
1. Grant of Additional Permission.
You have permission to propagate a work of Target Code formed by combining the Runtime Library with Independent Modules, even if such propagation
would otherwise violate the terms of GPLv3, provided that all Target Code was generated by Eligible Compilation Processes. You may then convey such a
combination under terms of your choice, consistent with the licensing of the Independent Modules.
2. No Weakening of GCC Copyleft.
The availability of this Exception does not imply any general presumption that third-party software is unaffected by the copyleft requirements of the license
of GCC.

[Altera hwlib]
Copyright 2013 Altera Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.

A-30 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 License Information

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-31

 Index

Index
Numerics Connecting the Head Extension Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Connecting the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1. Rough originating in XY directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Connecting to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
2 heads thickness measurement check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Connecting to CL-NavigatorN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2. Rough tilt originating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Connecting to the pass through fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
3. Rough rotation originating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
[Connection] menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
4. Rough originating of the reference target angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Connection with a Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
8 mm diameter compact head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Connector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
8 mm diameter compact head (CL-P007/L007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Connect with Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
15 mm/30 mm/70 mm/150 mm heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Connect with USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
15 mm head (CL-P015/L015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Control data details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
20 mm vacuum and high temperature head (CL-V020)/
Control Data Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45, 7-55
50 mm vacuum and high temperature head (CL-V050) . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Control data list (PLC → Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
30 mm head (CL-P030/L030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Control data list (PLC → This unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
70 mm head (CL-P070/L070) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Control data list (PLC ->This unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43, 7-54
150mm head (CL-P150/L150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Control/Data output using EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
A Control/Data Output Using PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement: Control/data output via commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
For 15 mm head (OP-88284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Control/Data Output via PLC Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement: Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 6-5
For 30 mm head (OP-88285) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Controller (CL-3000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 8-8
Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement: Controller specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
For 70 mm head (OP-88286) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Cyclic and message communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Adjustable fixture for thickness measurement: Cyclic communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28, 7-29
For high precision head Cyclic Communication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
(OP-88864) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Cyclic communication specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Adjusting the angle of the head relative to the reference target
(STEP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 D
Adjusting the distance between the target and the head
Data display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
(STEP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14, 7-17
Adjusting the position of the head relative to the reference target
Data storage step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
(STEP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Detection Function of IP Address Conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Alarm communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Analog OUT allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Analog output scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Displacement (transparent object) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Analog output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Displaying the Setting Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Angle adjustment of the reference target and measurement target . . A-5
Display panel (CL-D500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 8-12
Adjustment in the horizontal direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Display Panel operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Adjustment in the vertical direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Display panel settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Display Panel Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Auto zero function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

A
Auto zero input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
E
B Each command parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Each function setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Basic format for message communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Each mode display by key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Basic Operation of the Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
[Basic] tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Binary Command Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Encoder Input Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Encoder settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
C Encoder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-6
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Encoder unit (CL-E100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 8-11
Calibration of Light Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16, 5-9 Environment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Changing EtherCAT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 Error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Changing PROFINET Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Error message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Changing the display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Changing the Ethernet communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 EtherCAT unit (CL-EC100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 8-11
Changing the RS-232C communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 EtherCAT Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Changing Tolerance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Character display of the Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Ethernet settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Characteristics chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Ethernet settings for PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Checking the Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Example of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Clear data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Example Telnet software to controller TCP/IP communication . . . . . 7-27
Clear pulse count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Expansion analog unit (CL-H150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 6-3, 6-5
Command details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Expansion cable (CL-AC1/CL-AC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Expansion cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Expansion unit (CL-H100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-11
Command parameter example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Expansion unit/relay unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Common settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 F
Communication command execution service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Fan setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Communication Log Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Fast measurement value output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Communication monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Fast measurement value output : Command Code 0x05 . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-28, 7-40
Field network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Configuring the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
[File] menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Connecting Additional Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Fixing the Controller/Optical Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Connecting the controller to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Functions of the Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Connecting the Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Connecting the Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Connecting the Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

A-32 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Index

G M
Get index for fast measurement value output : Mailbox Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Command Code 0x04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Mask setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Get pulse count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Measured value display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Get storage data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Measurement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Get storage data : Command Code 0x03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Measurement Data Processing Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Get storage data index : command code 0x02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Measurement Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Get storage status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Measurement processing input buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25, 7-26 Measurement range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Go to measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Measurement Settings Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Go to setting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Measurement value format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Graph display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Measurement Value Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Measurement value output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Measurement value output : command code 0x01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
H Median Filter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 8-9 Memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30, 7-41, 7-53, 7-59
Head Alignment Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Head configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Message communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28, 7-37
Head extension cable Message communications operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
(CL-C5 (5 m)/CL-C10 (10 m)/CL-C30 (30 m)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Minimum display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Head extension cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Minimum Input Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Head fixture A (For 8 mm diameter compact head) (OP-88353) . . . 8-13 Mode change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Head fixture B (For 8 mm diameter compact head) (OP-88354) . . . 8-13 Models Supported for PLC Link Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Head fixture C (For 8 mm diameter compact head) (OP-88355) . . . 8-13 Module which Can be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Head fixture (For 15 mm/30 mm/70 mm/150 mm heads) Monitor data details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33, 7-44, 7-55
(OP-88283) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Monitor data list (Controller -> PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Head fixture (for high precision head) (OP-88863) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Monitor data list (This unit → PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Head fixture (For Profile measuring heads) (OP-88289) . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Monitor data list (This unit -> PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41, 7-53
Head settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 [Monitor/display] menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Height difference (2 heads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Monitor functions and operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
[Help] menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Mounting and connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Hierarchical list of the menu in the settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Mounting head 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4, A-11
High precision head (CL-S015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14, 8-10 Mounting head 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Hold processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Mounting Head 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
How to Use the adjustable fixture for thickness measurement Mounting on the fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
(For 15 mm head/30 mm head/70 mm head) Mounting on the side of a rack, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
(OP-88284/OP-88285/OP-88286) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Mounting the Controller/Optical Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
How to Use the Adjustable Fixture for Thickness Measurement Mounting the Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
(For High Precision Head CL-S015) (OP-88864) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10 Mounting the Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
How to use the terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Mounting the Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Mounting the head using head fixture A
(OP-88353, sold separately) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
I Mounting the head using head fixture C
Identity Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 (OP-88355, sold separately) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Input circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 6-6 Mounting the Optical Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Input mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Mounting the Relay Unit on the Optical Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Input/Output Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Mutual interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Input/Output Terminal Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

A
Input Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Installation restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 N
Installation Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11 Names and Functions of the I/O Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Installing CL-NavigatorN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Names and Functions of the Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Installing the USB driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 N.O./N.C. setting reflection timing at startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
In the case of Encoder Trigger (Skipping point 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Non-procedural communication via Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Invalid data processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 7-13 Non-procedural communication via RS-232C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Notes on command input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
I/O terminal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Number input of the Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
IP Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

O
J Object configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Judgment output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Object Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Judgment output method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Objects and services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16, 7-15
Offset Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
L One-to-one connection with a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Light axis match acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Operation example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35, 7-47, 7-56
Light-axis region diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Optical unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Optical unit (CL-P***N/CL-L***N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Optical unit (CL-S***N/CL-V***N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Optional Product List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Option settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Output circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Output Logic with Different Judgment Output Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Output terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Outputting the Measurement Data with PLC Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Overall flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Overall Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Overview of EtherCAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Overview of PLC Link Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Overview of PROFINET Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-33

 Index

Software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

P Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Panel control (Lock/unlock panel operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Specify invalid data processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Parameter description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 Specify mask setting range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Parameter details (PLC → This controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Specify offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Parameter details (PLC -> This Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55 Specify scaling setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Parameter Details (PLC -> This Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 Specify tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Parameter details (This controller → PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 Standard package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Parameter Details (This Unit -> PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44, 7-55 Standard Specifications, Connector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-3
Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Start automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Pass through fixture Start data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
(for high precision head/vacuum and high temperature head) Starting up CL-NavigatorN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
(OP-88859) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Starting up in offline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
PC Communication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Starting up the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Precise head alignment between Head 1/2 (STEP 4) . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
For quad type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 Start-up and shut-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
For spot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 Status Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Precise head alignment between heads 1 and 2 (STEP 3) . . . . . . A-12 STEP 1: System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Preparation for the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 STEP 2: Measurement method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Preparing the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51 STEP 3: Judgment output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Process data object communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58 Stop automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Profile measuring head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Stop data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Profile measuring head (CL-PT010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Switching Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Program functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Switching the measurement value display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Programming Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Switching the top display and bottom display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Pulse Count Preset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Switch program No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
System error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
R System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 7-2
Read invalid data processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Read mask setting range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Read offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 T
Read program No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Terminal allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Read scaling value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Terminal operation of Auto Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Read Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Terminal operation of Emission stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Read tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Terminal operation of Stop Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Relay unit (CL-H200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-11 Terminal operation of Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Representative terminal operation at startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Terminal operation of Switch Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Reset measurement value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Terminal operation when the hold mode is “Auto peak hold” . . . . . . 6-11
Response delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Terminal operation when the hold mode is “Normal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Terminal operation when the hold mode is
Restore the device setting to factory defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 “Peak hold/Bottom hold/Peak-to-peak hold/Average hold”,
Return fixture to original orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 and the update condition is “External Timing 1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Rough head alignment between Head 1/2 (STEP 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 Terminal operation when the hold mode is
Rough head alignment between heads 1 and 2 (STEP 2) . . . . . . . A-12 “Peak hold/Bottom hold/Peak-to-peak hold/Average hold”,
RS-232C Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 and the update condition is “External Timing 2” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
RS-232C settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 The terminal operation when the hold mode is
RS-232C Settings (Baud Rate Settings and Parity Settings) . . . . . . 5-13 “Sample hold”, and the update condition is “External Timing 1” . . . . . 6-9

A
The terminal operation when the hold mode is
“Sample hold”, and the update condition is “External Timing 2” . . . . 6-10
S The terminal operation when the update condition
Sampling setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 of the hold processing is “Internal Timing” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
[Save] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Thickness (2 heads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Save Settings to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Thickness (transparent object) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Saving and reading settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Timing Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16, 7-14 Timing input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Scaling, Offset, and Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 To change the settings on the Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25, 7-26
Scaling Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 To change the settings using CL-NavigatorN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25, 7-26
Search Threshold setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Tolerance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Selecting the Communication Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Tool function and its operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Selecting the Head Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 [Tool] menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Selecting the OUT Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 [Transparent object] tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sensor Head and Optical Unit Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Service object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
[Set Prog.] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Setting error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16 U
Setting Invalid Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Uninstalling CL-NavigatorN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Setting item selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Setting of IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Setting of IP Address at the Next Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Setting of the Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 V
Setting of the Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Vacuum and high temperature head (CL-V020/CL-V050) . . . . . . . . 1-14
Setting of the Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Setting the Controller IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Shutting down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 W
Shutting down CL-NavigatorN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Side view fixture (for 8 mm diameter compact head) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Waveform display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Side view fixture (For 8 mm diameter compact head) Waveform display change buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
(OP‑88860) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 What Can be Done by Cyclic Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Side view fixture (for 30 mm head) What process data object communications can do . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
(OP-88861) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 When the measurement value is unstable or incorrect . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Side view fixture (For 30mm head) (OP‑88861) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 When using non-procedural commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Side view fixture When using number-specified commands
(For vacuum and high temperature head CL-V020/ CL-V050) (EtherNet/IP, PLC-Link, PROFINET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
(OP-88862) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Side view fixture
(For vacuum and high temperature heads CL-V020/ CL-V050)
(OP‑88862) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
[Signal processing] tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

A-34 - CL-3000 Series User’s Manual -

 Index

MEMO

- CL-3000 Series User’s Manual - A-35

Revision history

Revision history Edition number Revision details

October 2018 2nd edition

February 2019 Revised 1st edition Support for PROFINET and PLC-Link communication.

August 2019 Revised 2nd edition

October 2019 2nd revision

1st edition

November 2020 3rd revision

1st edition

November 2021 3rd revision

2nd edition

April 2023 3rd revision

3rd edition

December 2023 4th revision

1st edition

March 2024 4th revision

2nd edition
 WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year
from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would
necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by
KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or
outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it
is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans,
for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise.
Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no
responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or
damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST
OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF
KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM
FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty
disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.

BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide
such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information
provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2023 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 261043GB 2034-2 H94GB Printed in Japan